m/s. krifor industries pvt. ltd.environmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/eia/10092014...m/s. krifor...

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND EMP REPORT FOR PROPOSED CAPTIVE RESIN MANUFACTURING UNIT (1500 TPM) AT SURVEY NO. 35/1, 35/2 & 36, VILLAGE ALVA, TALUKA HANSOT, DISTRICT BHARUCH, GUJARAT. PROJECT PROPONENT:

M/S. KRIFOR INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD.

PREPARED BY:

en-VISI n ENVIRO ENGINEERS PVT. LTD. 208 - 213 / G - TOWER, SHANKHESHWAR COMPLEX, SAGRAMPURA, SURAT - 395 002, GUJARAT.

JUNE, 2014 1410085_13010044_0626

M/

S.

KR

IF

OR

IN

DU

ST

RI

ES

PV

T.

LT

D.

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

AND EMP REPORT

CLIENT

PROJECT TITLE

PROJECT NO.

:

:

:

M/S. KRIFOR INDUSTRIES PRIVATE LIMITED

SURVEY NO. 35/1, 35/2 & 36, VILLAGE ALVA,

TALUKA HANSOT, DISTRICT BHARUCH,

GUJARAT.

ENVIRONMENTAL IMAPCT ASSESSMENT AND EMP

REPORT FOR PROPOSED CAPTIVE RESIN

MANUFACTURING UNIT

13010044

** PREPARED BY **

en-VISI n ENVIRO ENGINEERS PVT. LTD. 208 - 213 / G - TOWER,

SHANKHESHWAR COMPLEX,

SAGRAMPURA, SURAT - 395 002

GUJARAT

Website: en-vision.in, E-mail: [email protected]

e n - V I S I n

PROJECT TITLE M/s. Krifor Industries Private Limited

CORRESPONDENSE ADDERESS

Mr. Mandeep Bajaj (Director) M/s. Krifor Industries Private Limited Dalmia House, Plot No. 86, Opposite Anmol Market, Umarvada, Ring road, Surat 395002, Gujarat.

PROJECT NO.: 13010044 DATE: 26/06/2014

CATEGORY OF THE PROJECT AS PER EIA NOTIFICATION, DATED 14TH SEPTEMBER, 2006 AND AS AMENDED TILL DATE

A, 5(f) Synthetic Organic Chemicals Industry

DETAILS REQUIRED AS PER NABET, QCI GUIDELINES

NABET SECTOR NO. 21

FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERTS INVOLVED IN PREPARATION OF REPORT:

AREA NAME SIGNATURE

EIA CO-ORDINATOR Mr. Nihar Doctor

METEOROLOGY, AIR QUALITY MODELING & PREDICTION

Mr. Nihar Doctor

WATER POLLUTION MONITORING, PREVENTION, & CONTROL

Mr. Nihar Doctor

SOLID & HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT

Mr. Nihar Doctor

AIR POLLUTION MONITORING, PREVENTION & CONTROL

Dr. Manoj Kumar Mishra

NOISE & VIBRATION Dr. Manoj Kumar Mishra

LAND USE Dr. Y. Ramamohan

ECOLOGY & BIODIVERSITY Dr. Manoj Eledath

SOCIO-ECONOMOICS Dr. Rumjhum Ray Chaudhary

HYDROLOGY, GROUND WATER & WATER CONSERVATION

Mr. Naresh Gor

RISK ASSESSMENT & HAZARD MANAGEMENT

Mr. D. H. Patel

NAME & DESIGNATION

SIGNATURE

PREPARED BY Mr. Krunal Patel

CHECKED BY EIA CO-ORDINATOR Mr. Nihar Doctor

AUTHENTICATED BY Mr. Mandeep Bajaj (Director)

e n - V I S I n

M/S. KRIFOR INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD., BHARUCH, GUJARAT.

PREFACE

M/s. Krifor Industries Private Limited has proposed Captive Resin Manufacturing Unit in

existing premises (1500 TPM) located at Survey No.: 35/1, 35/2 & 36, Village Alva, Taluka

Hansot, District Bharuch, Gujarat.

As per EIA Notification 2006, the proposed project is categorized as A, 5(f) Synthetic Organic

Chemicals Industry. In order to assess the likely impacts arising out of the proposed project,

M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. had appointed M/s. En-vision Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd., Surat

(Gujarat), to undertake the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study for the various

environmental components which may be affected, to assess the impact arising out of the

proposed project and to prepare a detailed Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to

minimize those adverse impacts.

The cooperation and assistance rendered by M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. in the preparation

of this report is gratefully acknowledged.

M/s. En-vision Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd.

e n - V I S I n

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY OF DRAFT EIA & EMP REPORT

M/S. KRIFOR INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD., BHARUCH, GUJARAT. S - 1

1 INTRODUCTION M/s. Krifor Industries Private Limited has proposed Captive consumption of Resin Manufacturing Unit (1500 TPM) in existing premises of particle board manufacturing unit located at Survey No.: 35/1, 35/2 & 36, Village Alva, Taluka Hansot, District Bharuch, Gujarat. The company has been incorporated as a Private Limited Company on 9th April, 2012 under The Companies Act, 1956 having its registered office at 40/5, Strand Road, 5th Floor, Room No. 29, Kolkata-700 001. Proposed project comes under Category A, 5(f), Synthetic Organic Chemicals Industry as per EIA Notification dated 14th September, 2006 & its amendment dated 1st December, 2009. The EIA Study has been carried out by M/s. En-vision Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd., Surat, Gujarat, which is based on primary and secondary data collected during the study period i.e. October to November, 2013. 2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 2.1 PROJECT DETAILS

Name of the company M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. Category of the project A S. No. In the schedule 5(f), Synthetic Organic Chemicals Location of the project Survey no. 35/1, 35/2 & 36, Village Alva, Taluka Hansot, District Bharuch,

Gujarat. General condition & Specific condition

No

Project cost for Resin Unit Rs. 130 lacs Cost for EPCM Capital Cost: Rs. 13 lacs & Recurring cost: Rs. 2.5 lacs Per Annum. Cost for CSR activity Rs. 280 lacs shall be utilized over a period of 5 years which is 5% of the

total project cost (Resin Manufacturing Unit + Particle Board Unit) after that company will do as per regulations.

2.2 PRODUCT AND CAPACITY M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. has proposed project to set up Melamine Urea Formaldehyde Resin manufacturing unit (1500 TPM) which is for the purpose of captive consumption for Particle Board unit. 2.3 PROJECT REQUIREMENT:

Land requirement

No additional land will be acquired for Resin Manufacturing Unit. 1,132.2 m2 will be utilized from the existing premises of 72,000.0 m2.

Water requirement & its source

Total water requirement will be 38.5 KLD. Only 2.5 KLD water will be required for the MUF resin unit (For Domestic and Cooling Tower) and 3.0 KLD water will be required for the particle board unit (Only for Domestic) and rest water 33.0 KLD water will be used only for greenbelt development. 8.5 KLD water will be sourced from ground water through using existing bore well for which application has been made at CGWA and 30 KLD water will be sourced from surface water for the purpose of green belt development for which permission will be obtained from irrigation department.

Electricity requirement & its source

Total power requirement for the project will be 60 KVA which will be sourced from Dakshin Gujarat Vij Company Limited (DGVCL). For the emergency purpose one D. G. Set of 200 KVA capacity will be utilize.

Manpower requirements

Manpower requirement for the proposed resin unit will be 06 personnel. For the Particle Board unit it is 206 personnel.

Fuel requirement & its source

Lignite Coal: 25 MTPD from mines located at Tadkeshwar/Kutch for Thermopack HSD: 15 LPD from nearest petrol pump for D. G. Set.

e n - V I S I n



2.4 RAW MATERIAL REQUIREMENT, ITS SOURCE AND MODE OF TRANSPORTATION Details of raw materials, its sources and mode of transportation are given in below table:

Sr. No. Name of The

Raw Material Consumption(Ton/Month) Source & Their Distance (Km) Mode of

Transportation

1. Technical Urea 242.00 Imported & transported from Bharuch (28 km) / Baroda (94 km) By Road

2. Formaldehyde Solution 1,014.00 Mumbai (270 Km) / Kandla (315 Km) By Road

3. Melamine 242.00 Baroda (94 km) / Mumbai (270 km) / Kandla (315 Km) By Road

4. Acetic Acid 0.78 Ankleshwar (23 km) / Mumbai (270 Km) / Ahmedabad (168 km) By Road

5. Caustic Flake 1.22 Jhagadia (40 km) By Road 2.5 WASTE WATER GENERATION Total waste water from Resin Unit and Particle Board Unit i.e. 3.55 KLD will be generated in the form of domestic wastewater and cooling tower blow down. Domestic waste water will be treated in proposed 5 KLD Sewage Treatment Plant and treated water will be used in greenbelt development. Cooling Tower blow down water will be collected in separate tank and will be used for the green belt development. Thus, the company will achieve “Zero Discharge Effluent” concept. Moreover, company will adopt rainwater harvesting, which will reduce the impact on ground water table. 2.6 AIR EMISSION & AIR POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES DETAILS The air emission from the proposed project would be the flue gas emission from coal based thermopack which would be controlled by adequate stack height and bag filter along with multi cyclone. Emission from D. G. set would be controlled by providing adequate stack height and acoustic enclosures. Major pollutants from proposed project will be PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx from the stacks of thermopack. 2.7 DETAILS OF SOLID/HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATION AND ITS DISPOSAL Solid/hazardous waste i.e. Spent/used oil (10 lit per annum) will be reused as lubricant in plant machineries. Discarded resin (15 MT per annum) will be sent for incineration, sewage sludge (0.5 KL per day) will be used as manure in greenbelt development and fly ash (1.38 MT per day) will be sold to brick manufacturer. 3 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT 3.1 INTRODUCTION The baseline environmental quality of Air, water, soil, noise, socioeconomic status and ecology has been assessed in the Post-monsoon season (October to November, 2013) in a study area of 10 km radial distance from the project site. 3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING OF THE AREA

Project location Village Alva, Tehsil Hansot, District Bharuch, Gujarat. Site coordinates Latitude : 21° 32’ 21.38’’ N

Longitude : 72° 49’ 11.70’’ E Nearest Village Alva at around 1.3 km in North Direction Nearest Town Hansot at around 5.0 km in North Direction Nearest City & Dist. Headquarter Bharuch at around 28.0 km in North-East Direction

Nearest National Highway NH-228 Around 10.0 meters in West Direction Nearest Railway Station Kosamba at around 16.0 km in South-East Direction Nearest Airport Surat at around 47.0 km in South-South-West Direction Nearest River Kim River at around 10.5 km in South-East National Park / Reserve Forest, Biosphere Reserve

There is no National Park / Reserve Forest, Biosphere Reserve or Protected forest within 10.0 km radial study area.

Seismicity Seismic Zone-III

e n - V I S I n



3.3 BASELINE DATA The baseline data were collected during the study period October to November, 2013 which is presented in the following sections. 3.3.1 MICRO-METEOROLOGY The minimum and maximum temperature was observed 10.2 °C and 42.1°C respectively during the month of January to April. Mean daily maximum temperature of about 37.3 °C is recorded in April. During the post-monsoon season, day temperatures remain between 12.2 to 38.8ºC. Mornings are more humid than evenings and humidity ranges from a high of 78 to 87% in monsoon mornings to a low of 32 to 55% in summer evenings. During post-monsoon season, morning humidity remains between 62-71 % and during the evening it remains between 44 to 48%. Wind generally blowing from North-East and East direction. 3.3.2 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY The ambient air samples were collected from six locations and analyzed for PM10, SO2, NOx and VOC. As per the monitoring in Post-monsoon season, the arithmetic mean values of PM10 varied between 38.4 to 52.4 μg/m3 while the 98th percentile values of PM10 concentrations ranged between 44.3 to 61.3 μg/m3. The arithmetic mean value for PM2.5 was 31.1 to 43.0 μg/m3 and the 98th percentile concentrations were 37.7 to 49.3 μg/m3. The arithmetic mean value for SO2 was 11.0 to 17.3 μg/m3 and the 98th percentile concentrations were 14.4 to 20.4 μg/m3. The arithmetic mean values of NOx varied between 15.6 to 25.3 μg/m3 while the 98th percentile concentrations of NOx also ranged from 18.9 to 29.1 μg/m3, while VOC was not detected from these locations. From the above mentioned results it is observed that PM10, PM2.5, SOx, NOx, VOC concentrations are well below the stipulated standards of CPCB/GPCB. 3.3.3 GROUND WATER QUALITY MONITORING Six nos. of ground water samples in the study area have been collected from different villages and analyzed during October to November, 2013. The pH varied in the range of 8.1 to 8.4, turbidity 1.0 to 2.1 NTU, total hardness 390 to 620 mg/l, dissolved solids 780 to 1829 mg/l, Chloride 189 to 556 mg/l, Sulphate 250 to 480 mg/l and Alkalinity 450 to 470 mg/l. 3.3.4 SURFACE WATER QUALITY MONITORING Total two nos. of surface water samples have been collected from the study area. The pH varied is from 7.1 to 7.8, the turbidity varied from 1.0 to 1.6 NTU, the dissolved solids varied from 792 to 803 mg/l, total hardness varied between 464 to 593 mg/l, chloride varied from 272 to 311 mg/l, the Sulphate varied from 178 to 192 mg/l. 3.3.5 BACKGROUND NOISE LEVEL Background noise levels were measured at six locations. The day time noise levels at all the locations ranged between 40.4-56.1 dBA. The night time noise levels at all the locations ranged between 35.9-54.3 dBA. 3.3.6 SOIL QUALITY Total of six nos. of samples have been collected from the study area and tested in the laboratory. Soil porosity is a measure of air filled pore spaces and gives information about movement of gases, inherent moisture, and development of root system and strength of soil. The porosity and water holding capacity of soils are in the range of 35.62% to 41.10% and 22.31% to 29.91%. TOC present in soil influences its physical and chemical properties. The TOC was present in range between 0.25 to 0.51%. Different parameters are analyzed to know the quality of soil in the study area. 3.3.7 LAND USE PATTERN Land use within 10 km radius of the study area has been determined with the help of satellite imagery, and broadly consists of settlements, Industrial, Tank/River/reservoir, Single crop, land with scrub, land without scrub area and predominant land use is Single crop. 3.3.8 SOCIO-ECONOMIC STUDY The study area consist total 43 villages of two talukas viz. Hansot and Ankleshwar. Total population of the study area as per 2001 census was 60,069 out of which 31,155 were male and 28,914 were female and as

e n - V I S I n



per 2011 census, total population of Bharuch district was 15,51,019 out of that 8,05,945 were male and 7,44,877 were female. As per 2001 census, there were 12,633 households in the study area, the total literates of the study area were 24,382 as the literacy rate of the study area was 40.59% and in 2011 census, literacy rate was 81.51% of the Bharuch district. All villages are having primary infrastructural facilities. 3.3.9 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT There is no National park, wild life sanctuary present within the study area of 10 km radius from the project site. 3.3.9.1 FLORAL DIVERSITY OF THE STUDY AREA The trees, herbs, shrubs, climbers and major crops, observed during the biological survey conducted. During study 37 tree species belong to 22 families, 27 shrubs belong to 17 families, 59 herbaceous species belongs to 27 families and 18 climbers or twiners belongs to 7 families are enumerated from the study area. Among the enumerated flora in the study area, no rare and endangered flora was observed. 3.3.9.2 CULTIVATED PLANTS IN THE STUDY AREA During the period of survey, few of the fields are under cultivation with Sugar cane. As per the information provided by the farmers, major crops in the study area Sugar cane and Cotton. Minor crops are Rice, Bajara and Jowar. 3.3.9.3 FAUNAL BIODIVERSITY OF THE STUDY AREA For the documentation of the faunal biodiversity of the study area with respect to birds, reptiles, amphibians, and butterfly species, a detailed survey had been conducted. Faunal species recorded in the study area includes 4 types of mammals, 48 types of birds, 7 types of Reptiles and 9 types of butterflies belonging to 3 families. None of the sighted animal species can be assigned endemic species category of the study area. 4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES 4.1 IMPACT ASSESSMENT An effort has been made to identify various environmental, social and ecological impacts due to proposed project during construction and operation phases considering present environmental scenario as baseline. The corresponding mitigation measures to take care of the adverse impacts are also discussed in following sections. 4.2 IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE & ITS MITIGATION MEASURES During Construction Phase, the fugitive dust emission due to civil work and vehicular movement is not expected to spread too far as water spraying will be carried out to suppress the dust emission at the site and as well as on road. The increase in noise levels due to the movement of vehicles will be taken care of by regulating the movement of vehicles and the impact on the human beings will be taken care of by providing the working people with ear plugs / ear muffs. During construction, drainage pattern and water supply system of overland water flow will not be changed during the site preparation activities. Suspended solids can be controlled by sprinkling water and by employing enclosures to construction area to allow the particles to settle down, prior to discharge. During construction period, the project is likely to generate substantial employment and income. 4.3 IMPACT DURING OPERATION PHASE & MITIGATION MEASURES 4.3.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT Major air emissions are anticipated by the gaseous emissions from a single stack is a local phenomenon. The ISCST3 scientific model has been used to predict the proposed air quality on the environment. The maximum 24 hourly average GLC’s for PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and NOx is observed to be 0.42 μg/m3, 0.72 μg/m3, 2.42 μg/m3 and 0.90 μg/m3 respectively at a distance of 640 m towards south-west direction. Fugitive emission will be generated from storage and processing vessels, loading and unloading section. 4.3.2 NOISE ENVIRONMENT The noise pollution management will be taken up in the following manner;

e n - V I S I n



- By providing noise barrier to the noise generating equipment, noise level will reduce below 75 dBA noise level at 1 m distance.

- Acoustic enclosures will be provided to D. G. Set to reduce the noise level. - Further, Greenbelt will help to reduce the noise level within the plant.

By these measures, it is anticipated that noise levels in the plant will be maintained below 75 dBA. 4.3.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT Water requirement of M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. will be fulfil through ground water by using bore well. So, its impact will be on ground water level but this area is not falling water scarcity area and also company will recharge rainwater harvesting in company premises as well as nearby villages as per CSR activities so there will be insignificant impact on the groundwater. Moreover, company has applied to CGWA for the permission of extraction of ground water using bore well. Company will also use surface water from canal to develop green belt for that, permission will be obtained from irrigation department so there will be no impact on the surface water. The company will follow “Zero Discharge Concept” for the proposed project as wastewater would be generated from the industrial use and domestic use that will be reused in the gardening purpose. 4.3.4 SOIL ENVIRONMENT The proposed activity will be located on flat terrain no significant topographical change is expected due to construction activities. While during operation phase, domestic waste and sewage sludge will be used as manure in gardening and industrial wastes will be sent to common solid/hazardous waste disposal facility. 4.3.5 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT Ecological impacts on surrounding eco-sensitive habitat due to emission from utility emission, major pollutants are SPM, SO2, and NOx. The nearest habitation in village is located far away from the zone of influence. Hence, no impact in the village area is anticipated during the operation phase. Moreover, the predicted pollution load after the incremental increase is within the stipulated standard limit prescribed by CPCB for the concerned parameters. About total 34% of area (24,904.96 Sq.mt.) shall be developed as green belt at plant boundary, road side, around offices & buildings. In Green belt area about 1,000 trees per acre of land (as per norms) shall be planted. 4.3.6 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASPECT Impact on Socio-Economic aspect will be mainly of Population, Migration, Culture, Economic status, Health, Education, Drinking water facility, Primary Infrastructure, etc. Due to this project population growth will be increased for direct and indirect employment related to this industry. With the increase of population, migration will also increase which impact will be directly on culture of the area. For the particle board as well as Resin manufacturing unit, direct and indirect employment will be generated which will increase the commercial and economic status of the area. As in the CSR activity of the project improvement of the health facility, education facility and primary infrastructure facility will be improved which will definitely push up the socio-economic status of the area.

5 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME 5.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING A regular monitoring of environmental parameters like air, water, noise and soil as well as performance of pollution control facilities and safety measures in the plant are important for proper environmental management of any project. The following routine monitoring programme as detailed in as under will be implemented at site.

- Hourly monitoring of meteorological parameters like Temperature, Relative Humidity, Wind Speed, Wind Direction, Rainfall on hourly basis

- Stack monitoring for the parameters like SPM, SO2, and NOx, once in a month - Ambient air quality monitoring for the parameters like PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, and VOC once in a

six month. - Work zone environment monitoring for the parameters like HC and VOC once in a year. - Liquid effluent monitoring once in a month.

e n - V I S I n



- Ground water and soil quality monitoring once in a year. - Noise monitoring once in a month.

6 ADDITIONAL STUDIES 6.1 PUBLIC HEARING Public hearing was conducted on 04th June, 2014 at11:00 hrs. at Factory Site, Village Alva, Taluka Hansot, District Bharuch, Gujarat. Major issues were raised during public hearing are employment, pollution and CSR activities. 6.2 RISK ASSESSMENT The management is very much aware of their obligation to protect all persons at work and others in the neighbourhood who may be affected by an unfortunate and unforeseen incidence occurring at the works. Any hazard either to employees or others arising from activities at the plant site shall, as far as possible, be handled by the personnel of the company and prevented from spreading any further. However in the case of eventuality the Disaster Management plan adopted by the proponents is sufficient and may be able to control the situation.

7 PROJECT BENEFITS 7.1 PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE As a project M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. will adopt CSR activities which will surely develop the existing scenario of the area. As in the existing scenario, condition of the physical infrastructure is not so good. 7.2 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL For the particle board unit 204 personnel are required and for Resin manufacturing unit 06 personnel will be employed. This is for the direct employment and indirect employment will also increase that will improve the socio-economical status of area. 7.3 CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (CSR) Funds to the extent of Rs. 280 lacs i.e. 5% of the total project cost (Particle board as well as Resin manufacturing unit) will be utilize for the CSR activities for the five years after that the company will utilize the fund as per regulations for CSR activities. Company will carry out the CSR activities like Safe drinking water facility, Health care, Education, Agriculture, Awareness programme on environment, Rain water harvesting plan, Plantation, Sports, etc.

8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 8.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS) The environmental management plan with respect to all environmental components have already been covered in section 2 (project description), only EMP on administrative point of view is presented in this section. Environmental monitoring of different parameters will be done regularly and the activity will be coordinated by the Environmental Management Cell (EMC). Mitigation of environmental impact has to be implemented according to the suggestions and will be monitored regularly to prevent any lapse. The EMC will be under the overall supervision of the Manager (Environment). The cell will report on a regular basis to the Unit Head. The EMC will prepare a formal report on environmental management and mitigation at six month intervals. The company will undertake various training programme for improving the performance of the working personnel. Special training will be arranged in regular intervals to combat emergency scenarios that may occur during the plant operation.

9 CONCLUSION Company has committed to implement all the pollution control measures to protect the surrounding environment. The project can definitely improve the regional, state and national economy. Industrial growth is an indication of socio economic development. The implementation of this project will definitely improve the physical and social infrastructure of the surrounding area.

e n - V I S I n

M/S. KRIFOR INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD., BHARUCH, GUJARAT. I - 1

INDEX SR. NO. TITLE PAGE NO. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY OF EIA REPORT CHAPTER-1 : INTRODUCTION

1.1 PURPOSE OF EIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.2 PROMOTERS AND THEIR BACKGROUND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.2.1 DETAILS ABOUT MANAGEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.2.2 DIRECTORS OF THE COMPANY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.4 STRUCTURE OF THE EIA REPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1.5 REGULATORY FRAME WORK (COMPLIANCE TO TOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 CHAPTER-2 : PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.2 JUSTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.2.1 PROJECT NEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.2.2 DEMAND SUPPLY GAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.2.3 SELECTION OF PROJECT SITE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.3 PROJECT COST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.4 PROJECT SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2.4.1 LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2.4.2 KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES AND SETTLEMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2.4.2.1 METHOD OF DATA PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2.4.2.2 DISTANCE OF NEAREST KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES FROM PROJECT SITE . 2-6 2.4.2.3 MAP OF KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES AND SETTLEMENTS. . . . . . . . . 2-6 2.5 MAIN PHASES OF PROJECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 2.5.1 PRE CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 2.5.2 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVIETIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 2.5.3 PRODUCTION ACTIVITIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 2.5.3.1 RAW MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 2.5.3.2 RAW MATERIAL STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 2.5.3.3 MANUFACTURING PROCESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 2.5.3.4 SOLVENT RECOVERY SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2.6 INFRASTRUCTURE FACILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2.6.1 LAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2.6.2 TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2.6.3 WATER SOURCE AND UTILIZATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2.6.4 POWER REQUIRMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 2.6.5 FUEL REQUIREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 2.6.6 MANPOWER REQUIREMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 2.7 SOURCE OF POLLUTION AND CONTROL MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

e n - V I S I n


SR. NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

2.7.1 AIR POLLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 2.7.1.1 SOURCE OF SECONDARY EMISSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 2.7.2 WATER POLLUTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 2.7.3 NOISE POLLUTION AND CONTROL SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 2.7.4 LAND/SOIL POLLUTION AND CONTROL MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 2.8 PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 CHAPTER-3 : BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

3.1 ESTABLISHMENT OF IMPACT ZONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.2 CLIMATE OF THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3.2.1 METEOROLOGY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3.2.1.1 TEMPERATURE DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3.2.1.2 RELATIVE HUMIDITY (RH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3.2.1.3 RAINFALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3.2.1.4 PREDOMINANT WIND DIRECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 3.2.1.5 CLOUD COVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 3.3 SITE SPECIFIC MICRO-METEOROLOGY DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 3.4 WIND DIRECTION AND WIND SPEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 3.5 AIR ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 3.5.1 DESIGN OF NETWORK FOR AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS. . . 3-6 3.5.2 RECONNAISSANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 3.5.3 METHODOLOGY FOR AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 3.5.4 RESULT & DISCUSSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 3.6 WATER ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 3.6.1 SOURCE OF WATER OF THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 3.6.2 METHODOLOGY FOR WATER QUALITY MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 3.6.3 PHYSICO-CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF WATER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 3.6.3.1 GROUND WATER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 3.6.3.2 SURFACE WATER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 3.7 GEO HYDROLOGY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 3.7.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 3.7.2 WATER LEVEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 3.7.3 GROUND WATER QUALITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 3.7.4 GROUND WATER DEVELOPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 3.7.5 AQUIFER PERFORMANCE TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 3.7.6 TRANSMISSIVITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 3.7.7 FIELD PERMEABILITY/HYDRAULIC CONDUCTIVITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 3.7.8 SPECIFIC CAPACITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 3.8 NOISE ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 3.8.1 RECONNAISSANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 3.8.2 EQUIVALENT SOUND LEVELS/EQUIVALENT CONTINUOUS EQUAL ENERGY LEVEL

(LEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 3.8.3 METHODOLOGY FOR NOISE MONITORING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

e n - V I S I n



3.8.4 BASELINE NOISE LEVELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 3.8.5 NOISE LEVELS DUE TO TRANSPORTATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 3.8.6 COMMUNITY NOISE LEVELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 3.9 LAND ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 3.9.1 METHODOLOGY FOR SOIL MONITORING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 3.9.2 PHYSICO-CHEMICALS CHARACTERISTICS OF SOIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 3.9.3 GEOLOGICAL FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 3.10 SOCIO - ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 3.10.1 BACKGROUND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 3.10.2 OBJECTIVE OF SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 3.10.3 APPROACH METHODOLOGY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 3.10.4 TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 3.10.5 STACKHOLDERS’ IDENDIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 3.10.6 PROJECT LOCATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 3.10.7 THE PROJECT INFLUENCE AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 3.10.8 SOCIO-ECONOMIC STATUS IN PROJECT INFLUENCE AREAS. . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 3.10.8.1 BASIC INFRASTRUCTURES/FACILITIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 3.10.8.2 ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 3.10.8.3 OTHER ISSUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 3.10.9 PEOPLES’ PERCEPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 3.10.10 CONCLUSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 3.11 PRESENT LAND USE PATTERN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 3.11.1 INTROUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 3.11.2 OBJECTIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 3.11.3 SCOPE OF THE WORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 3.11.4 METHODOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 3.11.5 AREA UNDER DIFFERENT LANDUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 3.12 DESCRIPTION OF THE BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 3.12.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 3.12.2 BIODIVERSITY OF TERRESTRIAL ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 3.12.3 BIOLOGICAL DIVERSITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 3.12.4 ECOLOGICAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 3.12.5 PERIOD OF THE STUDY AND STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 3.12.6 METHODOLOGY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 3.12.7 BIODIVERSITY OF TERRESTRIAL ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 3.12.7.1 HABITATS DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT SITE AND ITS IMMEDIATE

SURROUNDINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

3.12.7.2 HABITATS DESCRIPTION OF THE AREA (10 KM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 3.12.7.3 FLORAL DIVERSITY OF THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 3.12.7.4 FAUNAL BIODIVERSITY IN THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 3.12.8 RARE AND ENDANGERED FAUNA OF THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 3.12.8.1 AS PER IUCN RED (2010) LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 3.12.8.2 AS PER INDIAN WILD LIFE (PROTECTION) ACT, 1972. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

e n - V I S I n



CHAPTER-4 : ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.2 PREDICTION AND EVALUATION OF IMPACTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 4.3 AIR ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 4.3.1 ISC SHORT TERM MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 4.3.2 METHODOLOGY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 4.3.3 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES. . . . . . . . . 4-7 4.3.4 OPERATION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 4.3.4.1 MIXING HEIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 4.3.4.2 MODEL INPUT EMISSION DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 4.3.4.3 MODEL OPTIONS USED FOR COMPUTATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 4.3.4.4 MODEL OUTPUT AND MAXIMUM GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATION. . . . . . 4-8 4.4 FUGITIVE EMISSION AND CONTROL MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 4.5 WATER ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 4.5.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES. . . . . . . . . 4-14 4.5.2 OPERATION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 4.5.3 GROUND WATER ABSTRACTION AND ITS IMPACT ON WATER SOURCE. . . . . 4-14 4.6 SOIL ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 4.6.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES. . . . . . . . . 4-14 4.6.2 OPERATION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 4.7 NOISE ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 4.7.1 NOISE IMPECT ASSESSMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 4.7.2 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES. . . . . . . . . 4-15 4.7.3 OPERATION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 4.8 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES FOR

LAND USE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-16 4.8.1 IMPECT ASSESSMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 4.8.2 IMPECT OF LAND USE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4.8.3 MITIGATION MEASURES OF LAND USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4.9 ECOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4.9.1 NATURAL VEGETATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 4.9.2 CROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 4.9.3 FOREST, NATIONAL PARKS / SANCTUARIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 4.10 IMPACT ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASPECTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 4.10.1 PLACES OF ARCHAEOLOGICAL/HISTORICAL/RELIGIOUS/TOURIST INTEREST. . . 4-21 4.11 ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 4.12 MATRIX REPRESENTATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 4.12.1 CUMULATIVE IMPACT CHART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 CHAPTER-5 : ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

5.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.2 MONITORING SCHEDULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

e n - V I S I n



CHAPTER-6 : ADITIONAL STUDY

6.1 PUBLIC HEARING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.2 RISK ASSESSMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.2.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.2.2 DETAILS OF MANUFACTURING PROCESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6.2.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6.2.3.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR THE STORAGE OF MATERIALS. . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6.2.4 HAZARD AND ITS CONTROL MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6.2.5 RISK IDENTIFICATION AND ANALYSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 6.2.5.1 MAXIMUM CREDIBLE LOSS ACCIDENT SCENARIOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 6.2.5.2 DAMAGE CRITERIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 6.2.5.2.1 SOFTWARE USED FOR CALCULATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 6.2.5.3 VULNERABILITY ANALYSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 6.2.5.4 MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 6.2.6 RISK PREVENTION AND RISK MITIGATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 6.2.6.1 PREVENTIVE MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 6.2.6.2 MITIGATION MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 6.2.6.3 DO’S AND DON’TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 6.2.7 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PALN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 6.2.7.1 OBJECTIVE OF EMERGENCY PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 6.2.7.2 BASIS OF PLAN AND HANDLING OF EMERGENCY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 6.2.7.3 INFORMATION ABOUT EMERGENCY AND SUBSEQUENT ACTIONS. . . . . . . . 6-23 6.2.7.4 INSTRUCTIONS TO EMPLOYEES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 6.2.7.5 INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 6.2.7.6 MITIGATION OF CONSEQUENCES DURING MAJOR ACCIDENT. . . . . . . . . . 6-24 6.2.7.7 EMERGENCY CONTROL CENTRE WITH LIST OF EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES. . 6-25 6.2.7.8 INFORMATION REGARDING KEY PERSONS AND THEIR RESPONSIBILITIES DURING

EMERGENCY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-25 6.2.7.9 EMERGENCY ORGANIZATION FOR IDLE HOURS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 6.2.7.10 LIST OF IMPORTANT AUTHORITIES WITH THEIR ROLE IN EMERGENCY AND

TELEPHONE NUMBERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-29 6.2.7.11 INFORMATION ABOUT EXTERNAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . 6-29 6.2.7.12 ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 6.2.7.13 OUT SIDE IMPORTANT ADDRESSES AND PHONE NUMBERS. . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 6.2.7.14 REHERSAL AND UPDATION OF PLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

6.2.7.15 INFORMATION OF ASSEMBLY POINTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 6.2.8 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PROGRAM FOR THE PROJECT. . . . . . 6-30 6.2.8.1 PHYSICAL CONTAMINANT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 6.2.8.1.1 NOISE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 6.2.8.1.2 ERGONOMICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 6.2.8.1.3 HEAT STRESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 6.2.8.2 MEDICAL AID SCHEME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

e n - V I S I n



CHAPTER-7 : PROJECT BENEFITS

7.1 PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.2 EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.3 BENEFITS OF INDUSTRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.4 DIRECT REVENUE EARNING BENEFITS TO THE NATIONAL AND STATE

EXCHEQUER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.5 SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 CHAPTER-8 : ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

8.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.2 PURPOSE OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.3 DETAILS OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.3.1 DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.3.1.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.3.1.2 WATER ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.3.1.3 NOISE ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.3.1.4 LAND ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.3.1.5 SOLID WASTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.3.1.6 ECOLOGY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.3.1.7 SOCIO-ECONOMIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.3.2 DURING OPERATION PHASE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.3.2.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8.3.2.2 CONTROL OF SECONDARY FUGITIVE EMISSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8.3.2.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 8.3.2.3.1 RAIN WATER HARVESTING SCHEME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 8.3.2.4 NOISE ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 8.3.2.5 LAND ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 8.3.2.6 SOLID WASTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 8.3.2.7 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 8.3.2.7.1 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 8.3.2.7.2 RECOMMENDED PLANTS FOR GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 8.3.2.7.3 SELECTION OF PLANTS FOR GREEN BELTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 8.3.2.7.4 PLANTATION ALONG ROAD SIDES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 8.3.2.8 SOCIO - ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 8.3.2.9 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 8.3.2.10 GENERAL CONSIDERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 8.3.2.11 CONCEPT OF WASTE-MINIMISATION, RECYCLE/REUSE/RECOVER TECHNIQUES,

ENERGY CONSERVATION, AND NATURAL RESOURCE CONSERVATION. . . . . .

8-9 8.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 8.5 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 8.6 REPORTING SYSTEM TO THE DIRECTORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 8.7 BUDGETORY PROVISIONS FOR EMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

e n - V I S I n



CHAPTER-9 : SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION

9.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 9.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 9.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 9.4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES. . . . . . 9-3 9.5 ADDITIONAL STUDIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 9.6 PROJECT BENEFITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 9.7 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 9.8 CONCLUSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 CHAPTER-10 : CONSULTANT ENGAGED

e n - V I S I n


LIST OF TABLES

TABLE NO. TITLE PAGE

NO.

1.1 SHAREHOLDING PATTERN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 COMPLIANCE OF TERMS OF REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

2.1 BREAK UP FOR THE PROPOSED INVESTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2 BREAK UP FOR THE PROPOSED INVESTMENT FOR EPCM. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.3 DISTANCE OF NEAREST KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES FROM SITE. . . . . 2-6

2.4 RAW MATERIAL REQUIREMENT AND SOURCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF RAW MATERIALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2.6 WATER CONSUMPTION AND WASTE WATER GENERATION. . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2.7 FUEL REQUIREMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2.8 DETAILS OF STACKS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2.9 THERMOPACK DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2.10 BAG FILTER DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

2.11 DETAILS SOLID WASTE GENERATION AND DISPOSAL METHOD. . . . . . . . 2-14

2.12 PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

3.1 PREDOMINANT WIND DIRECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.2 SITE SPECIFIC METEOROLOGICAL DATA (1st OCT to 30th NOV-2013). . . . . . . 3-5

3.3 DETAILS OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS. . . . . . . . . 3-6

3.4 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

3.5 DETAILS OF GROUND AND SURFACE WATER MONITORING LOCATIONS. . . . . 3-10

3.6 BASELINES GROUND AND SURFACE WATER QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

3.7 THE LOCATIONS OF WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

3.8 GROUNDWATER DEVELOPMENT OF HANSOT TALUKA. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

3.9 RECOVERY PHASE AND PUMPING PHASE DATA OF THE TEST WELL. . . . . . 3-21

3.10 SUMMARY OF AQUIFER PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

3.11 DETAILS OF LOCATION OF BACKGROUND NOISE MONITORING STATIONS. . . . 3-25

3.12 BACKGROUND NOISE LEVELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

3.13 NOISE LEVELS DUE TO TRANSPORTATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

3.14 SAMPLING LOCATIONS OF SOIL MONITORING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

3.15 PHYSICO-CHEMICALS CHARACTERISTICS OF SOIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

3.16 REGIONAL GEOLOGY OF THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

3.17 LIST OF VILLAGES IN PIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

3.18 AREA STATISTICS OF LANDUSE/LAND COVER MAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

3.19 TREES IN THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

3.20 LIST OF THE SHRUBS IN THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

3.21 LIST OF HERBACEOUS SPECIES OBSERVED IN THE AREA. . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

3.22 LIST OF CLIMBERS OBSERVED IN THE AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

e n - V I S I n



NO.

3.23 SYSTEMATIC LIST OF BIRDS IN THE STUDY AREA WITH ITS RESIDENTIAL STATUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

3.24 BUTTERFLIES IN THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

3.25 REPTILES IN THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

3.26 MAMMALS IN THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

3.27 NEAR THREATENED AND BIRD OF THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

3.28 SPECIES PROVIDED PROTECTION AS PER WILD LIFE PROTECTION ACT 1972. . . 3-60

4.1 DETAILS OF EMISSION FROM EXISTING & PROPOSED STACKS. . . . . . . . . 4-8

4.2 SUMMARY OF ISCST3 MODEL OUTPUT FOR PM10, PM2.5, SO2 AND NOX. . . . . . 4-13

4.3 MAXIMUM GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATIONOF PM10, PM2.5, SO2 AND NOX. . . 4-13

4.4 NOISE LEVELS GENERATED FROM CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . 4.15

4.5 DETAILS OF ECOLOGICAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

4.6 POTENTIAL IMPACTS & MITIGATIVE MEASURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

4.7 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION MATRIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

4.8 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT MATRIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

4.9 CUMULATIVE IMPACT CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

5.1 PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING. . . . . . . . . . 5-1

6.1 HAZARDOUS CHARACTERISTICS & STORAGE OF RAW MATERIALS. . . . . . . 6-2

6.2 RISK ANALYSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6.3 HAZARDS AND ITS CONTROL MEASURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

5.4 FLOOD CONTROL MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6.5 EARTHQUAKE CONTROL MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6.6 DAMAGES TO HUMAN LIFE DUE TO HEAT RADIATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6.7 EFFECTS DUE TO INCIDENT RADIATION INTENSITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6.8 DAMAGE DUE TO OVERPRESSURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

6.9 WEATHER CONDITIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

6.10 VULNARABLE ZONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

6.11 LIST OF PROPOSED FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

6.12 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH MONITORING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

6.13 DIFFERENT KINDS OF HEAT DISORDERS & HEALTH EFFECTS & CURE. . . . . . 6-34

6.14 ILLUMINATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

7.1 PROPOSED CSR ACTIVITIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

8.1 DETAILS OF WATER REQUIREMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

8.2 AVERAGE ANNUAL RAINFALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

8.3 DETAILS OF WATER REQUIREMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

e n - V I S I n



NO.

8.4. CALCULATION OF RAINWATER AVAILABLE FOR HARVESTING. . . . . . . . 8-5

8.5 WATER BALANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

8.6 WATER TANK DIMENSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

8.7 RECOMMENDED PLANT SPECIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

8.8 BUDGETARY OUTLETS OF GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT FOR FIVE YEARS. . . . 8-9

8.9 COST OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

e n - V I S I n


LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE

NO.

2.1 DETAILED MAP OF BHARUCH DISTRICT SHOWING PROJECT LOCATION. . . . 2-2

2.2 GOOGLE IMAGE OF THE PROJECT SITE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.3 PHOTOGRAPS OF THE PROJECT SITE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.4 LAYOUT OF THE PLANT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.5 KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES AND SETTLEMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.6 WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

3.1 LOCATION MAP OF THE PROJECT SITE WITH STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.2 WIND ROSE DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.3 LOCATION OF AMBIENT AIR AND NOISE LEVEL MONITORING STATIONS. . . . 3-8

3.4 LOCATIONS OF GROUND AND SURFACE WATER SAMPLING STATIONS. . . . . 3-11

3.5 LOCATION OF WELLS INVENTORIED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

3.6 REDUCED WATER LEVEL CONTOUR MAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

3.7 CONTOUR MAP OF pH VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES. . . . . . . . . 3-15

3.8 CONTOUR MAP OF TDS VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES. . . . . . . . . 3-15

3.9 CONTOUR MAP OF TOTAL HARDNESS VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES. . 3-16

3.10 CONTOUR MAP OF CHLORIDE VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES. . . . . . 3-17

3.11 CONTOUR MAP OF SULPHATE VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES. . . . . . 3-17

3.12 CONTOUR MAP OF NITRATE VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES. . . . . . 3-18

3.13 CONTOUR MAP OF CALCIUM VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES. . . . . . 3-19

3.14 CONTOUR MAP OF TOTAL ALKALINITY VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES. . 3-19

3.15 GROUNDWATER DEVELOPMENT OF BHARUCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

3.16 GROUNDWATER CATEGORY MAP GUJARAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

3.17 TIME VS DRAWDOWN CURVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.18 RATIO VS RESIDUAL DRAWDOWN CURVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

3.19 LOCATIONS OF SOIL SAMPLING STATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

3.20 GEOLOGICAL MAP OF STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

3.21 ANNUAL PLAN SIZE OF 2013-2014. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

3.22 VILLAGE MAP OF THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

3.23 10 KM RADIAL MAP OF GOOGLE EARTH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

3.24 05 KM RADIAL MAP OF GOOGLE EARTH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

3.25 STATUS OF THE PROJECT SITE ON SITE LAYOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

3.26 PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE STUDY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

3.27 LAND USE / LAND COVER MAP OF 10 KM RADIUS FROM STUDY AREA. . . . . 3-44

3.28 LAYOUT OF RAW SATELLITE IMAGERY (10 KM RADIUS) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

3.29 GOOGLE IMAGINARY SNAP SHOT SHOWING 1KM RADIUS OF THE PROJECT SITE. 3-48

3.30 GOOGLE IMAGINARY SNAP SHOT SHOWING THE IMMEDIATE SURROUNDINGS OF THE PROJECT SITE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-49

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE

NO.

4.1 IMPACT NETWORK ON AIR ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2 IMPACTS ON SURFACE WATER ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.3 IMPACTS ON GROUND WATER ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.4 IMPACT ON NOISE ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.5 IMPACTS ON LAND ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.6 IMPACT NETWORK ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC AND CULTURAL ENVIRONMENT . . . 4-4

4.7 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE PM2.5 CONC. . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

4.8 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE PM10 CONC. . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

4.9 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE SO2 CONC. . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

4.10 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE NOX CONC. . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

4.11 SPATIAL VARIATION OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT NOISE LEVELS DB (A): CONSTRUCTION PHASE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-16

7.1 EFFECT OF CSR ACTIVITIES ON VARIOUS AREAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

8.1 AVERAGE ANNUAL RAINFALL GRAPH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

8.2 AN ORGANOGRAM OF ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL. . . . . . . . . . 8-10

e n - V I S I n


LIST OF ANNEXURE

ANNEXURE NO. TITLE PAGE

NO.

I TERMS OF REFERENCE LETTER AWARDED BY EAC (INDUSTRY-I) . . . . . . A-1

II PERMISSION FOR ABSTRACTION OF GROUND WATER FROM CGWA. . . . . . A-5

III CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

IV NATIONAL AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS (2009). . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

V INDIAN STANDARDS SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRINKING WATER. . . . . . . . A-10

VI CLASSIFICATION OF INLAND SURFACE WATER (CPCB STANDARDS) . . . . . A-13

VII CPCB RECOMMENDATIONS FOR COMMUNITY NOISE EXPOSURE. . . . . . . A-14

VIII DAMAGE RISK CRITERIA FOR HEARING LOSS OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15

IX CHECK LIST FOR SOCIOECONOMIC STUDY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16

X ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21

XI NOC OF EXISTING PARTICLE BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22

XII PUBLIC HEARING PROCEEDINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25

e n - V I S I n

M/S. KRIFOR INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD., BHARUCH, GUJARAT 1-1

CHAPTER – 1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 PURPOSE OF EIA The Environmental Impact Assessment study is carried out as a part of the process to obtain Environmental Clearance for the proposed Resin Manufacturing Unit of M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. in existing premises. Proposed project falls under Category A, 5(f), Synthetic Organic Chemicals Industry as per EIA Notification dated 14th September, 2006 & its amendment dated 1st December, 2009. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study was carried out during post monsoon season and accordingly EIA report has been prepared. The purpose of the EIA study is identifying existing environmental condition, predicting environmental impacts associated with the proposed project and suggesting measures to mitigate the adverse impacts and to delineate a comprehensive environment management plan along with recommendations and suggestions. The different activities that are likely to take place have been identified and mitigation measure has been proposed. The overall objective of any EIA study is to identify and assess the adverse impacts of a project in the planning stage itself, so that necessary mitigation measures to prevent or minimize these adverse impacts can be planned early and cost-effectively. In view of this, the specific objectives of this EIA are, • To have an in-depth know-how of the project and to identify the probable sources of pollution that may

arises from each stage of the process.

• To review the current environmental status of the study area within 10 km radius of the project site by collecting the baseline data on the environmental attributes including air, noise, water, land, ecological, hydro-geological climate and socio-economic environments.

• To estimate the impacts of the project on the surrounding environment.

• To prepare a comprehensive Environmental Management Plan to ensure that the environmental quality of the area would be preserved.

• To formulate a strategy for effective monitoring and identify any deviations in the environmental quality after the project is operational, which would help in evolving measures to counter these.

1.2 PROMOTERS AND THEIR BACKGROUND 1.2.1 DETAILS ABOUT MANAGEMENT Shareholding pattern of M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. is given in following table-1.1. TABLE-1.1 SHAREHOLDING PATTERN

SR. NO. GROUPS WITH NAMES SHARE

HOLDING GROUP SHARE

HOLDING 1. Chetan Das Khatri (Group)

10 % a Chetandas G. Khatri 8 % b Madhu Chetandas Khatri 2 %

2. Jugal Kishor R. Bhutra (Group)

10 % a Jugal Kishor R. Bhutra 4 % b Kamal R. Bhutra 3 % c Ram Ratan Bhutra 3 %

3. Mandeep K. Bajaj (Group) 10 % a Mandeep K. Bajaj 8 %

b Krishanlal Bajaj 2 %

e n - V I S I n


SR. NO. GROUPS WITH NAMES SHARE

HOLDING GROUP SHARE

HOLDING 4. Sanjiv S. Dalmia (Group)

10 % a Surendrakumar V. Dalmia 4 % b Sanjiv S. Dalmia 4 % c Manish S. Dalmia 2 %

5. Gannayak Agency P. Ltd.

35 %

a Inspirational Marketing Private Ltd. 49.95 % b Keshav Barter Private Limited 49.95 % c Sanjiv S. Dalmia 0.023 % d Chetandas G. Khatri 0.023 % e Jugal Kishor R. Bhutra 0.023 % f Mandeep K. Bajaj 0.023 %

6. Quest Vintrade P. Ltd.

25 %

a Sparsh Vanijya Pvt. Ltd. 49.95 % b Gayatri Dealers Pvt. Ltd. 49.95 % c Krishanlal Bajaj 0.05 %

d Sanjiv S. Dalmia 0.05 %

TOTAL 100 % Note: Based on data provided by project proponent11 1.2.2 DIRECTORS OF THE COMPANY The Directors of the company are Chetandas Khatri, Mandeep Bajaj, Sanjeev Dalmia and Jugal Kishore Bhutra. All the directors enjoy good market reputation and are associated with textile industry since more than a decade. They are considered to be among the renowned entrepreneurs in Surat. Chetandas Khatri: Mr. Chetandas Khatri is aged about 37 years & has gained very good knowledge and experience in the field of textile industry. He is a Commerce graduate with dynamic personality. He has an experience of over 15 years in textile line. He is running three dyeing units and is the director of well known group “Jai Mata Di”. He shall look after the production of the plant. Mandeep Bajaj: He is aged about 34 years and is looking after the overall activities of the company and mainly concentrating on marketing and sales aspect. He has more than 12 years experience in the textile sector. Sanjeev Dalmia: He is aged about 39 years and is a renowned businessmen engaged in Textile related industry. He is associated with “Dalmia Group” and will be looking after the financial and policy decisions of the project. Jugal Kishore Bhutra: He has an experience of more than 10 years in the textile business and looks after the administrative and marketing operations of the concern. He possesses strong interpersonal communication skills and shall look after purchase related aspects of the proposed plant. 1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. proposed project to set up resin manufacturing unit (1500 TPM) at Survey No. 35/1, 35/2 & 36, Village Alva, Tehsil Hansot, District Bharuch, Gujarat - 393030

1 Incorporated in accordance with public hearing

e n - V I S I n


1.4 STRUCTURE OF THE EIA REPORT The objective of the EIA study is a preparation of Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environmental Management Plan (EMP) report based on the guidelines of the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF) and Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB). It incorporates the followings.

• Chapter 1 is an Introduction to the Industry, purpose of the report, information of project proponent and regulatory frame work.

• Chapter 2 presents a Description of Project and Infrastructure facilities including industrial and environmental aspects of M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. during operation phase activities as well as manufacturing process details of proposed product. This chapter also gives information about project location, raw material storage and handling, water and wastewater quantitative and qualitative details, treatment of industrial and domestic effluent, details of air pollution and its control system, type and quantity of hazardous waste generation and its management, details of utilities etc.

• Chapter 3 covers Baseline Environmental Status including meteorological details, Identification of baseline status of Environmental components of the surrounding area covering air, water, noise and land environment, study of land use pattern, ecological and socio-economic environment giving details about the study area.

• Chapter 4 deals with Identification and Prediction of Impact, which provides quantification of significant impacts of the proposed project activities on various environmental components. Evaluation of the proposed pollution control facilities has been presented.

• Chapter 5 describes Environment Monitoring Plan to be adopted.

• Chapter 6 gives the information of Public Hearing and additional studies like Risk Analysis and Disaster Management Plan that is adopted by the company.

• Chapter 7 gives the benefits of the projects.

• Chapter 8 describes Environment Management Plan (EMP) to be adopted for mitigation of anticipated adverse impacts if any and to ensure acceptable impacts.

• Chapter 9 gives the summary and conclusion of the project.

• Chapter 10 gives the information of the consultant. 1.5 REGULATORY FRAME WORK (TOR COMPLIANCE) Environment clearance application along with Form-I to MoEF (Ministry of Environment and Forest) was submitted on dated 17th April, 2013 and subsequently TOR meeting was held on the date 29th July, 2013 and Terms of Reference for the EIA study was issued by MoEF on dated 26th September, 2013. EIA and EMP Report has been prepared in line with Terms of Reference (TOR) suggested by Environmental Appraisal Committee (Industry) vide MoEF letter No. F. No. J-11011/151/2013-IA II (I) dated, 26th September, 2013 attached as Annexure-I. The compliance of Terms of Reference (regulatory scoping carried out as per TOR) is given in following table-1.2. TABLE-1.2 COMPLIANCE OF TERMS OF REFERENCE

NO. TERMS OF REFERENCE COMPLIANCE

1. Executive summary of the project. Refer page no. S-1 to S-6 of EIA/EMP report

2. Justification of the project. Refer section 2.2 on page no. 2-1 of chapter-2.

3. Photographs of the proposed plant site.

Refer page no.2-4 of chapter-2.

4. Promoters and their back ground. Refer section 1.2 on page no. 1-1 of chapter-1.

e n - V I S I n



5. Regulatory framework. Refer section 1.5 on page no. 1-3 of chapter-1.

6. A map indicating location of the project and distance from severely polluted area.

There is no polluted area present within 10 km radius of the project site.

7. Project location and plant layout. Refer section 2.4 on page no. 2-2 for project location and figure-2.4 on page no.2-5 for plant layout of chapter-2.

8. Infrastructure facilities including power sources. Refer section 2.6 on page no. 2-10 of chapter-2.

9. Total cost of the project along with total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for environmental pollution control measures.

Refer section 2.3 on page no. 2-1 of chapter-2.

10. Project site location along with site map of 10 km area and site details providing various industries, surface water bodies, forests etc.

Refer section 2.4 on page no.2-2 of chapter-2.

11. Present land use based on satellite imagery for the study area of 10 km radius. Details of land availability for the project along with supporting document.

Refer section no. 3.11 on page no. 3-41 of chapter 3.

12. Location of National Park/Wild life sanctuary/Reserve Forest within 10 km radius of the project.

There is no National Park/Wild life sanctuary/Reserve Forest present within 10 km radius of the project site.

13. Details of the total land and break-up of the land use for green belt and other uses.

Refer figure-2.4 on page no. 2-5 and section 2.6.1 on page no. 2-10 of chapter-2.

14. List of products along with the production capacities. Only one product i.e. Melamine formaldehyde resin (MUF) 1,500 ton per month will be manufactured. Refer section 2.1 on page no. 2-1 of chapter-2.

15. Detailed list of raw materials required and source, mode of storage and transportation.

Refer section 2.5.3.1 and 2.5.3.2 on page no. 2-8 of chapter-2.

16. Manufacturing process details along with the chemical reactions and process flow chart.

Refer section 2.5.3.3 on page no. 2-9 of chapter-2.

17. Site-specific micro-meteorological data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed and direction and rainfall is necessary.


18. Ambient air quality monitoring at 6 locations within the study area of 5 km. aerial coverage from project site as per NAAQES notified on 16th September, 2009. Location of one AAQMS in downwind direction.


19. One season site-specific micro-meteorological data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed and direction and rainfall and AAQ data (except monsoon) for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx including VOCs shall be collected. The monitoring stations shall take

Refer section 3.3 on page no. 3-4 for site specific meteorological data, section 3.5 on page no. 3-6 for AAQM data, section 3.6 on page no. 3-9 for water monitoring and section 3.8 on

e n - V I S I n



into account the pre-dominant wind direction, population zone and sensitive receptors including reserved forests. Data for water and noise monitoring shall also be included.

page no. 3-24 for noise monitoring data of chapter-3.

20. Air pollution control measures viz. Multi-cyclone and bag filter etc. shall be proposed for the effective control of gaseous emissions within permissible limits.

Refer section 2.7.1 on page no. 2-12 of chapter-2 and Section 4.3.4 on page no. 4-7 of chapter-4.

21. Control methanol emission from drying section. There is no use of methanol for the manufacturing of MUF resin.

22. Details of VOC monitoring system in the working zone environment, if any.


23. Name of all the solvents to be used in the process and details of solvent recovery system.

No solvents will be used in the production of Resin.

24. Design details of ETP, incinerator, boiler, scrubber/bag filters etc.


25. Details of water and air pollution and its mitigation plan.

For details of water pollution refer section 2.7.2 on page no. 2-13, for air pollution refer section 2.7.1 on page no. 2-12 of chapter-2 and for mitigation measures of water pollution refer section 4.5 on page no. 4-13 and for air pollution refer section 4.3 on page no. 4-6 of chapter-4.

26. An action plan to control and monitor secondary fugitive emissions from all the sources.


27. Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project site and assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from the stack emission based on site-specific meteorological features. Air quality modeling for proposed plant.

Refer section 4.3.4 of page no. 4-7 of chapter-4.

28. Permission for the drawl of 5.5 m3/day ground water from CGWA. Water balance chart including quality of effluent generated recycled and discharged.

Refer section 2.6.3 on page no. 2-10 and section 2.7.2 on page no. 2-13 of chapter-2.

29. Action plan for ‘zero’ discharge of effluent shall be included.

Refer section 2.7.2 on page no. 2-13 of chapter-2.

30. Treatment of Phenol in the effluent, if any. Phenol is not required for the manufacturing of MUF resin and further no process effluent will be generated from manufacturing process.

31. Ground water quality monitoring minimum at 6 locations shall be carried out. Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the study area and ecological status (Terrestrial and Aquatic).

Refer section 3.6 on page no. 3-9 for ground water quality monitoring, refer section 3.9.3 on page 3-28 for Geological and Geo-hydrological status and refer section 3.12 on page no 3-46 for ecological status of chapter-3.

e n - V I S I n



32. The details of solid and hazardous waste generation, storage, utilization and disposal particularly related to the hazardous waste calorific value of hazardous waste and detailed characteristic of the hazardous waste. Action plan for the disposal of fly ash generated from boiler shall be included.

Refer section 2.7.4 on page no 2-13 of chapter-2, section 4.6 on page no. 4-14 of chapter-4 and section 8.3.2.6 on page no. 8-6 of chapter-8.

33. Precautions to be taken during storage and transportation of hazardous chemicals shall be clearly mentioned and incorporated.

Refer section 6.2.3 on page no. 6-2 and section 6.2.5.4 on page no. 6-9 of chapter-6.

34. Authorization/Membership for the disposal of solid/hazardous waste in TSDF.


35. List of hazardous chemicals (as per MSIHC rule) with toxicity levels.

Refer table-6.1 on page no 6-2 of chapter-6.

36. A write up “Safe Practice” followed for methanol handling, storage, transportation and unloading to be submitted.

Methanol will not be used for the manufacturing of MUF resin.

37. A write up on “Treatment of workers affected by accidental spillage of methanol/phenol”.

Methanol/Phenol will not be used for the manufacturing of MUF resin.

38. Locating the plant in open area instead of covered to be reviewed in view of safety consideration.

Plant is located in open area and nearest residential area is located at around 1.3 km away from the project site. Refer section 2.4 on page no. 2-2 of chapter-2.

39. An action plan to develop green belt in 33% area. Refer section 8.3.2.7 on page no. 8-7 of chapter-8.

40. Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant site shall be included to harvest rainwater from the roof and storm water drains to recharge the ground water.

Refer section 8.3.2.3.1 on page no. 8-4 of chapter-8.

41. Details of occupational health programme. -

i. To which chemicals, workers are exposed directly or indirectly.


ii. Whether these chemicals are within Threshold Limit Values (TLV)/Permissible Exposure Levels as per ACGIH recommendation


iii. What measures company have taken to keep these chemicals within PEL/TLV.

Refer section 6.2.3.1 on page no. 6-3 of chapter-6.

iv. How the workers are evaluated concerning their exposure to chemicals during pre-placement and periodical medical monitoring.


v. What are onsite and offsite emergency plan during chemical disaster.


vi. Liver function tests (LFT) during pre-placement and periodical examination.


42. Details of occupational health surveillance programme. Refer section 6.2.8 on page no. 6-30 of chapter-6.

e n - V I S I n



43. Socio-economic development activities shall be in place.

Refer section 7.5 on page no. 7-1 Chapter-7.

44. Detailed Environment management Plan (EMP) with specific reference to details of air pollution control system, water & wastewater management, monitoring frequency, responsibility and time bound implementation plan for mitigation measure shall be provided.

Refer subsequent sections of chapter-5 and chapter-8.

45. EMP shall include the concept of waste-minimization, recycle/reuse/recover techniques, Energy conservation, and natural resource conservation.

Refer section 8.3.2.11 on page no. 8-9 Chapter-8.

46. Corporate Environmental Responsibility -

(a) Does the company has a well laid down Environment Policy approved by its Board of Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA report.

Refer section 8.5 on page no. 8-11 of Chapter-8.

(b) Does the Environmental Policy prescribe for standard operating process/procedures to bring into focus any infringement/deviation/violation of the environmental or forest norms/conditions? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA report.

Refer section 8.5 and 8.6 on page no. 8-11 of Chapter-8.

(c) What is the hierarchical system or Administrative order of the company to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance with the EC conditions. Details of this system may be given.


(d) Does the company has a system of reporting of non compliance / violations of environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the company and/or shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting mechanism should be detailed in the EIA report.


47. Any litigation pending against the project and/or any direction/order passed by any Court of Law against the project, if so, details thereof.

No litigation pending against the project and / or any direction / order passed by any Court of Law against the project.

48. Public hearing to be conducted and issues raised and commitments made by the project proponent on the same should be included in EIA/EMP Report in the form of tabular chart with financial budget for complying with the commitments made.

Refer section 6.1 on page no. 6-1 of Chapter-6 and refer annexure-XII.

49. A tabular chart with index for point wise compliance of above TORs.

Refer table-1.2 on page no. 1-3 of chapter-1.

e n - V I S I n


CHAPTER – 2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND INFRASTRUCTURAL FACILITIES 2.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION M/s. Krifor Industries Private Limited has proposed Captive Resin Manufacturing Unit (1500 TPM) in existing premises of particle board manufacturing unit located at Survey No.: 35/1, 35/2 & 36, Village Alva, Taluka Hansot, District Bharuch, Gujarat. The company has been incorporated as a Private Limited Company on 9th April, 2012 under The Companies Act, 1956 having its registered office at 40/5, Strand Road, 5th Floor, Room No. 29, Kolkata-700001. The company has already acquired NOC from Gujarat Pollution control board vide CTE No. 52899 dated 10th April, 2013. Copy of NOC for particle board unit is enclosed as Annexure-XI. 2.2 JUSTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT 2.2.1 PROJECT NEED Promoters of the company have evaluated the market demands for the particle boards. For the development of quality of particle board, resin is needed. Manufacturing of resin is cheaper than consumed from the market. So, project proponent decided to manufacture resin in house for captive consumption. The company has received good response from their prospective customers and the market as a whole. Encouraged by response from the market, the company is looking forward to manufacturing of resin to cater to the available opportunities. 2.2.2 DEMAND SUPPLY GAP As stated earlier the major end users of particle board are the building construction sector. Thus the demand for particle board is related to the expansion and growth of the building construction sector. The future demand for particle board is related to housing construction and the furniture industry whose future growth is related to the growth rate of the economy and urbanization. The rate of urbanization in the country is currently above 5 percent and the economy is growing on average at about 6%. In view of this real performance, a conservative assumption that demand for particle board will grow by 3 percent is considered in projecting the future demand. This indicates the presence of huge demand in the future and hence affirms the importance of establishing a plant that manufactures particle board. 2.2.3 SELECTION OF PROJECT SITE The present site was selected based on the environmental consideration and other factors listed below:

Considering the economic viability of manufacturing resin in house instead of purchasing it from outside.

The raw material for the particle board project is readily available from all direction and location. Plant is near to National Highway i.e. 10 m and State Highway i.e. 1.6 km. Hence transportation is easy. Availability of the well connected road and railway network for easy transportation of the, raw materials and finished goods.

Easy availability of skilled and unskilled labors for construction of plant and its operation. 2.3 PROJECT COST Cost of the proposed MUF Resin manufacturing project would be Rs 130.0 lacs. Total capital cost for environmental pollution control measures would be Rs. 13.0 Lacs and recurring cost per annum would be Rs. 2.5 Lacs. The break-up of the project cost is shown in table-2.1 and table2-2.1 TABLE-2.1 BREAK UP FOR THE PROPOSED INVESTMENT

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION RS. IN LACS 1. Factory Building 20.0 2. Plant and Machinery 86.0 3. Other Misc. Assets 12.0


e n - V I S I n


SR. NO. DESCRIPTION RS. IN LACS 4. Preliminary & Pre-Operative Exp. 02.0 5. Margin Money for Working Capital 10.0

TOTAL 130.0 TABLE-2.2 BREAK UP FOR THE PROPOSED INVESTMENT FOR THE ENVIRONMENT

POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURE SR. NO. ITEM RS. IN LACS

1. CAPITAL EXPENDITURE: Pollution control measures 13.0

2. RECURRING EXPENDITURE PER ANNUM: Recurring expenditure on environmental management cell and on pollution control systems

2.5

2.4 PROJECT SETTING 2.4.1 LOCATION M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. proposes to set up Captive MUF Resin manufacturing unit at Survey No.: 35/1, 35/2 & 36, Village Alva, Taluka Hansot, District Bharuch, Gujarat in existing premises of a bagasse based Particle Board Manufacturing Plant. The project is set up in 72,400 sq. m. of area for current activity and in the existing premises only approx. 1132.2 sq. m. of area will be utilized for manufacturing of MUF resin unit. It is situated at 21°32'21.38" North latitude and 72°49'11.70" East longitude. Terrain of project site is almost flat which is suitable for the construct the plant factory and for installation of plant machinery. There is a small manmade stream (for irrigation) passing through the project site, which will be covered and the flow will not be disturbed. Project proponent ensures that, there will be no contamination due to the project activity. National Highway 228 is passing through near project site which is good for the transportation of raw material & finished good. Nearest village Alva is far around 1.3 km from the project site. Nearest river is following at distance of 10.5 km in south direction. Location map, Google Image, Photograph and detailed layout map of the project is shown in figure-2.1, figure-2.2, figure-2.3 and figure-2.4 respectively.

Location: a) Village : Alva b) Taluka : Hansot c) District : Bharuch d) State : Gujarat e) Latitude : 21°32'21.38" N f) Longitude : 72°49'11.70" E

FIGURE-2.1 DETAILED MAP OF BHARUCH DISTRICT SHOWING PROJECT LOCATION

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-2.2 GOOGLE IMAGE OF THE PROJECT SITE

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-2.3 PHOTOGRAPS OF THE PROJECT SITE

SHOWING NH-228, NEAR THE PROJECT SITE

SHOWING SHADE OF PARTICLE BOARD UNIT AREA

SHOWING ENTRANCE TO INDUSTRY

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-2.4 LAYOUT OF THE PLANT

e n - V I S I n


2.4.2 KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES AND SETTLEMENTS 2.4.2.1 METHOD OF DATA PREPARATION Key infrastructure features have been extracted from Survey of India (SoI) topographical maps of 1:50,000 scale. The features have been updated using satellite data and have been verified with ancillary information derived from guide maps. The locations of the settlement have been extracted from Census of India (CoI) maps and have been verified by using Survey of India (SoI) topographical maps and satellite data and have been over-layer for the ease of spatial reference. 2.4.2.2 DISTANCE OF NEAREST KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES FROM PROJECT

SITE The distance of Railway, Airport, Village, River, National and State highways from the project site are presented in table-2.3. There is no defense installation, severally polluted area, national park/wild life sanctuary, ecologically sensitive area within 10 km radius of the project site. TABLE-2.3 DISTANCE OF NEAREST KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES FROM SITE

NO. NEAREST INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURE DISTANCE FROM PROJECT SITE

1. Village Alva 1.3 Km in North Direction

2. NH-228 0.01 Km in West Direction

3. SH-166 1.60 Km in East Direction

4. Kosamba Railway Station 16.1 Km in South-East Direction

5. Kim River 10.5 Km in South-East Direction

6. Surat Airport 48.0 Km in South-South-West Direction 2.4.2.3 MAP OF KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES AND SETTLEMENTS A map depicting administrative boundary showing National Highway, State Highways and other roads with the railway lines is presented in figure-2.5. The major water bodies with the rivers and the river beds are illustrated in the map to provide a better surrounding of the study area. The map marks the study area.

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-2.5 KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES AND SETTLEMENTS

e n - V I S I n


2.5 MAIN PHASES OF THE PROJECT 2.5.1 PRE CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES The project site is well connected with roads, so there is no need to construct any approach road or site access. No significant pre-construction activities are anticipated. 2.5.2 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES The project site is located on level ground, which does not require any major land filling for area grading work. Construction activities will include infrastructure as well as production facilities. The project site region falls in Seismic Zone III. This aspect shall be duly considered and taken care into during the detailed engineering phase while designing the structures. Construction materials, like steel, cement, crushed stones, sand, rubble, etc. will be required for the proposed Resin Manufacturing Unit and the same shall be procured from the local market. 2.5.3 PRODUCTION ACTIVITIES 2.5.3.1 RAW MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS Major Raw materials used for manufacturing of MUF resin are Technical Urea, Formaldehyde and Melamine etc. There will be no use of any type of solvent in the process so no need of installation of solvent recovery system. Details of the raw materials for resin unit, their source, mode of transportation and consumption for production are given in following table-2.4

TABLE-2.4 RAW MATERIALS REQUIREMENT AND SOURCE

Sr. No.

Name of The Raw Material

Consumption(Ton/Month) Source & Their Distance (Km) Mode of

Transportation

1. Technical Urea 242.00 Imported & transported from Bharuch (28 km) / Baroda (94 km) By Road

2. Formaldehyde Solution 1,014.00 Mumbai (270 Km) / Kandla (315 Km) By Road

3. Melamine 242.00 Baroda (94 km) / Mumbai (270 km) / Kandla (315 Km) By Road

4. Acetic Acid 0.78 Ankleshwar (23 km) / Mumbai (270 Km) / Ahmedabad (168 km) By Road

5. Caustic Flake 1.22 Jhagadia (40 km) By Road 2.5.3.2 RAW MATERIAL STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION Raw material for MUF resin unit will be imported or purchased from the different sources and it will be stored in separate chemical storage area. Type of storage, quantity to be stored and storage area are given in following table-2.5. TABLE-2.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF RAW MATERIALS

SR. NO.

NAME OF THE GOODS OR MATERIAL STORED

TYPE OF STORAGE

MAX INVENTORY

NAME OF THE STORAGE

AREA

AREA (M2)

1. Formaldehyde Solution Tank 30 X 5 MT

Chemical Storage Area 150.0

2. Technical Urea Bag 40 MT

3. Melamine Bag 40 MT

4. Acetic Acid Carboy 150 LTR.

5. Caustic Flake Bag 0.8 MT Scheme of mode of transportation: The raw materials will be purchased from the external sources as mentioned above. Approximately total 100 numbers of trucks per month are required for getting raw materials from source to project site. The raw materials will be covered during transportation.

e n - V I S I n


2.5.3.3 MANUFACTURING PROCESS Initially Formaldehyde and Caustic is added in to the reaction vessel and pH is maintained to 8.5.

Technical Urea and Melamine is charged in to the reactor and entire mass is heated at 950C up to 45 minutes.

To increase the rate of polymerization reaction, acid is added and pH adjusted to 4.5-5.

Continuously water tolerance is checked and when it reaches to the ration of 1:7, polymerization reaction is arrested by adding acid to make pH 8.5 and start cooling.

At 700 C secondary urea is added and cooled up to 400 C.

CHEMICAL REACTION:

H CO

HH2N C NH2

ON C NH2

O

HCH2OH

Formaldehyde Urea Intermediate product

N C NH2

O

HCH2OH H2N C NH2

ON CH2

HCO

NH2 NH

CO

NH2 H2O

Intermediate product Urea Urea Formaldehyde Resin Monomer

e n - V I S I n


NCN

CNC

NH2H2NN

CN

CNC

H2N

NH2

N CH2OHH

H2O

Melamine Formaldehyde Intermediate Product

M.F Resin Monomer W

NCN

CNC

H2N

NH2

N CH2OHH

NCN

CNC

H2N

NH2

N CH2

HNH

NCN

CNC

NH

H

NH2

NCN

CNC

NH2H2N

Intermediate Product Melamine

C HHO

H2 N CO

NH

CH2 NH

C NH2

NCN

CNC

NH

H

NH2

NCN

CNC

H2N

NH2

N CH2

HNH H2O

2.5.3.4 SOLVENT RECOVERY SYSTEM No solvent is going to be used in the manufacturing process of MUF resin, so there is no need of any solvent recovery system. 2.6 INFRASTRUCTURE FACILITIES 2.6.1 LAND Project proponent is going to setup the MUF resin unit in existing premises so no additional land is acquired. Existing industrial land area is 72,000.0 m2 and only 1,132.2 m2 will be utilized for the proposed unit. 2.6.2 TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES The project site is well connected through road and railway network for more details refer table-2.3. Transportation of all the raw materials and products shall be by road only. 2.6.3 WATER SOURCE AND UTILIZATION Daily water requirement for the project of M/s. Krifor industries Pvt. Ltd. will be 38.5 KLD. Only 2.5 KLD water will be required for the MUF resin unit (For Domestic and Cooling Tower) and 3.0 KLD water will be required for the particle board unit (Only for Domestic), and rest 33 KLD water will be used only for greenbelt development. 8.5 KLD water will be sourced from ground water through existing bore well. Acknowledgement copy of application made to CGWA is enclosed as annexure-II, and rest 30 KLD water will be sourced from surface water for the purpose of green belt development. Permission will be obtained from the irrigation department. Details of water requirement and waste water generation are given in following table-2.6, while water balance diagram shown in figure-2.6.

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-2.6 WATER CONSUMPTION AND WASTE WATER GENERATION

FOR PARTICLE BOARD UNIT: SR. NO. SECTION WATER CONSUMPTION

(LITERS/DAY) LOSSES

(LITERS/DAY) WASTE WATER GENERATION

(LITERS/DAY) 1. Domestic 3000 200 2800

TOTAL (A) 3000 200 2800 FOR RESIN MANUFACTURING UNIT:

SR. NO. SECTION

WATER CONSUMPTION (LITERS/DAY)

LOSSES (LITERS/DAY)

WASTE WATER GENERATION (LITERS/DAY)

1. Domestic 500 50 450 2. Cooling Tower 2000 1700 300

TOTAL (B) 2500 1750 750 FOR GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT:

SR. NO. SECTION WATER CONSUMPTION

(LITERS/DAY) LOSSES

(LITERS/DAY) WASTE WATER GENERATION

(LITERS/DAY) 1. Plantation 33000 33000 0

TOTAL (C) 33000 33000 0 TOTAL (A + B + C) 38500 34950 3550

FIGURE-2.6 WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM 2

Company will follow the “Zero Effluent Discharge” concept. So there will not be any discharge of effluent in any stream inside or outside the premises. 2.6.4 POWER REQUIREMENT The total power requirement for the plant is 60 KVA which will be sourced from Dakshin Gujarat Vij Company Limited (DGVCL). In case of emergency or power failure one D. G. set of 200 KVA capacity shall be utilized to fulfill power requirement.


Waste water will be treated in proposed Sewage Treatment Plant having capacity of5 KLD

Total Requirement of water

38.5 KLD

Domestic water 0.5 KLD

Particle Board (Only Domestic)

3.0 KLD

MUF Resin Unit 2.5 KLD

Cooling Tower 2.0 KLD

Plantation 33.0 KLD

Domestic Waste water 0.45 KLD

Blow-down 0.3 KLD

Domestic Waste Water 2.8 KLD

Will be collect in separate tank and be used for greenbelt development

Loss 0.2 KLD

Loss 0.05 KLD

Loss 1.7 KLD

e n - V I S I n


2.6.5 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Fuel requirement, their sources and mode of transportation are given following table-2.7. There will be no additional fuel required for the proposed resin unit. TABLE-2.7 FUEL REQUIREMENT

NAME OF FUEL REQUIREMENT SOURCE TRANSPORTATION

Lignite Coal (for existing Thermopack) 25 MT/Day Mines located in

Tadkeshwar/Kutch By road

HSD (for D. G. Set) 15 lit/ Day Nearest petrol pump By road 2.6.6 MANPOWER REQUIREMENTS Skilled / semi skilled and unskilled manpower is readily available in local area of the project. Only 6 personnel will be employed for the proposed resin unit and 204 for the particle board unit. Possibility to reduce automation will be explored to increase employment for approximately 10 to 20 personnel.3 2.7 SOURCE OF POLLUTION AND CONTROL MEASURES 2.7.1 AIR POLLUTION Air pollution is classified into point source emission and fugitive emissions. There are two main sources of point source pollution: Flue gas through utility thermo pack boiler stack and vent attached to process vessels. Emissions from point sources may include Particulate Matter (PM), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx). Air Pollution Control Measures:

Details of air pollution control measures given in the following table-2.8 TABLE-2.8 DETAILS OF STACKS

NO. OF STACK

STACK ATTACHED TO

NAME & QUANTITY OF

FUEL USED

POLLUTION CONTROL

EQUIPMENT

STACK HEIGHT & DIAMETER

POLLUTANTS (CPCB LIMIT)

1. Thermo pack (40 Lac Kcal/hr.)

Lignite Coal 25MT/Day

Bag filter & multi cyclone

Ht. - 36 M Dia. - 0.3 M

SPM < 150 mg/Nm3 SO2 < 100 ppm NOx < 50 ppm

2. D.G. Set (200 KVA) (Stand By)

Diesel 20 Lit./hr

Adequate height of stack Acoustic Enclosure

Ht. - 7 M Dia. - 0.2 M

SPM < 150 mg/Nm3 SO2 < 100 ppm NOx < 50 ppm

Design Details

Design details for the Thermo pack and Bag filter are given in below tables 2.9 and 2.10 respectively. TABLE-2.9 THERMO PACK DETAILS

SR. NO. PARTICULAR DETAILS 1 Capacity 40 Lacs kcal/hr 2 Volume of Gas (AM3/MN) 300 CMM 3 Temp of Flue Gas after ID fan 220 Max Continuous Temp 4 Deg. C. 230 Max Temp (Cut Off Point) 5 Dust to be Handled Fly ash 6 Inlet Dust Load (GM/NM3) 10 7 Pressure at inlet of Bag filter MM WG 200 – (Assumed)


e n - V I S I n


TABLE-2.10 BAG FILTER DETAILS

SR. NO. PARTICULAR DETAILS 1 Gas Volume (M3/Min) 300 2 Gas Temp. (Deg. C.) 200 Max 3 Inlet Dust Loading (GM/NM3) 10 Max 4 Expected Emission (MG/NM3) <150 5 Expected ∆P across bag filter (MM WG) 140 (Max)

Equipment Data 1 Bag Filter Type On Line, Pulse Jet type, Casing entry 2 Total Filtration area M2 427 3 Total No. of bags 260

Filter Bag Details 1 Fabric Fibre glass with graphite PTFE impegration 2 Weight GM/M2 800 3 Max continuous operating temp. Deg. C. 250 4 Max op. Temp for few minutes Deg. C. 260

Discharge Equipment Details 1 Rotary AIR lock valve 2 Size 150 NB 3 Quantity (No) 2 Nos. 4 Drive Rating (HP/RPM) 1/20 5 Drive arrangement Chain sprocket

2.7.1.1 SOURCE OF SECONDARY EMISSIONS The fugitive dust emissions from the proposed plant would be significant and the sources will be as under:

1. Loading unloading section 2. Material Handling Section and Transfer Points 3. Storage of Formaldehyde and Acetic Acid. 4. Transportation of vehicles

2.7.2 WATER POLLUTION Total waste water from Resin Unit and Particle Board Unit i.e. 3.55 KLD will be generated in the form of domestic wastewater and cooling tower blow down. Domestic waste water will be treated in proposed Sewage treatment plant. Treated water will be reused in greenbelt and sewage sludge will be used as manure in greenbelt development.4 Cooling Tower blow down will be collected in separate tank and will be used for the green belt development. Thus, the company will achieve “Zero Discharge Effluent” concept. Moreover company will adopt rain water harvesting, which will reduce impact on ground water table. 2.7.3 NOISE POLLUTION AND CONTROL SYSTEM The noise levels are primarily generated due to industrial activities like mechanical movement and material handling. Noise may generate from loading unloading, motors, vehicular movement, generators, etc. General noise level within plant is expected to remain below 75 dB (A). In order to mitigate the noise levels during the operational phase, a good green belt will be developed around the periphery of the plant. However, at places where noise levels may exceed the permissible limit, acoustic enclosure shall be provided. 2.7.4 LAND/SOIL POLLUTION AND CONTROL MEASURES Details of solid/hazardous wastes generation and its management are given in the following table-2.11. The membership of common hazardous waste treatment storage and disposal facility (TSDF) of M/s. Bharuch Enviro Infrastructure Ltd., Ankleshwer will be obtained.


e n - V I S I n


TABLE-2.11 DETAILS SOLID/HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATION & DISPOSAL METHOD

SR. NO.

TYPE OF SOLID WASTE SOURCE GENERATION

QUANTITY WASTE MANAGEMENT DETAILS

1. Used/spent Oil D.G. Set 10 Lit. / Year It will be re-used as lubricants in the plant machineries.

2. Discarded Resin Batch failure 15 MT / Year It will be sent for Incineration or TSDF. Membership will be obtained.

3. Fly Ash Existing Thermopack

1.38 MT / Day It will be sold to brick manufacturer. MOU will be obtained.

4. Sewage Sludge5 Proposed STP 0.5 MT / Day It will be used as manure in greenbelt 2.8 PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE Implementation of Project within a pre-determined time frame is an important factor for the success of a project. Timely implementation saves on various costs like interest, administrative overheads and helps to realize the goals as per pre-determined objectives. Implementation of Project involves co-ordination of different activities at various levels of the firm and amongst different outside agencies. It is considered that preliminary activities such as obtaining necessary statutory clearance for installation of the MUF Resin manufacturing unit and financial arrangements for the implementation of the project will be made at proper dates. Implementation schedule shows that, the project shall be completed within one year. A tentative schedule indicating the commencement, duration and completion of various activities, is presented as table-2.12. TABLE-2.12 PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE

ACTIVITIES START FINISH

Land Already acquired -

AFTER GETTING ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCE

Civil Works (ZERO DATE) August 2014 September 2014

Placement of orders September 2014 October 2014

Equipment Delivery October 2014 March 2015

Installation of Equipments November 2014 June 2015

Trial Production July 2015 August 2015

Start of Production August 2015 -


e n - V I S I n

M/S. KRIFOR INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD., BHARUCH, GUJARAT 3- 1

CHAPTER – 3

BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

The baseline status of environmental quality in the vicinity of project site serves as the basis for identification, prediction and evaluation of impacts. The baseline environmental quality is assessed through field studies within the impact zone for various components of the environment, viz. air, noise, water, land socio-economic, land use and biological components. The baseline environmental quality has been assessed during 1st October to 30th November, 2013 in a study area of 10 km radial distance from the project site. Location map of the project site with study area is given in figure-3.1. Knowledge of baseline environmental status of the study area is useful for Impact Assessment Process of assessing and predicting the environmental consequences of the significant actions. Significant action depicts direct adverse changes caused by the action and its effect on the health of the biota including flora, fauna and human being, socio-economic conditions, current use of land and resources, physical and cultural heritage properties and biophysical surroundings. Baseline data generation of the following environmental attributes is essential in EIA studies.

I. Meteorology II. Ambient Air Quality

III. Ambient Noise Quality IV. Surface and Ground water Quality V. Soil Quality & Geological Features

VI. Land use pattern VII. Biological Information

VIII. Socio-economic status survey 3.1 ESTABLISHMENT OF IMPACT ZONE Deciding whether a proposed action is likely to cause significant adverse environmental effects is central to the concept and practice of EIA. Before proceeding for baseline data generation, it is important to know the boundary limits and framework, so that the data generated can be effectively utilized for impact assessment. In this context, delineate of impact zone plays an important role. Generally the impact zone for industrial actions is classified into three parts; Core Zone, buffer Zone and Unaffected Zone, as illustrated below. The area of impact zone invariably changes from project to project and depends on the nature and magnitude of activities.

Core Zone (Host and Proximate Area where the proposed activities is completed) - This area is closest to the activity where the background quality of environmental and human health is always at high risk. This involves risks due to steady state, transient and accidental release of pollutants, noise, increased traffic congestion and social stress. The immediate vicinity of the plant that is around 3 km radius is factual core zone in this case.

Buffer zone (Moderately affected area) - Being a little away from the activity, the discharge pollutants need time lag to be transported to this area and gets attenuated/diluted to a considerable extent. However, the associated risk shall be real during brake-down, failure or upset conditions, and simultaneously with adverse meteorological and hydrological factors. Distance from 3 km to 10 km around the project site in the factual buffer zone in this case. This is based on the mathematical modeling study and air pollution dispersion pattern.

Unaffected Zone - This area shall not be at risk of serious damage to life, health and property. Here the impact becomes small enough to become imperceptible and/or inconsequent and/or insignificant and normal life activities shall prevail without any disturbances due to the activity. Distance away from the 10 km buffer zone is the factually unaffected zone in this case.

While generating the baseline status of physical and biological environment of the study area, the concept of impact zone has been considered. The Impact zone selection is based on preliminary screening and modeling studies. For demography and socio-economics, block wise data has been collected and used for the assessment of impacts.

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-3.1 LOCATION MAP OF THE PROJECT SITE WITH STUDY AREA

e n - V I S I n


3.2 CLIMATE OF THE STUDY AREA District Bharuch has a tropical savanna climate or tropical wet and dry climate, moderated strongly by the Arabian Sea. The summer begins in early March and lasts till June. April and May are the hottest months, the average maximum temperature being 40° C. Monsoon begins in late June and the city receives about 800 millimeters (31 in) of rain by the end of September, with the average maximum being 32° C during those months. October and November see the retreat of the monsoon and a return of high temperatures till late November. Winter starts in December and ends in late February, with average temperatures of around 23° C. The four climatic seasons viz. pre-monsoon, monsoon, post-monsoon and winter could be considered as comprising of the following months:

Pre-monsoon : March, April and May Monsoon : June, July, August and September Post-monsoon : October and November Winter : December, January and February

Sometimes, the monsoon commences in mid-June and ends in mid-September. Therefore, the boundaries between the seasons are not very rigid. 3.2.1 METEOROLOGY Air borne pollutants is dispersed by atmospheric motion. Knowledge of these motions, which range is scale from turbulent diffusion to long-range transport by weather systems, is essential to simulate such dispersion and quality of impacts of air pollution on the environment. The purpose of EIA is to determine whether average concentrations are likely to encounter at fixed locations (Know as the receptor), due to the given sources (locations and rates of emission known), under idealized atmospheric conditions. It is imperative that one should work with idealized condition and all analysis pertaining to air turbulence and ambient air or noise pollution should be done with meteorological conditions, which can at best be expected to occur. Surat is the meteorological observatory, from where the meteorological data (Temperature, Relative Humidity, Rainfall, Wind speed and Wind direction etc.) were collected from the “Climatological Tables of Observatories in India 1961-1990” issued by “The Director General of Meteorology, New Delhi” which is shown as annexure-III. The data in respect of the above Parameters have been briefly discussed in the following paragraphs. 3.2.1.1 TEMPERATURE DETAILS Temperature varies from season to season. Mean daily maximum temperature was recorded in the month of April at 37.3°C. Highest mean temperature in the month, recorded in April, was 42.1°C. From November to January, both day and night temperatures begin to decrease rapidly. January is generally the coldest month, with mean morning temperature of 14.4° C. Mean lowest in the month temperature of about 10.2 °C is recorded in January. During the post-monsoon season, day temperatures remain between 12.2 to 38.8ºC. In winter season, day temperatures remain between 10.2 to 37.4 ºC. 3.2.1.2 RELATIVE HUMIDITY (RH) Most humid conditions are found in the monsoon season. Thereafter, it decreases gradually during post-monsoon, winter and summer season in that order. Mornings are more humid than evenings and humidity ranges from a high of 78 to 87% in monsoon mornings to a low of 32 to 55% in summer evenings. During post-monsoon season, morning humidity remains between 62-71 % and during the evening it remains between 44 to 48%. 3.2.1.3 RAINFALL The total rainfall in year is observed to be 1172.8 mm. Distribution of rainfall by season is 2.5 mm in winter (December to February), 8.5 mm in summer (March, April, May), 1106.5 mm in monsoons (June, July, August, September) and 34.3 mm in post-monsoons (October to November).

e n - V I S I n


3.2.1.4 PREDOMINANT WIND DIRECTION Pre dominant wind direction is shown as following table-3.1. TABLE-3.1 PREDOMINANT WIND DIRECTION

MONTH JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

FIRST HIGHEST

Morning NE NE NE SW SW SW SW SW SW SE NE NE

Evening NW NW NW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW NW NW

SECOND HIGHEST

Morning N N SE NW W W W W W, NW NE SE E

Evening NE SW SW NW W S W W W NW NE NE

THIRD HIGHEST

Morning NW NW NW SE S, NW SE SE CALM NW E, CALM E N

Evening N NE W W S W S S S NE E N

As per Indian Meteorological Department (IMD), Long Term Climatological Tables, 1961-1990 the predominant wind direction during the study period post monsoon season is observed to be from NE and E direction. 3.2.1.5 CLOUD COVER Generally, monsoon starts from June month to September months. So the area remains cloudy between the months June to September, which is the active period of the monsoon season. Generally cloud cover ranges from 3.9 to 6.8 Oktas during the monsoon season. 3.3 SITE SPECIFIC MICRO-METEOROLOGY DATA Meteorology is the fluid mechanics applied to the atmosphere. Meteorological conditions play an important role in determining existing air quality and environmental conditions. The essential relationship between meteorology and atmospheric dispersion involves the wind in the broadest sense of the term. Wind fluctuations over a very wide range of time and space scales accomplish dispersion and strongly influence other processes associated with them. The characterization of the existing meteorological conditions near a source of pollutants is, therefore, a critical aspect for assessing air quality in the ambient environment. For the rapid air quality impact assessment meteorological data for the desired season/period over the project region are used for air quality modelling. The following subsections describe the prime meteorological parameters during the observation period which govern the dispersion of pollutants. Site-specific mean meteorological data is given in following table-3.2. 3.4 WIND DIRECTION AND WIND SPEED Wind direction is reported as the direction from which the wind blows and is based on surface observations. Over the course of a season, wind usually blows in all directions with varying frequencies. Certain direction, which occurs more frequently than others, is known as the prevailing wind direction. Wind speed and direction and their frequency during post-monsoon season are represented by wind rose diagram. The wind rose denotes a class of diagrams designed to display the distribution of wind direction experienced at a given location over a period of time — long for a climatological record of prevailing winds or short to show wind character for a particular event or purpose. Wind rose summarizes a considerable amount of wind frequency information into a single graphic and shown in figure-3.2 below during the monitoring period.

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-3.2 SITE SPECIFIC METEOROLOGICAL DATA (1ST OCT TO 30TH NOV-2013)

METEOROLOGICAL PARAMETER

MONTH OF YEAR 2013

OCTOBER NOVEMBER

Temperature (0C) Min. Max. Avg.

21.2 38.7 30.6

14.6 37.0 26.3

Relative Humidity (%) Min. Max. Avg.

15.0 88.0 60.9

18.0 92.0 55.0

Wind Speed (m/s) Min. Max. Avg.

0.0 6.6 2.2

0.0 7.7 0.6

Pre-Dominant Wind Direction Blowing from NE and E FIGURE-3.2 WIND ROSE DIAGRAM

e n - V I S I n


3.5 AIR ENVIRONMENT 3.5.1 DESIGN OF NETWORK FOR AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS The air quality status in the impact zone is assessed through a network of ambient air quality monitoring locations. The tropical climatic conditions mainly control the transport and dispersion of air pollutant during various seasons. The baseline studies for air environment include identification of specific air pollutants prior to implementation of the project. The EIA study requires monitoring of baseline air quality during one season. Accordingly, air quality monitoring was carried out in during 1st Oct’ 2013 to 30th Nov’ 2013. The baseline status of the air environment is assessed through a systematic air quality surveillance programme, which is planned based on the following criteria:

• Topography / terrain of the study area • Regional synoptic scale climatologically normal • Densely populated areas within the region • Location of surrounding industries • Representation of regional background • Representation of valid cross-sectional distribution in downwind direction

3.5.2 RECONNAISSANCE Reconnaissance was undertaken to establish the baseline status of air environment in the study region. Six Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) locations were selected based on guidelines of network sitting criteria. All AAQM locations were selected within the study area of 5 km radial distance from the project site as per TOR. 3.5.3 METHODOLOGY FOR AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING The ambient air quality monitoring was carried out in accordance with guidelines of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) of June 1998 and National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) of CPCB vide G.S.R. No. 826(E) dated 18th November, 2009. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) was carried out at six locations during 1st October, 2013 to 30th November, 2013 for parameters such as Particulate Matter (PM10 and PM2.5), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) and Volatile Organic Compound (VOC). The monitoring was carried out 24 hours a day twice a week per location in the study area. Eighteen numbers of observations were taken at each monitoring location. The locations of the different stations with respect to its distance and direction from project site are shown in table-3.3 and figure-3.3 respectively. The values for mentioned concentrations of various pollutants at all the monitoring locations were processed for different statistical parameters like arithmetic mean, minimum concentration, and maximum concentration and percentile values. The existing baseline levels of PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx and VOC are expressed in terms of various statistical parameters as given in tables-3.4. National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) are enclosed as an annexure-IV. TABLE-3.3 DETAILS OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS

SR. NO. NAME OF VILLAGE BEARING W.R.T. APPROXIMATE RADIAL

DISTANCE(KM) TYPE OF

AREA

1. Project Site (A1) - 0 Industrial

2. Malanpor (A2) SW 4.0 Residential

3. Sayan (A3) W 2.0 Residential

4. Alva (A4) N 1.2 Residential

5. Kalam (A5) ENE 4.4 Residential

6. Rohid (A6) E 4.1 Residential

e n - V I S I n


3.5.4 RESULTS & DISCUSSION The existing baseline levels with respect to PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and NOx expressed in terms of various statistical parameters are presented in tables-3.4. During post monsoon season, the arithmetic mean values of PM10 varied between 38.4-52.4 μg/m3 while the 98th percentile values of PM10 concentrations ranged between 44.3-61.3 μg/m3. The arithmetic mean values of PM2.5 varied between 31.1-43.0 μg/m3 and the 98th percentile values of PM2.5 concentrations were observed to vary from 37.7-49.3 μg/m3. The arithmetic mean values for SO2 was 11.0-17.3 μg/m3 for pre monsson season and the 98th percentile concentrations of SO2 was also 14.4-20.4 μg/m3. The arithmetic mean values of NOx varied between 15.6-25.3 μg/m3 while the 98th percentile concentrations of NOx also ranged from 18.9- 29.1 μg/m3, while VOC was not detected from these locations. From the above mentioned studies it is observed that PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx and VOC concentrations are well below the stipulated standards of CPCB.

e n - V I S I n


A1

A3

A2

A5

A4

A6

FIGURE-3.3 LOCATION OF AMBIENT AIR AND NOISE LEVEL MONITORING STATIONS

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-3.4 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STATUS

SR. NO. SAMPLING LOCATION -

PARAMETERS

Unit: µg/m3

PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NO2 VOC

1. Project Site (A1)

Min. 40 31 12.4 18.3

Not Detected

Max. 60 47 19.1 26.4

Ave. 50.6 38.9 16.0 22.3

98th Per. 59.7 46.0 18.8 26.1

2. Malanpor (A2)

Min. 31 26 7.5 12.5

Not Detected

Max. 45 38 14.8 19.2

Ave. 38.4 31.1 11.0 15.6

98th Per. 44.3 37.7 14.4 18.9

3. Sayan (A3)

Min. 35 28 10.2 16.5

Not Detected

Max. 52 41 16.1 24.1

Ave. 43.2 34.5 13.4 20.2

98th Per. 51.3 40.3 15.9 23.8

4. Alva (A4)

Min. 43 36 14.3 21.8

Not Detected

Max. 62 50 20.6 29.6

Ave. 52.4 43.0 17.3 25.3

98th Per. 61.3 49.3 20.4 29.1

5. Kalam (A5)

Min. 37 31 11.3 17.0

Not Detected

Max. 59 44 17.7 25.7

Ave. 48.0 38.2 14.4 21.3

98th Per. 58.3 43.3 17.5 25.3

6. Rohid (A6)

Min. 36 29 9.9 17.7

Not Detected

Max. 51 40 16.7 25.2

Ave. 43.1 34.8 13.2 21.0

98th Per. 50.3 39.3 16.5 24.7 3.6 WATER ENVIRONMENT 3.6.1 SOURCE OF WATER OF THE STUDY AREA Source of water for the project is ground and surface water which will be made available through bore well and irrigation department respectively. Surface water will be used only for green belt development. Ground water table of the area is not expected to be encountered at shallower depths of the order of at least 8-10m from the average ground level. 3.6.2 METHODOLOGY FOR WATER QUALITY MONITORING Physico-chemical parameters have been analyzed to ascertain the baseline status existing surface water and ground water bodies. Samples were collected once during the study period for post-monsoon season in Oct, Nov, 2013. The details of surface and ground water sampling locations are given in table-3.5 and sampling locations of water quality monitoring are shown in figure-3.4. The Indian standard specification for drinking water is enclosed as annexure-V and CPCB standards of classification of inland surface water as annexure-VI. The physico-chemical characteristics of the different ground water samples and surface water samples are presented in the tables-3.6.

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-3.5 DETAILS OF GROUND AND SURFACE WATER MONITORING LOCATIONS

SR. NO. SAMPLING LOCATIONS

BEARING W. R.T.

PROJECT SITE

APPROXIMATE RADIAL DISTANCE FROM PROJECT

SITE (KM)

1. Project Site (GW1) - 0

2. Sayan (GW2) W 2.0

3. Asta (GW3) NEN 3.9

4. Valner (GW4) ESE 2.2

5. Rayma (GW5) S 2.3

6. Malanpor (GW6) SW 4.0

7. Van Khadi near Rayma (SW1) S 2.3

8. Pond near Alva (SW2) N 1.2

GW= Ground water, SW= Surface water

e n - V I S I n


GW

1 G

W2

GW

5

GW

4

GW

6

SW1 SW

2

FIGURE-3.4 LOCATIONS OF GROUND AND SURFACE WATER SAMPLING STATIONS

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-3.6 BASELINE GROUND AND SURFACE WATER QUALITY

SR. NO. PARAMETERS

UN

IT

LOCATIONS

PRO

JEC

T S

ITE

(G

W1)

SAY

AN

(G

W2)

AST

A

(GW

3)

VA

LN

ER

(G

W4)

RA

YM

A

(GW

5)

MA

LA

NPO

R

(GW

6)

VA

N K

HA

DI

(SW

1)

PON

D

(SW

2)

1. pH - 8.3 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.1 8.3 7.8 7.1 2. Colour Hazen Colourless Colourless Colourless Colourless Colourless Colourless Colourless Colourless

3. Odour - Unobjectio-nable

Unobjectio-nable

Unobjectio-nable

Unobjectio-nable

Unobjectio-nable

Unobjectio-nable

Unobjectio-nable

Unobjectio-nable

4. Turbidity NTU 1.0 1.5 1.3 1.6 2.1 1.5 1.6 1.0

5. Alkalinity mg/l 310 250 470 440 380 290 183 134

6. Total Hardness mg/l 530 390 600 590 470 620 464 593 7. Iron as Fe mg/l 0.18 0.16 0.12 0.15 0.12 0.16 0.11 0.12 8. Chlorides as Cl mg/l 189 351 259 556 317 469 311 272

9. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) mg/l 1829 1150 780 1230 1286 810 803 792

10. Calcium as Ca+2 mg/l 320 286 493 337 516 328 281 240

11. Sulphate as SO4 mg/l 250 370 390 520 480 360 178 192

12. Nitrate as NO3 mg/l 26.00 82.00 54.20 75.10 58.00 65.20 56 27

13. Phenolic substances as C6H5OH mg/l Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil

14. BOD mg/l 1 2 3 2 4 2 3 4

15. COD mg/l 4 6 8 4 10 6 10 10

e n - V I S I n


3.6.3 PHYSICO-CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF WATER 3.6.3.1 GROUND WATER Ground water samples from different villages in the study area were collected and analyzed during post-monsoon season. The physico-chemical characteristics of the ground water are presented in the table-3.6. The pH varied in the range of 8.1-8.4, turbidity 1.0-2.1 NTU, total hardness 390-620 ppm, total alkalinity 250-470 ppm, total dissolved solids 810-1829 ppm, Chloride 189-556 ppm, Sulphate 250-520 ppm. Nutrient values in the form of nitrate are present in the range 26-82 ppm. 3.6.3.2 SURFACE WATER Surface water samples from different villages in the study area were collected and analyzed during post-monsoon season. The physico-chemical characteristics of the surface water are presented in the table-3.6. The pH varied in the range of 7.1-7.8, turbidity 1.0-1.6 NTU, total hardness 464-593 ppm, total alkalinity 134-183 ppm, total dissolved solids 792-803 ppm, Chloride 189-556 ppm, Sulphate 272-311 ppm. Nutrient values in the form of nitrate are present in the range 27-56 ppm. 3.7 GEO HYDROLOGY 3.7.1 INTRODUCTION Geo-hydrologically, ground water is available in confined to semi confined aquifer in the study area. Alluvium is the main aquifer in the study area. Geologically the area is covered by thick alluvial deposits composed of hard sticky brownish clay and fine medium grained sand and kankars. 3.7.2 WATER LEVEL Water level was measured at 8 locations during the visit. Locations of wells are given in the table-3.7 wells where the water level measured. TABLE-3.7 THE LOCATIONS OF WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT

COORDINATES LOCATION TYPE OF WELL STATIC WATER LEVEL (IN M)

72.82 21.54 Alva Open Well 9.38

72.82 21.55 Project Site Tube Well 2.81

72.80 21.54 Kata Sayan Open Well 5.30

72.83 21.58 Asta Open Well 3.30

72.84 21.53 Valner Open Well 5.50

72.82 21.52 Rayma Open Well 1.97

72.80 21.51 Malanpor Open Well 8.20

72.81 21.50 Aniyadra Open Well 0.50 The static water level is ranging between 0.5 m to 9.38 m from the existing ground surface. Figure-3.5 shows the location of well inventoried. Figure-3.6 shows the reduced contour level map.

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-3.5 LOCATION OF WELLS INVENTORIED

Alva

Project SiteKata Sayan

Asta

Valner

Rayma

Malanpor

Aniyadra

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.5

21.51

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

FIGURE-3.6 REDUCED WATER LEVEL CONTOUR MAP

Alva


Asta

Valner

Rayma

Malanpor

Aniyadra

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.5

21.51

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.5

21.51

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

3.7.3 GROUNDWATER QUALITY pH (Hydrogen Ion Concentration) pH is a hydrogen ion concentration. Generally, based on the pH value, water can be divided in to three classes, namely: (1) If pH is less than 7, water is said to be ACIDIC in nature, (2) For FRESH water pH is equal to 7 and (3) If pH is more than 7, water is classified as ALKALINE. The maximum pH value was found at Valner water sample, viz., 8.4 whereas the minimum pH value was 8.1 at Rayma figure-3.7 shows the contour diagram of the pH value in groundwater samples in study area.

e n - V I S I n


The pH value 6.5 to 8.5 is permissible as per Indian Standard 10500:2012. All the groundwater samples are within the limit as per Indian Standard of drinking water. FIGURE-3.7 CONTOUR MAP OF PH VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES

Alva


Asta

Valner

Rayma

Malanpor

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) The salt content in the water may be expressed in Total Dissolved Solids (TDS). TDS is the amount of materials (inorganic salts and small amounts of organic material) dissolved in water and is commonly expressed in terms of milligrams per liter. If the salt concentration in water increases, it is difficult for plants to extract the water. The maximum TDS value found at Project site well viz.1829 ppm and minimum 780 ppm at Asta well’s groundwater sample. The desirable TDS limit is 500 ppm and permissible TDS limit is 2000 ppm. All the groundwater samples collected and analyzed are found within the permissible limit. Figure-3.8 shows the iso TDS contour of the study area. FIGURE-3.8 CONTOUR MAP OF TDS VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES

Alva


Asta

Valner

Rayma

Malanpor

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

e n - V I S I n


Total Hardness as CaCO3 Hardness of water is due to carbonates, sulphates and chlorides of calcium and magnesium. The maximum value of hardness as CaCO3 found is 620 ppm in Malanpor groundwater sample and minimum 390 ppm in Katasayan groundwater samples. As per the IS 10500:2012, 200 ppm is desirable limit and 600 ppm is the permissible limit. Figure-3.9 shows the total hardness concentration in the study area. FIGURE-3.9 CONTOUR MAP OF TOTAL HARDNESS VALUES IN GROUNDWATER

SAMPLES

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

Alva


Asta

Valner

Rayma

Malanpor

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

Permissible LimitAbove Permissible Limit

300

350

400

450

500

550

600

650

700

Chloride (Cl) The chloride content as per Indian Standards 10500:2012 desirable limit is 250 ppm and permissible limit is 1000 ppm. The chloride content above the desirable limit can cause the change in taste of water, corrosion and potability. All the groundwater samples are within the permissible limit of IS: 10500:2012. Maximum chloride content of 556 ppm found at Valner village and minimum concentration of chloride content was found at Project site groundwater sample, i.e., 189 ppm. Figure-3.10 shows the contour diagram of chloride ion concentration in the study area.

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-3.10 CONTOUR MAP OF CHLORIDE VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

Alva


Asta

Valner

Rayma

Malanpor

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

Permissible Limit Desirable Limit

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

550

600

Sulphate (SO4) The sulphate content in ground water generally occurs as soluble salts of calcium, magnesium and sodium. Sulphate is having desirable limit of 200 ppm and permissible limit is 400 ppm as per Indian Drinking Water Standards 10500:2012. Above the desirable limit causes gastro intestinal irritation particularly when magnesium or sodium is present. The minimum concentration of sulphate was found at Project Site water sample which is 250 ppm and maximum is 520 ppm at the Valner. Figure-3.11 shows the distribution of Sulphate ion. FIGURE-3.11 CONTOUR MAP OF SULPHATE VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

Alva


Asta

Valner

Rayma

Malanpor

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

Permissible LimitAbove Permissible Limit

250

300

350

400

450

500

550

e n - V I S I n


Nitarte (NO3): Nitrates having desirable limit of 45 ppm and permissible limit are 100 ppm as per Indian Drinking Water Standards 10500:2012. The minimum concentration of nitrate is found at the Project site, i.e., 26 ppm and maximum is 82 ppm at Katasayan groundwater sample. Nitrate content in the study area is within the permissible limit of the Indian Standards. The high Nitrate concentration may be due to the infiltration of sewerage water in the groundwater. Nitrate content in drinking water is considered important for its adverse health effects and moderately toxic. In higher concentrations, nitrate may produce a disease known as methaemoglobinaemia (blue babies) which generally affects bottle-fed infants. Repeated heavy doses of nitrates on ingestion may also cause carcinogenic diseases. Figure-3.12 shows distribution of nitrates. FIGURE-3.12 CONTOUR MAP OF NITRATE VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

Alva


Asta

Valner

Rayma

Malanpor

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

Permissible Limit Desirable Limit

25303540455055606570758085

Calcium (Ca) Calcium above the desirable limit causes the encrustation in water supply system and adverse effects on domestic use. The Calcium content is within the permissible limit of IS: 10500:2012 in all the groundwater samples. The maximum 516 ppm Calcium is found at Rayma and minimum 286 ppm at Katasayan village. As per Indian Standards 75 ppm is the desirable limit and 200 PPM is the permissible limit. All the groundwater samples are showing calcium concentration above the permissible limit of Indian Standard 10500:2012. Figure-3.13 shows distribution of Calcium.

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-3.13 CONTOUR MAP OF CALCIUM VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES

Alva


Asta

Valner

Rayma

Malanpor

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

Total Alkalinity Total Alkalinity having desirable limit of 200 ppm and permissible limit are 600 ppm as per Indian Drinking Water Standards 10500:2012. The minimum concentration of total alkalinity is found at the Katasayan, i.e., 250 ppm and maximum is 470 ppm at Asta groundwater sample. Figure-3.14 shows the concentration of Total Alkalinity in the study area. FIGURE-3.14 CONTOUR MAP OF TOTAL ALKALINITY VALUES IN GROUNDWATER SAMPLES

Alva


Asta

Valner

Rayma

Malanpor

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

72.8 72.81 72.82 72.83 72.84

21.52

21.53

21.54

21.55

21.56

21.57

e n - V I S I n


3.7.4 GROUNDWATER DEVELOPMENT Ground water potential of the study area i.e. block estimated by government agencies time to time, is discussed as under. The Gujarat State Water Supply and Sewerage Board have estimated groundwater potential in 1997 of Hansot taluka, which is given in table-3.8. TABLE 3.8 GROUNDWATER DEVELOPMENT OF HANSOT TALUKA

GROSS GROUND WATER

RECHARGE (MCM/YEAR)

UTILISABLE GROUND WATER

RECHARGE (MCM/YEAR)

TOTAL GROUND WATER DRAFT

(MCM/YEAR)

GROUND WATER

BALANCE (MCM/YEAR)

LEVEL OF GROUND WATER DEVELOPMENT

(%)

CATEGORY

11.78 9.42 5.33 4.09 56.56 White The groundwater potential estimated by Groundwater Resource Estimation Committee is given the figure-3.15. The Hansot taluka falls in Saline category as this study. FIGURE-3.15 GROUNDWATER DEVELOPMENT OF BHARUCH

(Source: Groundwater estimation committee, 2005)

Gujarat Water Resource Development Board has estimated in 2011 groundwater potential for Gujarat and they placed Hansot taluka in safe category of groundwater development. Groundwater category map of Gujarat is presented in figure-3.16.

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-3.16 GROUNDWATER CATEGORY MAP GUJARAT

(Source: GWRDC, Gandhinagar – 2011) 3.7.5 AQUIFER PERFORMANCE TEST The short aquifer performance test is carried to assess the physical parameter of water bearing formation particularly its transmissivity and permeability. The aquifer parameters are calculated by Jacob method and Theis recovery method. The salient feature of the test well is given as under. Recovery and pumping phase data of the test well is given in table-3.9. Total Depth (in m) 30.50 Saturated Thickness of aquifer (in m) 20.00 Motor capacity 3 HP Motor lowered depth (in m) 24.39 Static Water Level (in m) 2.81 TABLE 3.9 RECOVERY PHASE AND PUMPING PHASE DATA OF THE TEST WELL

PUMPING PHASE READING RECOVERY PHASE READING

SR. NO.

TIME SINCE PUMP ON (T IN MIN)

PWL (IN M)

DRAWDOWN (IN M)

TIME SINCE PUMP OFF (T' IN MIN)


RESIDUAL DRAWDOWN T/T'

1 5 2.86 0.05 5 305 0.28 61.00 2 10 2.86 0.05 10 310 0.26 31.00 3 15 2.87 0.06 15 315 0.24 21.00 4 20 2.87 0.06 20 320 0.22 16.00 5 25 2.88 0.07 25 325 0.21 13.00 6 30 2.88 0.07 30 330 0.21 11.00 7 35 2.89 0.08 35 335 0.19 9.57 8 40 2.89 0.08 40 340 0.19 8.50 9 45 2.89 0.08 45 345 0.18 7.67

10 50 2.90 0.09 50 350 0.18 7.00 11 55 2.90 0.09 55 355 0.18 6.45

e n - V I S I n



SR. NO.


PWL (IN M)

DRAWDOWN (IN M)




12 60 2.91 0.10 60 360 0.17 6.00 13 65 2.91 0.10 65 365 0.16 5.62 14 70 2.93 0.12 70 370 0.15 5.29 15 75 2.93 0.12 75 375 0.15 5.00 16 80 2.94 0.13 80 380 0.15 4.75 17 85 2.94 0.13 85 385 0.15 4.53 18 90 2.94 0.13 90 390 0.15 4.33 19 95 2.95 0.14 95 395 0.14 4.16 20 100 2.95 0.14 100 400 0.14 4.00 21 105 2.95 0.14 105 405 0.14 3.86 22 110 2.97 0.16 110 410 0.14 3.73 23 115 2.97 0.16 115 415 0.12 3.61 24 120 2.97 0.16 120 420 0.12 3.50 25 125 2.97 0.16 125 425 0.11 3.40 26 130 2.98 0.17 130 430 0.11 3.31 27 135 2.98 0.17 135 435 0.11 3.22 28 140 2.99 0.18 140 440 0.10 3.14 29 145 2.99 0.18 145 445 0.10 3.07 30 150 3.00 0.19 150 450 0.09 3.00 31 155 3.00 0.19 155 455 0.08 2.94 32 160 3.00 0.19 160 460 0.07 2.88 33 165 3.00 0.19 165 465 0.07 2.82 34 170 3.01 0.20 170 470 0.06 2.76 35 175 3.03 0.22 175 475 0.06 2.71 36 180 3.03 0.22 180 480 0.06 2.67 37 185 3.03 0.22 185 485 0.05 2.62 38 190 3.05 0.24 190 490 0.05 2.58 39 195 3.05 0.24 195 495 0.05 2.54 40 200 3.05 0.24 200 500 0.05 2.50 41 205 3.05 0.24 205 505 0.05 2.46 42 210 3.06 0.25 210 510 0.05 2.43 43 215 3.06 0.25 215 515 0.05 2.40 44 220 3.06 0.25 220 520 0.05 2.36 45 225 3.07 0.26 225 525 0.04 2.33 46 230 3.07 0.26 230 530 0.04 2.30 47 235 3.08 0.27 235 535 0.04 2.28 48 240 3.08 0.27 240 540 0.04 2.25 49 245 3.08 0.27 245 545 0.04 2.22 50 250 3.08 0.27 250 550 0.03 2.20 51 255 3.08 0.27 255 555 0.03 2.18 52 260 3.08 0.27 260 560 0.03 2.15 53 265 3.09 0.28 265 565 0.03 2.13 54 270 3.09 0.28 270 570 0.03 2.11 55 275 3.09 0.28 275 575 0.03 2.09 56 280 3.09 0.28 280 580 0.03 2.07 57 285 3.10 0.29 285 585 0.03 2.05 58 290 3.10 0.29 290 590 0.03 2.03 59 295 3.11 0.30 295 595 0.02 2.02 60 300 3.11 0.30 300 600 0.02 2.00 61 - - - 305 605 0.02 1.98

e n - V I S I n



SR. NO.


PWL (IN M)

DRAWDOWN (IN M)




62 - - - 310 610 0.02 1.97 63 - - - 315 615 0.02 1.95 64 - - - 320 620 0.00 1.94 65 - - - 325 625 0.00 1.92 66 - - - 330 630 0.00 1.91

3.7.6 TRANSMISSIVITY Transmissivity of the aquifer is defined as the rate at which water prevailing kinematic viscosity is transmitted through a unit width of aquifer under a unit hydraulic gradient. 2.303 X Q T = -------------------- 4 � X ∆s Where, Δs = change in drawdown over one log cycle (in m), Q = Discharge of Tube well (m3 /day) 3.7.7 FIELD PERMEABILITY/HYDRAULIC CONDUCTIVITY A medium has a unit hydraulic conductivity if it will transmit in unit time a unit volume of groundwater at the prevailing kinematic viscosity (Kinematic viscosity equals dynamic viscosity divided by fluid density). The Field permeability “K” can be determined by using following equation, K = T/M 3.7.8 SPECIFIC CAPACITY The specific capacity is computed by dividing the discharge by drawdown. The larger the value of specific capacity, the better the aquifer tapped. The values of Specific Capacity C is obtained by using following equation. Q C = ------- S Where, C = Specific capacity in m3 / min / m, Q = Discharge, s = Maximum Drawdown (m) Time vs drawdown curve and ratio vs residual drawdown curve are presented in figure-3.17 and figure-3.18 respectively. FIGURE-3.17 TIME VS DRAWDOWN CURVE

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-3.18 RATIO VS RESIDUAL DRAWDOWN CURVE

The result of aquifer performance test i.e. aquifer parameters are summarized in the following table-3.10. TABLE-3.10 SUMMARY OF AQUIFER PARAMETERS

SR. NO.

SWL (in m)

DISCHARGE (m3 /day)

MAXIMUM DRAWDOWN

(in m)

JACOB’S METHOD THEIS’S METHOD SPECIFIC CAPACITYT m2/day K T m2/day K

m/day m/day m3 / day/ m1 2.81 113.39 0.3 189 9.45 189 9.45 377.59

3.8 NOISE ENVIRONMENT The objective of the noise pollution survey around the project site was to identify existing noise sources and to measure background noise levels. The study was carried out in the following steps:

• Reconnaissance • Identification of noise sources and measurement of noise levels • Measurement of noise levels due to transportation • Community noise levels

3.8.1 RECONNAISSANCE The details of location of background & transportation noise monitoring station are given in table-3.11 while the results of noise monitoring are given in table-3.12. 3.8.2 EQUIVALENT SOUND LEVELS OR EQUIVALENT CONTINUOUS EQUAL ENERGY

LEVEL (Leq) There is large number of noise scales and rating methods based on some sort of average of weighted average quantities derived from the detailed noise characteristics. Equivalent sound levels or Equivalent continuous equal energy level (Leq) is a statistical value of sound pressure level that can be equated to any fluctuating noise level and forms a useful measure of noise exposure and forms basis of several of the noise indices used presently. Leq is defined as the constant noise level, which over a given time, expands the same amount of energy, as is expanded by the fluctuating level over the same time. This value is expressed by the equation:

Leq = 10 log Σ (10)Li/10 × ti

Where, n = Total number of sound samples,

Li = The noise level of any ith sample

ti = Time duration of ith sample,

Expressed as fraction of total sample time

i=n

i=1

e n - V I S I n


Leq has gained wide spread acceptance as a scale for the measurement of long term noise exposure. Hourly equipment noise levels in the identified impact zone are monitored for day and time separately using sound level meter. All the values are reported in Leq and in case of equipment noise, Sound pressure level are monitored 1.5 m away from the machine and assessed with respect to standard prescribed in factory Act. 3.8.3 METHODOLOGY FOR NOISE MONITORING Noise standards have been designated for different types of area, i.e. residential, commercial, industrial and silence zones, as per ‘The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000, Notified by Ministry of Environment and Forests, New Delhi, February 14, 2000. Different standards have been stipulated for day time (6 am to 10 pm) and night time (10 pm to 6 am). Ambient noise level monitoring was done at same locations where ambient air monitoring was carried out within a study area. The locations are away from the major roads and major noise sources so as to measure ambient noise levels. One day monitoring was carried out at the locations during the study period. The frequency of monitoring was set at an interval of 15 seconds over a period of 10 minutes per hour for 24-hours. The observed Equivalent sound levels (Leq) values in dBA are given in table-3.12 for each monitoring location in distinguished form of day time (6 am to 10 pm) and night time (10 pm to 6 am). All measurements were carried out when the ambient conditions were unlikely to adversely affect the results. TABLE-3.11 DETAILS OF LOCATION OF BACKGROUND NOISE MONITORING STATIONS

SR. NO. NAME OF VILLAGE BEARING W.R.T. APPROXIMATE RADIAL

DISTANCE(KM) TYPE OF

AREA 1. Project Site (N1) - 0 Industrial 2. Malanpor (N2) SW 4 Residential 3. Sayan (N3) W 2.0 Residential 4. Alva (N4) N 1.2 Residential 5. Kalam (N5) ENE 4.4 Residential 6. Rohid (N6) E 4.1 Residential

TABLE-3.12 BACKGROUND NOISE LEVELS

SR. NO. LOCATION CATEGORY OF

AREA

NOISE LEVEL (Leq) IN dBA (DAY TIME) (0600 TO 2100 HRS.)

NOISE LEVEL (Leq) IN dBA (NIGHT TIME)

(2100 TO 0600 HRS.) 1. Project Site (A1) Industrial 53.2 - 56.1 49.4 - 54.3 2. Malanpor (A2) Residential 41.8 - 45.2 36.3 - 39.5 3. Sayan (A3) Residential 43.7 - 47.4 35.9 - 40.2 4. Alva (A4) Residential 41.2 - 44.9 37.2 - 41.0 5. Kalam (A5) Residential 40.4 - 43.7 36.1 - 39.9 6. Rohid (A6) Residential 41.3 - 44.8 37.4 - 41.3

3.8.4 BASELINE NOISE LEVELS The noise level measured in study area at different locations is given in table-3.12. The noise monitoring locations noise monitoring locations are shown in figure-3.3. The Project site is fall in category of industrial area and the noise level was found 53.2 - 56.1 dBA in daytime and 49.4 - 54.3 dBA in night time. The noise levels varied in the residential area of the study area during day time [night time] in the range of 40.4-47.4 [35.9-41.3] dBA. The noise sources identified in industrial zone are vehicular traffic, industrial and commercial activities. CPCB recommendation for community noise exposure in different category of area (i.e. residential, commercial, industrial and silence zone) is enclosed as annexure-VII, while Damage risk criteria for hearing loss given by occupational safety & health administration (OSHA) is enclosed as annexure-VIII. The observed noise levels were below the stipulated standards of CPCB.

e n - V I S I n


3.8.5 NOISE LEVELS DUE TO TRANSPORTATION Noise levels were also measured at two different locations in November, 2013. The equivalent noise level Leq (60 min average) measured at a distance of 10 m and 20 m from the edge of the road at each of the locations are presented in table-3.13. TABLE-3.13 NOISE LEVELS DUE TO TRANSPORTATION

SR. NO. SAMPLING LOCATION TIME

NOISE LEVEL IN dBA

10 m FROM EDGE OF THE ROAD

20 m FROM EDGE OF THE ROAD

1. NH-228 (Dandi Heritage Highway) near Village Rayma

Day 51.6 49.5

Night 48.5 45.7

2. SH-6 near Village Alva Day 52.7 47.7

Night 49.9 44.6

3.8.6 COMMUNITY NOISE LEVELS The communities close to the project site are not exposed to major noise sources. The commercial activities and transport apart from natural sources contribute to community noise levels. The noise levels close to project site were low and within the stipulated standards of CPCB for the respective designated areas. 3.9 LAND ENVIRONMENT 3.9.1 METHODOLOGY FOR SOIL MONITORING Soil samples were collected from six different locations within the study area in the study period. The locations selected for collection of soil samples are presented in table-3.14 & figure-3.19. The analysis results of soil samples collected from the study area given in table-3.15. 3.9.2 PHYSICO-CHEMICALS CHARACTERISTICS OF SOIL Physical characteristics of soil samples are delineated through specific parameters, viz., pH, bulk density, porosity and water holding capacity. Regular cultivation practices increase the bulk density of soil, thus inducing compaction. This results in reduction in water percolation rate and penetration of root through soils. The bulk density of soils in the region is in the range of 1.24 - 1.40 g/cm3, which is considered as moderate. Soil porosity is a measure of air filled pore spaces and gives information about movement of gases, inherent moisture, and development of root system and strength of soil. Variations in soil porosity and water holding capacity are presented in table-3.15. Organic carbon present in soil influences its physical and chemical properties. Organic carbon in soil samples vary in the range of 0.25-0.51 which is low to medium and phosphorous as from 0.0318 - 0.0361. However. TABLE-3.14 SAMPLING LOCATIONS OF SOIL MONITORING

SR. NO. SAMPLING LOCATION BEARING

W.R.T. PROJECT SITE

APPROXIMATE RADIAL DISTANCE FROM PROJECT

SITE (KM) 1. Project Site (S1) - 0 2. Malanpor (S2) SW 4.0 3. Sayan (S3) W 2.0 4. Alva (S4) N 1.2 5. Valner (S5) ESE 2.2 6. Rayma (S6) S 2.3

e n - V I S I n


S1

S2 S3

S5

S6

FIGURE-3.19 LOCATIONS OF SOIL SAMPLING STATIONS

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-3.15 PHYSICO-CHEMICALS CHARACTERISTICS OF SOIL

SR. NO. PARAMETERS

UN

IT

PRO

JEC

T

SIT

E

(S1)

MA

LA

NPO

R

(S2)

SAY

AN

(S

3)

AL

VA

(S

4)

VA

LN

ER

(S

5)

RA

YM

A

(S6)

1. pH - 7.6 7.5 7.6 7.2 7.4 7.6 2. Calcium mg/kg 257 269 302 314 288 210 3. Electrical Conductivity mg/kg 1.1 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.4 1.1 4. Total Organic Carbon % 0.33 0.25 0.51 0.47 0.39 0.29 5. Phosphorous % 0.319 0.342 0.24 0.361 0.353 0.318 6. Nitrogen % 0.16 0.14 0.11 0.19 0.27 0.24 7. Water Holding Capacity % 27.88 26.80 28.51 29.91 22.31 24.42 8. Porosity % 36.81 39.07 41.10 35.62 41.73 37.11 9. Bulk Density gm/cm3 1.30 1.33 1.40 1.24 1.32 1.28

3.9.3 GEOLOGICAL FEATURES Geologically of the study area is comprises of Quaternary unconsolidated sediments of Holocene age. The regional geology of the study area is given in following table-3.16. The Younger tidal deposits and older tidal deposits are believed to be deposited in marine – continental environment. The flood plain deposits are believed to be of fluvial origin. Project site geology is of food plain deposits and believed to be of fluvial origin. The alluvium is deposited due to flood activity of Narmda and Kim river in the geological past. Figure-3.20 and Table-3.16 show the regional geology of the study area. Following photograph shows the exposure of clay layer beneath the soil overburden. TABLE-3.16 REGIONAL GEOLOGY OF THE STUDY AREA

LITHOLOGY FORMATION GEOLOGICAL AGE

Younger tidal flat Mahuva Formation Holocene

Flood plain Katpur Formation Holocene

Older tidal flat Rann clay Formation Holocene FIGURE-3.20 GEOLOGICAL MAP OF STUDY AREA

Exposure of clay formation in Nala section

e n - V I S I n


3.10 SOCIO - ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT An assessment of socio - economic environment forms an integral part of an EIA study. Therefore, baseline information for the same was collected during the study period. The baseline socio - economic data collected for the study region, has been identified for the four major indicators viz. demography, civic amenities, economy and social culture. The baseline status of the above indicators is compiled in forthcoming sections. 3.10.1 BACKGROUND Hansot is a village in Bharuch district, Gujarat, India, used to be called as "Hansnagri" during the British Era is situated about 15 miles (24 km) south west of Bharuch on the south bank of the River Narmada. The village and the surrounding taluka were acquired by the British in 1775, returned to the local princely rulers in 1783 and finally incorporated into the Broach (Bharuch) District of the Bombay Presidency in 1803. It has modern amenities including electricity, telephone, bus station, primary and higher secondary schools, hospitals, libraries, etc. It has two main communities - Muslims and Hindus. Farming is the main occupation and a large number of people migrate to find jobs. As, Narmada River is near, Hansot is also famous for its Fish in Bharuch District. It is located around 20 km from where the Narmada River merges with the Arabian Sea. It is the largest village between Surat and Ankleshwar. Ankleshwar is located 20 km. west from Hansot (Ankleshwar is Asia's largest industrial estate, and one of 190 industrial complexes in Gujarat's "Golden Corridor." The Golden Corridor, so called because of the money brought by rapid development, is an industrial belt running from Vapi at the southern end of Gujarat to Mahesana, about 270 miles to the North). Surat city is 51 km. South from Hansot. Hansot is also a Taluka consisting of 52 villages. Taluka means Jurisdiction. So, several areas come under Hansot Taluka. 3.10.2 OBJECTIVE OF SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT A Social Impact Assessment (SIA) has been carried out for the proposed Resin and Particle Board Project in the Project Influence Area (PIA) as a part of the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA). Generally speaking, any such project usually benefits the local people in various ways, like i) local availability of the products, ii) job opportunity in the project, iii) scope for improving quality of life, iv) However, the project may also have some adverse social impacts involving land acquisition, resettlement and rehabilitation (R&R) and certain other social implications relating to gender issues, and child labour etc. So an attempt to mitigate those negative impacts needs to be taken by the Project authority. This social study, therefore, was undertaken in order to better understand the current situation and socioeconomic impact of the proposed Project as well. The information collected will serve as baseline data and will also be useful for future environmental monitoring and evaluations. Explicit consideration of social aspects of development has been undertaken with issues such as people’s perception, poverty reduction, and enhancing role of women in development as priorities. 3.10.3 APPROACH METHODOLOGY The approach and methodology of preparing this report included the followings: i. First, a detailed desk review of reports and secondary data related to the socio-economic context of the

Project and surrounding area like, tehsil and district was undertaken for assessing the overall exiting situation.

ii. Reconnaissance visits to the project site were then made and screening of potential social impacts in the project influence area was carried out. During the reconnaissance visit, public consultations were conducted to gather feedback from the local people through using stratified random sampling method on the proposed development like what they think about the proposed project and perceived socio-economic impacts.

iii. Three zones were demarcated- a) Core Zone- within 2 km from the proposed Project site, b) Moderate Zone- beyond 2 km and up to 5 km from the proposed Project site, and c) Low Zone- beyond 5 km to 10 km from the proposed Project site.

iv. It was planned to do zone wise sampling- 5 percent, 2 percent and 1 percent households from core, moderate and low zones respectively, for the SIA survey. But it was found that the proposed project is quite small in size and the impact will be very much localized.

e n - V I S I n


Public in the nearby village areas are aware of this project and its product while some people knew about its environmental impact. And they are aware of the management of the proposed project as its Particle Board unit’s construction phase is going on in this regard they have appointed some workers from nearby villages. As this industry is out of Industrial Area and no other industries are just nearby area. Kosamba is nearby area of the proposed project site and Panoli and Ankleshwar are also nearby industrial area but which are far from 15 km aerial distance. Keeping this situation in view it was decided to only undertake public consultations through Focus Group Discussions (FGDs) with villagers and personal interview with village Sarpanch in the PIA (prospective Project beneficiaries and Project affected people). Social analysis to be undertaken for this is, covering economic profile of the proposed sites, assessment of likely socioeconomic impact and benefits in the project influence areas. 3.10.4 TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES For the purpose of this study a checklist was prepared which is shown in annexure-IX for personal discussion as well as focus group discussion (FGD). This assessment takes into consideration the impact of the proposed resin manufacturing unit on the socio-economic status of the surrounding area and their perception regarding this Project, it also assess the awareness in the community regarding polluting components of the environment. The study was conducted during 04th & 05th June and 13th December, 2013. 3.10.5 STAKEHOLDERS’ IDENTIFICATION Any project usually has some negative impact on the local population. Displacement and/or health/socioeconomic hazard are a traumatic experiences in spite of compensation paid and mitigation measures adopted. Therefore proper identification of stakeholders and appropriate consultation on the implementation plan and participation of affected people in decision making are of utmost importance. This procedure clearly helps the stakeholders in understanding the project objectives and needs; and in communicating their willingness, views, perception and preferences. Planned compensation and mitigation measures are based on findings of this social impact assessment report. Thus it ensures increased participation of people through better acceptance of the project. Stakeholders' consultations were done during social impact assessment at the project locations and nearby villages within 10 km radius area of the proposed project, the result of this presented later in the Peoples’ Perception section. 3.10.6 PROJECT LOCATION The project site is located at the midst of cluster of villages, there are no major industries near the project site, and small glass industries are there within the study area. The nearest city from the Project site is Ankleshwar around 23 km, the nearest town from the Project site is Hansot which is approximately 5 km of Bharuch District, Gujarat. The State has a population of 62,700,003 as per 2013 estimate and 60,383,628 as per census 2011 record with sex ratio of 919; contributing 4.99 percent to India’s total population. Growth rate in the decade 2001-2011 was 13.16 percent and population density was 308 per sq. km. Gujarat is holding 11th rank among Indian states of Human Development Index (HDI) which is higher than national average; as per HDI report 2011. According to the India State Hunger Index (2008) compiled by the International Food Policy Research Institute, Gujarat is having strong economic growth in recent years like some other states like Maharastra, Chattisgarh, etc., but have high level of hunger. Gujarat has the largest business corporations in India. During the British Raj, Gujarati businesses served to play a major role to enrich the economy of Karachi and Mumbai. Major agricultural produce of the state includes cotton, groundnuts (peanuts), dates, sugar cane, milk and milk products. Industrial products include cement and petrol. According to the report on economic freedom by the Cato Institute, Gujarat is the second most free state in India, the first being Tamil Nadu, Reliance Industries operates the oil refinery at Jamnagar, which is the world's largest grass-roots refineries. The world's largest shipbreaking yard is in Gujarat near Bhavnagar at Alang. India’s only Liquid Chemical Port Terminal at Dahej (Bharuch), developed by Gujarat Chemical Port Terminal Co Ltd. Gujarat has two of the three liquefied natural gas (LNG) terminals in the country (Dahej and Hazira). Two more LNG terminals are proposed, at Pipavav and Mundra. For the Twelfth Plan period, Gujarat's development vision will be guided by continued emphasis on human development and inclusive growth, while aiming at sustainable double digit growth which is environmentally sustainable with harmonious and balanced development in agriculture, manufacturing and services.

e n - V I S I n


While Gujarat accounts for 4.99% of India's population, its share in the country's GDP for the year 2011-12 [at constant (2004-05) prices] is 7.61%. Gross State Domestic Product (GSDP) at factor cost at current prices in 2011-12 has been estimated at Rs. 6,11,767 crore registering a growth of 15.3% over the previous year. GSDP at factor cost at constant (2004-05) prices, in 2011-12 has been estimated at Rs.3,98,884 crore showing an increase of 8.5% during the year. The share of primary, secondary and tertiary sectors is 21.8%, 36.1% and 42.1% respectively to the total GSDP in 2011-12. Gujarat has also registered an increase of 13.8% in the Per Capita Income for 2011-12, which has been estimated at Rs. 89,668 as against Rs. 78,802 in 2010-11, at current prices. For the year 2013-14, the State has already presented its budget. The Annual Plan size has been proposed at a level of Rs. 58,500 crore.

Planning Commission has recommended the plan size of Rs. 2,83,623 crore for the 12th Five Year Plan, against the 11th Five Year Plan size of Rs. 1,28,500 crore. GDP growth rate of Gujarat State has improved significantly, in the improvement of the GDP, rapid industrial development took part a lot. The overall performance of the State Economy, as measured though Gross State Domestic Product (GSDP) indicates a high growth trajectory in the last decade (i.e. 2002-2012) with an average annual growth rate of 10.24%. During the Tenth Five Year Plan, the state economy grew at an average annual rate of 10.97%. Gujarat is one of the fastest developing states especially in industrial development in India. During the 11th Plan, despite the effects of the global economic meltdown, Gujarat achieved an average annual rate of 9.51%. The size of the 11th Plan was envisaged at Rs. 1,11,111 crore. However, the final size of the 11th Plan reached Rs. 1,28,500 crore. While making allocations, government gave priority to the Social Sectors, keeping in mind the overall objective of improving the Human Development Index of the State, for which an allocation of Rs. 53,830 crore (i.e. 42% of the Plan) was made in the Eleventh Plan. The state achieved nearly 98% of the 11th Plan outlay. For the year 2013-14, the State has already presented its budget. The Annual Plan size has been proposed at a level of Rs. 58,500 crore which is shown in figure-3.21. FIGURE-3.21 ANNUAL PLAN SIZE OF 2013-2014

* Gujarat is for all where growth is for all (At the annual plan discussion in the planning commission, New Delhi-18th June, 2013) The proposed project site is located in Bharuch district which is pioneer in agriculture during Kharif season mainly cotton, rice, tur, adad (kidney bean), millet, sesame, maize, etc. crops are cultivated. During Rabi season crops like wheat, jowar, gram, mag green gram, sugarcane and vegetables are cultivated. During summer groundnut rice, maize, mag, sugarcane, vegetable are cultivated. Farmers are provided latest technical guidance related with agriculture. The rainfall having been increased during last three years and bore, wells of tribal area having been recharged, irrigation facilities have been increased. Farmers are provided technological information on agriculture and related subject and required schematic information

e n - V I S I n


on agriculture by agriculture festivals, farmers’ workshops. Information given in soil health card and during agriculture festival have been contributing in introducing new crops like tissue culture, sugarcane in the district farmers are provided assistance in seeds, chemical fertilizer, organic manure, wormy compost improved agricultural equipments, sprayer pump, tractor, tremor, gypsum, integrated pest control equipments under various schemes, like national oil seeds developments, pulse development, sugarcane development, maize development and intensive cotton development, cereal crop development scheme, irrigation scheme of SC, ST and small-marginal farmers. 3.10.7 THE PROJECT INFLUENCE AREA The PIA for the concerned industry comprises 43 villages in 10 km radial distance around the proposed Project in Alva Village near Hansot. These are as given in table-3.17 and figure-3.22 is showing map of villages and other infrastructures with village code of census 2001, while Google map of 10 km radius and 5 km radius from the project site showing villages are presented in figure-3.23 and 3.24 respectively. TABLE-3.17 LIST OF VILLAGES IN PIA

SR. NO. NAME VILLAGE

CODE TALUKA HH POPULATION 2001 PROJECTED POPULATION 2013*

1 Ambheta 997 Hansot 233 1195 2006 2 Pardi 998 Hansot 123 544 913 3 Hansot 999 Hansot 2078 10793 18125 4 Utraj 1000 Hansot 262 1317 2211 5 Shera 001 Hansot 257 1302 2186 6 Mathiya 002 Hansot 213 1012 1699 7 Digas 003 Hansot 297 1310 2200 8 Mangrol 004 Hansot 177 743 1247 9 Asta 005 Hansot 290 1296 2176

10 Vansnali 006 Hansot 149 725 1217 11 Katpor 007 Hansot 490 2219 3726 12 Dantrai 008 Hansot 236 1060 1780 13 Badodara 009 Hansot 231 1056 1773 14 Sayan 010 Hansot 365 1684 2828 15 Alva 011 Hansot 154 737 1237 16 Kalam 012 Hansot 152 687 1153 17 Kathodra 013 Hansot 163 886 1487 18 Rohid 014 Hansot 295 1330 2233 19 Valner 015 Hansot 382 1751 2940 20 Chhilodra 017 Hansot 137 645 1083 21 Vaghwan 018 Hansot 196 775 1301 22 Ankalva 021 Hansot 160 719 1207 23 Dhamrad 022 Hansot 319 1394 2341 24 Bolav 023 Hansot 150 712 1195 25 Kudadara 025 Hansot 144 709 1190 26 Ghodadara 026 Hansot 240 1064 1786 27 Parvat 027 Hansot 203 951 1597 28 Aniyadra 028 Hansot 187 844 1417 29 Balota 029 Hansot 311 1471 2470 30 Ilav 032 Hansot 751 3811 6400 31 Sunevkhurd 033 Hansot 395 1773 2977 32 SunevKalla 034 Hansot 406 1779 2987

e n - V I S I n


SR. NO. NAME VILLAGE

CODE TALUKA HH POPULATION 2001 PROJECTED POPULATION 2013*

33 Dungra 036 Hansot 113 551 925 34 Obha 037 Hansot 429 2040 3425 35 Asarma 038 Hansot 239 1078 1810 36 Rayma 016 Hansot 256 1144 1921 37 Malanpor 024 Ankleshwar 133 647 1086 38 Motwan 971 Ankleshwar 143 678 1138 39 Sisodara 994 Ankleshwar 453 2158 3624 40 Adadara 993 Ankleshwar 95 384 644 41 Padi Idris 986 Ankleshwar 266 1233 2070 42 Telva 972 Ankleshwar 110 592 994 43 Sarthan 970 Ankleshwar 250 1270 2132

Total 12,633 60,069 1,00,857 * In the above table, projected population 2013 is based on Bharuch district growth rate of Census 2011 i.e. 13.16%. Total population of the study area was 60,069 out of which male were 31,155 and female were 28,914 in census 2001. In 2011, Bharuch district had population of 15,51,019 out of which, 8,05,707 were male and 7,45,312 were female, decadal growth rate during 2001-2011 is 13.16% in the population compared to population as per 2001 census. With regards to sex ratio in Bharuch, it stood at 925 per 1000 male in 2011 compared to 2001 census figure of 921. The initial provisional data released by the Census of India 2011, shows that density of population in Bharuch district is 238 people per sq. km. Average literacy rate of Bharuch district in 2011 census were 81.51 compared to 74.41 of 2001. Male and female literacy were 87.45 and 75.09 respectively. Hansot, in medieval times it was an important port. Mughals used to transit from Hansot to Egypt, Africa and Arab countries during Mughal period. Hansot was prosperous town during a time due to its famous mansions of the rich people and money-lenders. Because of many businesses were residing here, dacoits were attacking frequently on this town and on the ships passing for trading from here. In 1600 AD, the Mughal emperor Jahangir sent an army under the leadership of Chauhan from Aamer who did well backed up to the sea army of Karanchi Sindhies. One time Mughal Raj Kumari ‘Bibi Turk’ had visited and she liked this town at the most that she decided to live here for the life time after returning from the Hajj pilgrimage to Makkah. Bharuch rises famous not only in India but globally, because of its rapid major industrial growth level. Hansot is also one of the talukas of Bharuch district that also took part in industrial development, this consist many industries major and minor like, Aditya Birla group, Piramal group and many other groups. Hansot is located near to Ankleshwar, Panoli, Kosamba, Kim and Olpad with National Highway no. 8 due to that it has relatively good connectivity with highway and railway line which boost fast industrial development. This development has increased the population widely and brings multi-culture in the area.

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-3.22 VILLAGE MAP OF THE STUDY AREA

* Source: Census 2001

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-3.23 10 KM RADIAL MAP OF GOOGLE EARTH

FIGURE-3.24 05 KM RADIAL MAP OF GOOGLE EARTH

Source: Google earth

e n - V I S I n


Hansot is the Taluka of the Bharuch district, Bharuch district is one of the famous district in the sense of Industrial development globally. Hansot is just adjacent to River Narmada and Arabian Sea, it is also near to Panoli, Ankleshwar, Bharuch, Dahej, Kosamba, Kim and Surat these all places are industrial developed through that it has all kind of facilities available for the development. But Hansot itself is not industrially grown up. It is also famous for its horticulture.

Above Photographs shows construction work of the Particle Board unit, while figure-3.25 represents photographs of project site with reference to its location on layout. FIGURE-3.25 STATUS OF THE PROJECT SITE ON SITE LAYOUT

ENTRANCE TO THE INDUSTRY

e n - V I S I n


3.10.8 SOCIO-ECONOMIC STATUS IN PROJECT INFLUENCE AREAS The findings of the socio-economic assessment and various consultations at community level are presented below: Literacy- As informed by the respondents literacy level in the PIA is not so high as per census 2001 literacy rate of the study area was 40.59% of the total population. Average literacy rate of Bharuch district in 2011 were 81.51% compared to 74.41% of 2001. Economic Profile- It has been observed that cultivation is the major occupation in the Project influence area while other then cultivation occupation, people are getting employment through work related to agriculture, services in public and private sectors, permanent and contract basis jobs in industries and other business work. During the assessment, vulnerable groups are also found who are mainly from schedule castes and schedule tribes, women, children and old age groups. Work force- As per the census 2001, total population of the Hansot Taluka was 68,782 out of that 34,552 were total workers of the population and from that 27,254 were main workers and 7,298 were marginal workers and 34,230 were non workers. 3.10.8.1 BASIC INFRASTRUCTURES/FACILITIES Drinking Water- During the assessment of the study area it is found that there is a problem prevailing related to drinking water facility. As Hansot is close to Ankeshwar, Panoli, Valia, Jhagadia, Bharuch etc with 1.3 million people and highly industrial status of the district with chemicals, petrochemicals, engineering, ports and ship building etc. Because of high concentration of industries as well as due to nearness to coast, the drinking water is one of the major problems in the District. The District Administration had an innovative programme of installing Reverse Osmosis (RO) plants for providing drinking water in all the villages of the Hansot Taluka of Bharuch District. Drainage- People have not complained about drainage system, some villages are having drainage system. Solid Waste- People have no complain about solid waste management system while many villages like Rayma, Valner, Malanpor, etc are having solid waste management system. During the assessment it is observed that no solid waste was dumped at the open places.

Solid Waste Management at Rayma Village

Education Facility- The residents in the area have access to education facilities from their villages at primary levels and for the higher education students have to go outside like Hansot, Kosamba, Kim and other areas. Primary schools are also having mid-day meal facilities.

Mid Day Meal in the Primary Schools

e n - V I S I n


Primary School of Sunevkhurd Village Primary School of Alva Village Health Care Facility- The health facilities of the PIA is low, there are no Primary Health Centre in many villages, in the study area primary health centre is in Hansot and other area very far from that in Ilav village which is too far from one another and as per respondents that PHC of Ilav village is not in working condition. But in any emergency condition 108 services is being available. There are no major health problems prevailing among the villagers. So, the health facility of the area is not so good. Government Schemes and Benefits- It was found that within the study area various programmes being implemented by the Government. Schemes like Vasmo for drinking water, MGNAREGA, Kanya Keravni, Vidhva Sahay, Vidhya Laxmi Bond, etc. Road/Rail Network- Facility for roads in the study area is in good condition, National High-228 (NH-228) and State High-166 (SH-166) while all villages having good condition of road facility. Rail facility is also available, nearest railway station of the study area is Kosamba Railway station and other than that Kim, Hathuran, Panoli, Anklwshwar, etc railway stations are near to the project area. Internal roads in villages National Highway - 288 3.10.8.2 ENVIRONMENT Environment of the study area is healthy. People are also environmentally aware and they know that the production of the nearby industries and they have some idea about the pollution generating capacity. The proposed project has also proposing thick greenbelt periphery of the premises. 3.10.8.3 OTHER ISSUES Child Labour Child labour is exploitative work that is detrimental to the child’s physical and psychosocial health and development. None reported about child labour in these locations and during transacting none of child labour was found in the area. It will be ensured that there will be no child labour deployed for any work under this Project.

e n - V I S I n


Gender Issues It has been assessed that near the project locations, women play an important role in household works while SC, ST group of women and women economically backward families work and they work in industries, farming, construction work and other works. So care needs to be taken to avoid any discrimination against women and to support these ladies to maintain their sources of livelihood. They, if interested, will be given equal opportunity in the project with equal wage. Particular attention shall be paid to the needs of women and women-headed households and shall identify appropriate programs, such as employment opportunities provided by the project, to ensure that women will equally benefit from the project. It is expected that no woman will be advantaged by the proposed industry. 3.10.9 PEOPLES’ PERCEPTION In the process of Social Impact Assessment study focus group discussion and personal interviews were made with local people, it is observed that people perceive this project positively. They expect through this project it will boost the development of the area and it develop the quality of life of the area. People will get employment through this project directly and indirectly like related works to the project activities. During the construction of its particle board unit, company recruits local people which have developed positive perception in the local people about this project. According to the public consultation some of them have presented their views like the company has to recruit local people any how except ineligibility of local people otherwise they will protest against the project. People stated that, they are not against the development and the industries are not being developed on the cost of life and income of the community residing in the area of impact. Consultation 1 Location: Project site Date: 04/06/2013 & 13/12/2013 Consultation team has conducted consultation at project site as construction work for the particle board unit of the same project is going on, team has interacted with project management also and tried to assess their views about giving employing to local people they are positive in that regard. Consultation was also done with workers, according to them they are from nearby villages from Alva and Kata Sayan. Consultation 2 Location: Alva Village Date: 04/06/2013 & 13/12/2013 Respondents from tribal groups, they knew about the project and its production as well, they also knew about hiring of local people for the project. According to them drinking water facility is the major problem for the villagers and there is no medical facility in the local area like not in the same village or nearby villages. It is there but at distance villages. Main occupation of the villagers is cultivation, tribal groups are mainly joint with agriculture labour and related work while from them also young generation is attracted to industrial jobs. Consultation team met with Village Sarpanch & with others, Participants were aware of the project. They thought this project will help the nearby area to get developed and young generation who has to go outside of the villages for employment those people get its benefit that not to get migrated. With the direct employment through this project and indirect employment will generate in the form of other businesses. They were not expecting any negative impact of the project on them. But in the village drinking water availability is main problem. Consultation 3 Location: Alva Village Date: 13/12/2013 According to respondents, this village is having communities of Brahmin, Patel, Harijan and tribes. This village is having drinking water problem and Government schemes are being implemented, education facility from Anganwadi up to 5th standard. The project has promised to the village about preference will be given to local villagers. In nearby villages of the project site, schools are only up to 5th or 7th standard and it has facility of mid-day meal. In Government schools mostly Harijan and Tribal communities’ children get educated while Patel and Brahmin communities’ children get education outside the villages in private schools especially for better education and contemporary customs. Girls’ education is also promoted and in good condition.

e n - V I S I n


Consultation 4 Location: Kanta Sayan Village Date: 04/06/2013 Respondents mentioned that through this project, local socio-economic status will improve and local people will get employment. Drinking water availability is the main problem, no health problem is prevailing. Consultation 5 Location: Rayma Village Date: 05/06/2013 People are aware of the project and to them this project will not recruit local people. No health problem is in village, in village Governmental schemes are implementing like MGNREGA, Kanya Keravni, Vidhvasahay, etc. and solid waste management is actively implemented. Main occupation of the village is agriculture other than that people has to go outside of the area to get employment if through this industry employment generated, people will not get migrated. Education facility is available up to 7th standard for further students have to go Ilav, Kim, Kosamba and Ankleshwar. They said that they would definitely support the project if company recruited eligible local people. According to them Vandh khadi is polluted due to wastewater discharge from Panoli Industrial area. Consultation 6 Location: Valner Date: 04/06/2013 The team carried out consultation with a few young boys and other people in village, they know about the project and they are positive about development. According to it will benefit for the local educated and uneducated people to get employment in local area which will improve socio-economic life style. Consultation 7 Location: Sunev Kalla & Sunev Khurd Villages Date: 05/06/2013 Consultation was carried out at Anganvadi workers, and personal interview was held with other people, according to them there are not any health problem prevailing but as seasonal some month back there were dengue during monsoon which had disturbed many people. Consultation 8 Location: Hansot and Pardi Ambheta Village Date: 04/06/2013 During consultation respondents who know or not know the project, express their views about the impact of project, according to them this project will bring extra opportunity of employment, increase population, increase percentage of development etc. As no major industries are in this location, people have noticed this project very well. During consultation team came to know that tribal community got employed in construction of other unit of the same project which will bring equal development in society. Consultation 9 Location: Juna Obha and Nava Asarma Village Date: 13/12/2013 These villages are away from the project site that is why rate of awareness about the project is low comparing to other villages. Main occupation of the village is cultivation while other services and business are the sources of the income; main crops of the villages are sugarcane, cotton, horticulture crops, etc. Main community in village are Patel, Harijan and tribes, Education facility is for 5th standard and for further study students have to go Ilav village of Kim, Kosamba. Near to these villages major industries are located, community complained about those industries that these are polluting industries especially as air pollution and wastewater discharge. Photographs taken during site visit for the study are presented as figure-3.26.

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-3.26 PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE STUDY AREA

Bus Stand of Sunevkhurd Village Bus Stand of Rayma Village

AnganWadi of Sunevkalla Taluka Panchayat of Hansot 3.10.10 CONCLUSIONS All the respondents across all socioeconomic groups, age, gender and locations felt that the concerned industry will be beneficial for them and it will improve their quality of life by increasing their income and also create social change. People’s willingness and ability to be employed in the production activities need to be given importance. The actions that the residents have suggested need to be taken up for taking people in confidence. The Company needs to undertake some Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR). 3.11 PRESENT LAND USE PATTERN 3.11.1 INTRODUCTION Land Use (LU) refers to man’s activities and various uses, which are carried on land. Land Cover (LC) refers to natural vegetation, water bodies, rock / soil, artificial cover and others resulting due to land transformation. Although land use is generally inferred based on the cover, yet both the terms land use and land cover are closely related and interchangeable. Information on the rate and kind of change in the use of land resources is essential to the proper planning, management and regulation of the use of such resources. Knowledge about the existing land use and trends of change is essential if the nation is to tackle the problems associated with the haphazard and uncontrolled growth. A systematic framework is needed for updating the land use and land cover maps that will be timely, relatively inexpensive and appropriate for different needs at both national and state levels. The rapidly developing technology of remote sensing offers an efficient and timely approach to the mapping and collection of basic land use and land cover data over large area. The satellite imageries are potentially more amenable to digital processing because the remote sensor output can be obtained in digital format. Land use data are needed in the analysis of environmental processes and problems that must be understood if living conditions and standards are to be improved from or maintained at current levels.

e n - V I S I n


It is required to carry out the land use / land cover study for the project study area (10 km radius) to obtain the necessary environmental clearances from statutory authorities. The objective of the study is to carryout land use / land cover study for the proposed project. The LU / LC study is carried out using the Satellite Imageries (IRS RS2 LISS IV FX Rabi and Khariff) in addition to Survey of India toposheets. Appropriate guidelines are followed while preparing the Lu / Lu map for the project study area. 3.11.2 OBJECTIVE The objective of the assignment is to carry out Land use / Land cover study for proposed M/s. Krifor Industries Private Limited at survey no. 35/1, 35/2 & 36, Village Alva, Tehsil Hansot, District Bharuch, Gujarat. 3.11.3 SCOPE OF THE WORK The LU/LC study shall be carried out for a study area of 10 km radius taking site as centre using the satellite imageries (IRS RS2 LISS IV FX) for Rabi season.

Procurement of latest satellite imagery (IRS RS2 LISS IV FX based on availability) Rabi or Khariff seasons.

Satellite imagery processing and interpretation of land use as per land use classification covering 10 km radius of proposed M/s. Krifor Industries Private Limited at survey no. 35/1, 35/2 & 36, Alva Village, Hansot Tehsil, Bharuch District; Gujarat. The project site covers an extent of 314 Sq. kilometers.

Calculation of land use breakup w. r. t. each land use category covering 10 km of proposed M/s. Krifor Industries Private Limited at survey no.35/1, 35/2 & 36, Village Alva, Tehsil Hansot, District Bharuch, Gujarat.

Preparation and submission of draft and final reports, satellite imageries and land use maps. 3.11.4 METHODOLOGY The land use / land cover map is prepared by adopting the interpretation techniques of the image in conjunction with collateral data such as Survey of India topographical maps and census records. Image classification can be done by using visual interpretation techniques and digital classification using any of the image processing software. For the present study, ERDAS 9.1 version software is used for preprocessing, rectification, enhancements and classifying the satellite data for preparation of land use land cover map for assessing and monitoring the temporal changes in land use land cover and land developmental activities. The imagery is interpreted and ground checked for corrections. The final map is prepared after field check. Flow chart showing the methodology adopted is given in the different land use / land cover categories in the study area has been carried out based on the NRSC land use / land cover classification system. For analysis and interpretation, and preparation of Lu / Lc map, two types of data are needed: BASIC DATA INCLUDES: Fused data of LISS IV FX Toposheets on 1:50,000 Local knowledge Area map on any scale to transfer details Reports and other literature of the study area GROUND DATA: Ground data is very much essential to verify and to increase the accuracy of the interpreted classes and also to minimize the field work.

e n - V I S I n


3.11.5 AREA UNDER DIFFERENT LANDUSE The land use classification within a distance of 10 km radius from the project location and the areas falling under the respective classifications are given as table-3.17 and Land use pattern of the study area as per satellite imagery is given as figure-3.27 & Satellite Imagery of the study area is shown as figure-3.28. TABLE-3.18 AREA STATISTICS OF LANDUSE/LAND COVER MAP

SR. NO. LANDUSE AREA (SQ. KM) %

1. BUILT- UP LAND A. Settlements

10.676

3.4

2. WATERBODIES A. Tank/ River/canal etc.

7.536

2.4

3. CROP LAND A. Single crop

204.414

65.1

4. WASTELANDS A. Land with scrub B. Land without scrub C. Salt pans D. Creek E. Mud plot F. Aquaculture G. Back water

14.13 9.734 11.932 10.048 13.502 5.024 27.318

4.5 3.1 3.8 3.2 4.3 1.6 8.7

TOTAL 314 100

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-3.27 LAND USE / LAND COVER MAP OF 10 KM RADIUS FROM STUDY AREA

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-3.28 LAYOUT OF RAW SATELLITE IMAGERY (10 KM RADIUS)

e n - V I S I n


3.12 DESCRIPTION OF THE BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT 3.12.1 INTRODUCTION Biodiversity is often considered synonymous with species richness of the area. Identifying, measuring, and monitoring biodiversity is a complex exercise. The Biodiversity assessment generally concern with, conducting biodiversity inventories; inventories for assessing existing biodiversity or stock taking. This provides the information on the biodiversity richness of the area under consideration. The selection of indicators differs for biodiversity monitoring output required. Various criteria have been developed for selection of indicators, taking into account biological as well as logistical aspects (Noss, 1990, UNEP, 1992). 3.12.2 BIODIVERSITY OF TERRESTRIAL ENVIRONMENT Conference of parties to the Convention on Biological diversity (CBD) held at Curitiba, Brazil on March 20th-31st, 2006 suggested biodiversity to be considered in impact assessment by providing voluntary guidelines on biodiversity inclusive Environmental Impact Assessment. CBD provides a strong international platform for applying impact assessment techniques to biodiversity conservation. It specifically calls for impact assessment measures to ensure that biodiversity is addressed in projects, plan and policy decision (Article14). An underlying justification for the application of impact assessment is also given in Article -8 which is for promoting the protection of ecosystems, natural habitats, promoting environmentally sound and sustainable development in areas next to the protected areas. 3.12.3 BIOLOGICAL DIVERSITY The variety and variability of organisms and ecosystems is referred to as biological diversity or Bio diversity. Biodiversity is a term which has gained enormous importance in the past few years. Technically, it is a contraction of 'biological diversity'. For the purpose of the CBD (Article 2. Use of Terms), 'Biological Diversity' is "the variability among living organisms from all sources including, inter alia, terrestrial, marine and other aquatic ecosystems and the ecological complexes of which they are part; this includes diversity within species, between species and of ecosystems". In practice, 'biodiversity' is most often used as a collective noun synonymous with nature or 'Life on Earth' (WCMC Biodiversity Series No 5, 1996). The biodiversity, we see today is the result of billions of years of evolution, shaped by natural processes. The vast array of interactions among the various components of biodiversity makes the planet habitable for all species, including humans. There is a growing recognition that, biological diversity is a global asset of tremendous value to present and future generations. At the same time, the threat to species and ecosystems has never been as great as it is today. Species extinction caused by human activities continues at an alarming rate. Protecting biodiversity is for our self-interest and also for the future generation. 3.12.4 ECOLOGICAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT Ecological impact assessment (EcIA) is used to predict and evaluate the impacts of development activities on ecosystems and their components, thereby providing the information needed to ensure that ecological issues are given full and proper consideration in development planning. Environmental impact assessment (EIA) has emerged as a key to sustainable development by integrating social, economic and environmental issues in many countries. EcIA has a major part to play as a component of EIA but also has other potential applications in environmental planning and management. Ecological Impact Assessment provides a comprehensive review of the EcIA process and summarizes the ecological theories and tools that can be used to understand, explain and evaluate the ecological consequences of development proposals. Environmental impact assessments have become an integral part of development projects in India ever since 1994, to formulate policies and guidelines for environmentally sound economic development. Proper assessment of biological environment and compilation of its taxonomical data is essential for the impact prediction. Consistent and regularly updated data on regional and local taxonomy and floristic and faunal diversity of the areas are almost non-existent in country as diverse as India. Instant information on biodiversity profiles of the area, where the proposed project is setting up, is an essential part of the baseline studies of EIA. In such a situation, good primary baseline biodiversity survey is a pre-requisite for the collection of reliable data. The professional ethic of the EIA practitioners should be their will and skill to conduct scientific field surveys. These contributions towards biodiversity surveys may sometimes recognized as the actual value additions in terms of new records or a new data base but are more often recognized in the validation and updating of the existing information base.

e n - V I S I n


3.12.5 PERIOD OF THE STUDY AND STUDY AREA The baseline study for the evaluation of the floral and faunal biodiversity of the terrestrial environment of the study area have been carried out within 10 km radius of the proposed project of M/s. Krifor industries Pvt. Ltd. at Alva Village Tal. Hansot, Dist. Bharuch, Gujarat. During 27th - 28th November, 2013. 3.12.6 METHODOLOGY The primary objective of survey was to describe the floristic and faunal communities within the study area. Extrapolation and prediction techniques were used to limit the number of sites to be assessed. The knowledge of species habitats requirement, soil type, terrain, vegetation etc. were used to predict species occurrence. This Extrapolation assessment Programme conducts preliminary for the assessment of biological value of poorly known area. The biological value of an area can be characterized by the species richness, degree of spices endemism, uniqueness of the ecosystem and magnitude of threats of extinction. This Rapid biodiversity assessment were undertaken by identifying potentially rich sites from satellite imaginary (Google Earth) and conducting the field survey in the potential habitats. GPS was utilized for locating field sample plots as well as gathering positional attributes of sighted flora and faunal species. For Floral survey, sample plots have been randomly distributed across the suitable stratum within 10 km radius of project site. Tree species were sampled using 10mx10m or 5mx5m plots depending upon the stratum variability on the ground and tree species occurrence. For sampling shrub species two plots of size of 5 meter x 5 meter at two opposite corner of tree plots or the same 5meter X 5meter plot of tree plots were taken. For herbaceous plant five plots of 1meter x 1 meter at four corners of tree plots and one at center The methodology adopted for faunal survey involve; faunal habitat assessment, random intensive survey, opportunistic observations, diurnal bird observation, active search for reptiles, active search for scats and foot prints and review of previous studies. The aim was to set baselines in order to monitor and identify trends after the commencement of production system activity. Emphasis has been placed on presence of rare, endemic, migratory and threatened species, if any present in the study area. Desktop literature review was conducted to identify the representative spectrum of threatened species, population and ecological communities as listed by IUCN, ZSI, BSI and in Indian wild Life Protection act, 1972. The status of individual species was assessed using the revised IUCN category system. 3.12.7 BIODIVERSITY OF TERRESTRIAL ENVIRONMENT 3.12.7.1 HABITATS DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT SITE AND ITS IMMEDIATE

SURROUNDINGS

Project site of the proposed project (21 032’ 25`.2’, 72 049’09.9’) is located within the plot for owned by M/s. Krifor industries Pvt. Ltd. at Alva Village, Tal. Hansot, Dist. Bharuch Gujarat. The other units of M/s. Krifor industries Pvt. Ltd. located within the same premises are in construction phase. Nearest village; Alva is located about 1.5 km from the project site. Project site is surrounded by sugar cane fields, there is no eco-sensitive area likes forest patches, large water bodies that attract migratory and other residential water fowls within the close proximity of the project site. Google image showing area of 1 km radius and the immediate surroundings of the project site is presented in figure-3.29 and figure-3.30 respectively.

e n - V I S I n


Immediate surrounding land use at the out skirt of project site is dominated by agriculture fields of Sugarcane and cotton. The vegetative cover in this area is very limited restricted to few road side plantations. Farmland plantation is almost not possible in this region as the major crops in this area are sugarcane.

FIGURE-3.29 GOOGLE IMAGINARY SNAP SHOT SHOWING 1KM RADIUS OF THE

PROJECT SITE

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-3.30 GOOGLE IMAGINARY SNAP SHOT SHOWING THE IMMEDIATE SURROUNDINGS OF THE PROJECT SITE

3.12.7.2 HABITATS DESCRIPTION OF THE AREA (10 KM) The proposed site is located in Alva village, in Hansot Taluka of Bharuch district in Gujarat state. The dominant land use pattern of this region isSugar cane fields. Sugar cane crop stands in it fields more than a year hence the rotation of crops and other alternative crops is generally not possible. Natural habitats has confined to very limited area.

Small water bodies like “Gram Talav” were observed in most of villagesin the study area. Large inland water bodies near Sisodara and Parvat village are utilizing for aquaculture activities.

e n - V I S I n


Trees in the study area are restricted either as homestead or road side plantation. Farm land plantation is obviously not practical in this region as the major crop in this region is Sugar cane and it is yearlong crop and the fields are subjected to control burning pre harvesting period and post harvesting period. The trees and other vegetation near the sugar cane fields are subjected to this heat stress during this burning operation hence the vegetative cover surrounding these fields are dominated mainly by annuals which may sprout during monsoon perish after before the onset of summer. In India, sugar cane is harvested manually which is mostly as unburnt full green cane. However, in south Gujarat, irrespective of measures taken by the factories, burning of cane is a routine practice, especially near the end of crushing season. Pre-harvest burning of sugarcane fields is done primarily to get rid of the dried leaves. Post harvesting burning is also practiced generally in south Gujarat region, as when the cane is harvested, the farmer is left with a mass of leaves known as 'sugar cane trash'. The leaves are full of lignin and silica, so don't decompose easily and are no good as food for cattle even. Traditionally, farmers are burning these leaves after harvesting is over. Farmers generally believe that, burning of these infested trashes immediately after harvesting may reduce incidence infestationon Ratoon crop. More over due to non-availability of sufficient labourers for hand weeding, chemical weed control is now becoming very popular in the sugar cane fields in this region, this again indirectly resulted in the destruction of herbaceous layer near sugar cane fields. In the study area many water logged wet land were also observed especially at Rohid village (21032’11.7, 72051’ 45.7”) Kalam village (21038’25.0, 72051’ 33.7”) and at Sayan Village (21032’35.7, 72047’ 37.6”). Most of these water logged region was covered with Ipomea aquatic and hydrophytes, as well as Hygrophila auriculata and Eichhornia crassipes but with many waterfowls were sighted in these habitat dominated by Purple Swamphen, Common Moorhen, Watercock, Small egrett Red-wattled Lapwing,Indian Pond-Heron( Ardeola grayii)

Purple Swamphen Indian Pond-Heron

e n - V I S I n


3.12.7.3 FLORAL DIVERSITY OF THE STUDY AREA The objective this floral inventory of the study area is to provide necessary information on floristic structure in the study area for formulating effective management and conservation measures. The climatic, edaphic and biotic variations with their complex interrelationship and composition of species, which are adapted to these variations, have resulted in different vegetation cover, characteristic of each region. The following account of floral inventory has been, based on the field survey conducted for a short duration in the November, 2013, is not very comprehensive data and is aimed only to give a general pattern of vegetation of this region during the study period as a baseline data in absence of available secondary data. Listing of the endangered, threatened and endemic species of flora in a locality and drawing the attention to the occurrence of such species, would aid in creating awareness amongst the local people as a whole to protect such species from extinction, and to take necessary measures for their conservation. These type of floristic study is an inventory for such purpose and hence a necessity. The tree species, herbs, shrubs, climbers and major crops, were documented during this base line study. The list of floral species documented in the study area is enlisted in table-3.18 3.12.7.3.1 TREES The dominant trees in the study area were generally planted either e as homestead plantation or along the road side plantation. Farmland plantation is very limited .Otherwise natural tree cover is very less in this part of Bharuch District. Dominant tree species in the farmland was dominated Prosopis cineraria (Khyigdo), Azadirachta indica (Limbado) Ailanthus excelsa (Aurdso). Homestead plantation was dominated by Pithecellobium dulce (Gorasmli), Tamarindus indica (Amali), Mangifera indica (Keri), Moringa oleifera (Sargavo),Ficus benghalensis (Vad), and Salvadora oleoides (Piludi). Road side Plantations were dominated by Peltophorum pterocarpum (Sonmukhi), Tamarindus indica (Amali), Delonix regia (Gaulmor), Casuarina equisetifolia (Sharu), Cordia gharaf (Gundi), Azadirachta indica (Limbado), Acacia leucophloea (Hermobaval), Acacia nilotica (Baval), Albizia lebbeck (Siris), Leucaenaleucocephala (Pardesi Baval), Prosopis cineraria (Khyigdo), Ficus benghalensis (Piplo), Pongamiapinnata (Karanj), Salvadora oleoides (Piludi), Ailanthus excels (Aurdso), and Tectona grandis (Sag). The list of tree species is enlisted in the table-3.19. 37 species of trees belong to 22 families are enumerated from the study area. TABLE-3.19 TREES IN THE STUDY AREA

SR. NO. FAMILY & SCIENTIFIC NAME VERNACULAR NAME 1 Family: Anacardiaceae 1/1 Mangifera indica L. Kari 2 Family: Annonaceae 2/1 Polylathia longifolia (Conn.) Thw. Asopalav 3 Family:Apocynaceae 3/1 PLUMERIARUBRA L. Champo 4 Family: Arecaceae 4/1 Cocos nucifera L. Narial 5 Family: Caesalpiniaceae 5/1 Delonix regia (Boj.) Raf. Gaulmor 6/2 Cassia fistula L. Garmalo 7/3 Cassiasiamea Lam. Kasid 8/4 Peltophorum pterocarpum (DC.) Backer ex Heyne Sonmukhi, 9/5 Tamarindus indica L. Amali 6 Family: Caricaceae 10/1 Carica papaya L. Papaya 7 Family: Casuarinaceae 11/1 Casuarina equisetifolia L. Sharu 8 Family: Combretaceae 12/1 Terminalia catappa L. Badam 13/2 Anogeissus latifolia ( Roxb) Dhavdo 9 Ehretiaceae 14/1 Cordia gharaf (Forsk.) E. & A. Gundi 10 Family: Malvaceae 15/1 Thespesia populnea (L.) Sol.ex Corr. Paras piplo

e n - V I S I n


SR. NO. FAMILY & SCIENTIFIC NAME VERNACULAR NAME 11 Family: Meliaceae 16/1 Azadirachta indica A.Juss Limbado 12 Family: Mimosaceae 17/1 Acacia leucophloea (Roxb) Willd. Hermobaval 18/2 Acacia nilotica (L.) Del.subsp.indica (Bth.) Brenan Baval 19/3 Albizia lebbeck (L.) Bth. Siris 20/4 Leucaenaleucocephala (Lam.) De Pardesi Baval 21/5 Pithecellobium dulce (Roxb.) Bth. Gorasmli 22/6 Prosopis cineraria (L.) Druce Khyigdo 13 Family:Moraceae 23/1 Ficus benghalensis L. Vad 24/2 Ficus religiosa L. Piplo 25/3 Ficus racemosaL Umro 14 Family:Moringaceae 26/1 Moringa oleifera Lam Sargavo 15 Family:Myrtaceae 27/1 Eucalyptus sp. Nilgari 28/2 Syzygium cumini (L.) Skeels. Jambu 16 PAPILIONACEAE 29/1 Pongamiapinnata (L.) Pierre Karanj 17 Family:Poaceae 30/1 Dendrocalamus strictus (Roxb) Bans 18 Family:Salvadoraceae 31/1 Salvadora oleoides Decne Piludi 32/2 Salvadora persica L Piludi 19 Family:Sapotaceae 33/1 Manilkara hexandra (Roxb.) Dub. Rayan 34/2 Manilkara zapota (L.) Chikoo 20 Family:Simaroubaceae 35/1 Ailanthus excelsa Roxb. Aurdso 21 Family:Rhamnaceae 36/1 Zizyphus glabrata Heyne ex Roth. Bor 22 Family:Verbenaceae 37/1 Tectona grandis L.f. Sag

3.12.7.3.2 SHRUBS Shrubs observed during the present survey are given in the table-3.20 shrub species belong to 17 families are enumerated from the study area. The dominant shrub community in this area was represented by, Calotropis procera, C. gigantea (Akado), Prosopis juliflora (Gando baval), Ipomoea fistulosa (Nasarmo), Lawsonia inermis (Mendhi), and Lantana camara (Ganthai). TABLE-3.20 LIST OF THE SHRUBS IN THE STUDY AREA

SR. NO. FAMILY & SCIENTIFIC NAME VERNACULAR NAME 1 Family :Apocynaceae 1/1 Nerium indicum Lalkaren 2/2 Thevetia peruviana Merr. Pili karan 2 Family: Asclepiadaceae 3/1 Calotropis gigantea (L.) R. Br Akado 4/2 Calotropis procera (Ait.) R.Br Akado 3 Family: Caesalpiniaceae 5/1 Cassia auriculata L Aval 4 Family: Capparaceae 6/1 Capparis decidua ( forsk.)Edgew Kerdo 7/2 Capparis sepiaria L. Kanthar 5 Family: Convolvulaceae

e n - V I S I n


SR. NO. FAMILY & SCIENTIFIC NAME VERNACULAR NAME 8/1 Ipomoea fistulosa Mart.ex Choisy Nasarmo 6 Family: Euphorbiaceae 9/1 Euphorbia neriifolia L. Thor 10/2 Jatropha curcas L. Ratanjot 7 Family: Lythraceae 11/1 Lawsonia inermis L. Mendhi 8 Family: Malvaceae 12/1 Abelomoschus manihot (L.) Medic. Jagali bhindi 13/2 Abelomoschus esculentus (L.) Bhindi 14/3 Gossypium herbaceum L. acerifolium Kapas 15/4 Hibiscus rosa –sinensis Jasund 9 Family:Moraceae 16/1 Ficus hispida L Dhedh Umardo, Jankli Umardo 10 Family: Musaceae 17/1 Musa paradisiaca L. Kela 11 Family: Mimosaceae 18/1 Prosopis juliflora DC Gando baval 12 Family:Nyctaginaceae 19/1 Bougainvillea spectabilis Willd. Bougainvel 13 Family: Papilionaceae 20/1 Sesbania sesban (L.) Merr. Shevari 14 Family:Poaceae 21/1 Saccharum officinarum L Sherdi 15 Family: Rhamnaceae 22/1 Zizyphus nummularia (Burm.f.) W. Chanibor 16 Family: Solanaceae 23/1 Datura metel L Daturo 24/2 Solanum incanum L Ubhi ringan 25/3 Solanum indicum 17 Family : Verbenaceae 26/1 Clerodendrum inerme (L.) Gaertn. Madhi 27/2 Lantana camara L.var.aculcata (L.)Mold. Ganthai

3.12.7.3.3 HERBS As the study was conducted post monsoon season, more over the excess water overflow from the sugar cane fields, remarkably rich herbaceous ground cover was observed in this region. The herbs observed in study area (in sampling plots in different habitats), during the survey period have been enlisted in the table-3.21. 59 species of herbs belongs to 27 families were documented from the sampling plots laid in different habitats. TABLE-3.21 LIST OF HERBACEOUS SPECIES OBSERVED IN THE AREA

S. NO FAMILY & SCIENTIFIC NAME VERNACULAR NAME 1 Family Acanthaceae 1/1 Hygrophila auriculata (Schum.) Kanatashelio,Akaro 2 Family Amaranthaceae 2/1 Aerva javanica (Burm.f.)Juss. Bur,Gorakhganjo 3 Family: Asteraceae 3/1 Acanthospermum sp. 4/2 Blumea mollis Bhutaco 5/3 Blumea eriantha DC. Kalhar 6/4 Echinops echinatus Roxb Shulio 7/5 Tridax procumbens L Pardesi Bhangro

e n - V I S I n


S. NO FAMILY & SCIENTIFIC NAME VERNACULAR NAME 8/6 Parthenium hysterophorus L -- 9/7 Xanthium strumarium L. Gokhru 4 Family: Balsiminaceae 10/1 Impatiens balsamina L. var. coccinea 5 Family: Boraginaceae 11/1 Trichodesma indicum R. Br. Undha Fuli 6 Family: Commelinaceae 12/1 Commelina benghalensis L 13/2 C.forskalaei Vahl., Enum 7 Family: Convolvulaceae 14/1 Cressa cretica L. Palio, Rudanti 15/2 Convolvulus arvensis L. 16/3 Evolvulus alsinoides (L.) 8 Family: Cyperaceae 17/1 Cyperus sps. -- 18/2 Fimbristylis dichotoma Vahl. -- 19/3 Fimbristylis sps. -- 9 Family: Euphorbiaceae 20/1 Euphorbia hirta L. -- 10 Family: Gentianaceae 21/1 Nymphoides indicum (Roxb.) Kumudini 11 Family: Hydrocharitaceae 22/1 Hydrilla verticillata (L.f.) Royle 12 Family: Lamiaceae 23/1 Leucas aspera Wild Kubi 24/2 Ocimum basilicum L 25/3 Ociumum sanctum L tulsi 13 Family: Liliaceae 26/1 Aloe barbadensis Mill. Kunvarpato 14 Family: Malvaceae 27/1 Abutilon indicum L. Khapat,Dabaliar 28/2 Sida sp. -- 29/3 Pavonia sp. 15 Family : Myrtyniaceae 30/1 Martynia annua L. Vinchhudo 16 Family: Nyctaginaceae 31/1 Boerhavia diffusa L. Satodi 17 Family: Nymphaeaceae 32/1 Nymphaea pubescens Wild Kamal 18 Family: Papilionaceae 33/1 Alysicarpus vaginalis 34/2 Cajanus cajan (L) Tuvar 35/3 Cortalaria prostate 36/4 Cortalaria juncea Shun 37/5 Indigofera cardifoila Heyne ex Roth 38/6 Indigofera oblongifolia Forks. -- 39/7 Indigofera sp. 40/8 Tehrosia purpurea L. Sarpankho 41/9 Tephrosia sps. -- 42/10 Medicago sativa L Lachko 43/11 Cacia tora Kuvandio 19 Family: Poaceae 44/1 Aleuropus lagopoides (L) --

e n - V I S I n


S. NO FAMILY & SCIENTIFIC NAME VERNACULAR NAME 45/2 Cynodon barberi Rang. -- 46/3 Cynodon dactylon (L.) -- 47/4 Phragmites kara (Retz.) -- 48/5 Sorghum bicolor (L.) Jowar 20 Family: Poligonaceae 49/1 Poligonum sp. 21 Family: Pontederiaceae 50/1 Eichhornia crassipes (Mart.) Kanphutti 22 Family: Solanaceae 51/1 Solanum nigrum L. Piludi 52/2 Solanum surattense Brum. Bhoringni 23 Family: Scrophulariaceae 53/1 Bacopa monnieri L. 24 Family: Tiliaceae 54/1 Corchorus depressus Stocks Bhuphali 55/2 Corchorus aestunans L. Chunch 25 Family: Trapaceae 56/1 Trapa natans L. bispinosa (Roxb.) 26 Family: Typhaceae 57/1 Typha angustata Bory & Chaub Ramban,Ghabajariu 27 Family: Zygophyllaceae 58/1 Fagonia cretica L. -- 59/2 Tribulus terrestris L. Mithu Gokhru

3.12.7.3.4 CLIMBERS AND TWINERS Climbers/ twiners in the study area dominated by, Ipomoea obscura , Ipomea aquatica (Nali ni Bhaji), Coccinia grandis (Ghiloda),), and Abrus precatorius (Chanothai). The major climbers and twiners observed in the study area in the sampling plots are given in the table-3.22. 18 species of climbers/ twiners belongs to 7 families are recorded from the area TABLE-3.22 LIST OF CLIMBERS OBSERVED IN THE AREA

S. NO. FAMILY & SCIENTIFIC NAME VERNACULAR NAME 1 Family: Asclepiadaceae 1/1 Pentatropis spiralis (Forsk.) Decne Shingroti 2 Family: Convolvulaceae 2/1 Ipomea cairica (L.) -- 3/2 Ipomoea obscura L. -- 4/3 Ipomea pulchella Roth -- 5/4 Ipomea aquatica Forsk. Nadinivel 6/5 Ipomoea pes-caprae Dariani vel/Maryad vel 3 Family: Caesalpiniaceae 7/1 Caesalpinia crista L. Kachka 4 Family: Cucurbitaceae 8/1 Coccinia grandis Ghiloda 9/2 Corallocarpus epigeus (Arn.0 Cl.in HK. 10/3 Luffa cylindrica (L.) M.J.Roem Galku 11/4 L. acutangula (L) Jungli turia 5 Family: Cuscutaceae 12/1 Cuscuta reflexa Roxb. Amarvel 6 Family: Menispermaceae 13/1 Cocculus hirsutus (L.) Diels Vevdi

e n - V I S I n


S. NO. FAMILY & SCIENTIFIC NAME VERNACULAR NAME 14/2 Tinospora cordifolia (Willd.) Miers Galo 7 Family: Papilionaceae 15/1 Mucuna prurita Hk.f. Kavach, Koyli 16/2 Abrus precatorius L. Chanothi 17/3 Clitoria ternatea L. Gokaran 18/4 Clitoria biflora Dalz.

3.12.7.3.5 CULTIVATED PLANTS IN THE STUDY AREA The major agriculture activity of this region is Sugar cane (Saccharum officinarum) cultivation. Cotton (Gossypium herbaceum) is alsopracticed as a major at few villages like Rohid, Alva, and Valner. Bhindi (Abelomoschus esculentus) is cultivated as major vegetable crop of this area at Asarma, Nava Obha etc, The crop occupying the highest percentage of the sown area of this region is taken as the major crop and all other possible alternative crops which are sown in this region either as substitutes of the base crop in the same season or as the crops which fit in the rotation in the subsequent season, are considered as minor crop. Major Crops Major crops in the study area are Sugar cane (Saccharum officinarum ) and cotton (Gossypium herbaceum). Minor crops The minor crops of this region are Bajra (Pennisetum typhoides), and Jowar (Sorghum bicolar) Vegetable The vegetables grown in the study area are, Bhindi (Abelomoschus esculentus) Horticulture Practices and fruit grown Horticulture activity is not much developed in this region of Bharuch district 3.12.7.3.6 RARE AND ENDANGERED FLORA IN THE STUDY AREA The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity. Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any threat category, by RED data book of Indian Plants. (Nayar and Sastry,1990) and Red list of threatened Vascular plants (IUCN,2010, BSI, 2003) 3.12.7.3.7 ENDEMIC PLANTS OF THE STUDY AREA De Candolle (1855) first used the concept of “Endemic”, which is defined as an area of a taxonomic unit, especially a species which has a restricted distribution or habitat, isolated from its surrounding region through geographical, ecological or temporal barriers. Among recorded plant species, during the survey period, none can be assigned the status of endemic plant of this region. 3.12.7.3.8 STATUS OF FOREST AND THEIR CATEGORY IN THE STUDY AREA No natural forest land was observed in the study area except few scattered scrub cover in the barren lands and area demarcated for grazing. 3.12.7.4 FAUNAL BIODIVERSITY IN THE STUDY AREA For the documentation of the faunal biodiversity of the study area with respect to birds, reptiles, amphibians, and butterfly species, a baseline survey had been conducted in November, 2013

e n - V I S I n


3.12.7.4.1 BIRDS OF THE STUDY AREA The most commonly spotted bird species of this area were; Cattle Egret, Little Egret, Indian Roller and White-breasted Water hen, Systematic account of the birds in the study area with the status of occurrence is given in the table-3.23. TABLE-3.23 SYSTEMATIC LIST OF BIRDS IN THE STUDY AREA WITH ITS RESIDENTIAL

STATUS

OLD COMMON NAME NEW COMMON NAME SCIENTIFIC NAME R-S

I ORDER: APODIFORMES Family: Apodidae (swifts) Common Swift Common Swift Apus apus R II ORDER: FALCONIFORMES Family: Accipitridae (vulture, Sparrow hawk, Eagle, Harrier, Kite and Vulture) Shikra Shikra Accipiter badius R Black-winged Kite Black-winged Kite Elanus caeruleus R III. ORDER: : CICONIIFORMES Family: Ardeidae (heron, Egret, Bittern) Pond Heron Indian Pond-Heron Ardeola grayii R Purple Heron Purple Heron Ardea purpurea RW Cattle Egret Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis R

Median or Smaller Egret Intermediate Egret Mesophoyx intermedia Egretta intermedia R

Little Egret Little Egret Egretta garzetta R Family: Charadriidae (Plover, Stilt, Oystercatcher, Lapwing, Avocet ) Black-winged Stilt Black-winged Stilt Himantopus himantopus R Red-wattled Lapwing Red-wattled Lapwing Vanellus indicus R Family: Pteroclidae (Sandgrouse) Indian Sandgrouse Chestnut-bellied sandgrouse Pterocles exustus R Family: Threskiornithidae (Spoonbill and Ibis) Black Ibis Red-naped Ibis Pseudibis papillosa R White Ibis Black-headed Ibis Threskiornis melanocephalus R IV ORDER: COLUMBIFORMES Family: Columbidae (Pigeon, Dove) Blue Rock Pigeon Rock Pigeon Columba livia R Ring Dove Eurasian Collared-Dove Streptopelia decaocto R Rufous Turtle Dove Oriental Turtle-Dove Streptopelia orientalis R V : ORDER: CORACIFORMES Family: Dacelonidae (King fishers) White breasted Kingfisher White-throated Kingfisher Halcyon smyrnensis R Family: Coraciidae (Roller) BlueJay or Roller Indian Roller Coracias benghalensis R Family: Meropidae (Bee Eater) Chestnut-headed Bee-eater Chestnut-headed Bee-eater Merops leschenaulti R VI. ORDER: CUCULIFORMES Family: Centropodidae (Cocucal) Crow-Pheasant or Coucal Greater Coucal Centropus sinensis R Family: Cuculidae (Cuckoo, Koel) Koel Asian Koel Eudynamys scolopacea R Indian Drongo Cuckoo Drongo Cuckoo Surniculus lugubris R VII. ORDER: GALLIFORMES Family: Phasianidae (Peafowl , Partridge, Quail, francolin, spur fowl, jungle fowl, Monal) Common Peafowl Indian Peafowl Pavo cristatus R Family: Rallidae ( Waterhen, coot, crake water cock, Moorhen, Rail,) White-breasted Water hen White-breasted Water hen Amaurornis phoenicurus R

e n - V I S I n


OLD COMMON NAME NEW COMMON NAME SCIENTIFIC NAME R-S

Watercock Watercock Gallicrex cinerea R Indian Moorhen Common Moorhen Gallinula chloropus R Purple Moorhen Purple Swamphen Porphyrio porphyrio R VIII . ORDER: PASSERIFORMES Family: Paridae (Tit ) Grey Tit Great Tit Parus major R Family: Corvidae Large Cuckoo-shrike Large Cuckoo-shrike Coracina novaehollandiae R Raven Common Raven Corvus corax R House Crow House Crow Corvus splendens R Tree Pie Rufous Treepie Dendrocitta vagabunda R Family: Laniidae (shrike) Rufous backed Shrike Long-tailed Shrike Lanius schach R Grey Shrike Northern Shrike Lanius excubitor R Family: Muscicapidae ( Short wing, Chat, Robin, Shama Indian Robin Indian Robin Saxicoloides fulicata R Pied Bushchat Pied Bush chat Saxicola caprata R Family: Nectariniidae ( Sun Birds, Flower pecker, Spider hunter ) Purple Sunbird Purple Sunbird Nectarinia asiatica R Small Sunbird Crimson-backed Sunbird Nectarinia minima R Family: Passeridae ( Avadavat, Pipit, Wagtail, Munia, Snow finch, sparrow, weaver ,Accentor) House Sparrow House Sparrow Passer domesticus R Grey Tit Great Tit Parus major R Family: Pycnonotidae (Bulbul, ) Red-vented Bulbul Red-vented Bulbul Pycnonotus cafer R Family: Sturnidae (Myna, Starling) Bank Myna Bank Myna Acridotheres ginginianus R Brahminy Myna Brahminy Starling Sturnus pagodarum R Indian Myna Common Myna Acridotheres tristis R Family: Sylviidae ( Warbler, Browning, Fulvetta ,Babbler, Laughing thrash, Tailor birds, Common Babbler Common Babbler Turdoides caudatus R Jungle Babbler Jungle Babbler Turdoides striatus R Tailorbird Common Tailorbird Orthotomus sutorius R IX. ORDER: PSITTACIFORMES Family: Psittacidae (Parrot and Parakeet) Rose-ringed Parakeet Rose-ringed Parakeet Psittacula krameri R

Note: R = Widespread Resident, r= Very Local Resident, RW =Resident and winter visitor Ref WCMC, Check list of Indian Birds Kumar, A., J.P. Sati and P.C. Tak (2003): Checklist of Indian Water birds. BUCEROS 8 (1): 30 pp 3.12.7.4.2 BUTTERFLIES FROM THE STUDY AREA Butterflies observed during the present study are documented in the table-3.24. TABLE-3.24 BUTTERFLIES IN THE STUDY AREA

SR. NO. SCIENTIFIC NAME & FAMILY COMMON NAME 1 Family Papilionidae 1/1 Papilio polytes Linnaeus Common Mormon 2 Family: Pieridae 2/1 Eurema hecabe Linnaeus Common Grass yellow 3/2 Catopsilia pomona Fabricius Common Emigrant 4/3 Catopsilia pyranthe Linnaeus Mottled Emigrant 5/4 Ixias mariane Cramer White orange tip 6/5 Ixias pyrene Linnaeus Yellow orange tip

e n - V I S I n


SR. NO. SCIENTIFIC NAME & FAMILY COMMON NAME 2 Family: Nymphalidae 7/1 Danaus genutia Cramer Stripped Tiger 8/2 Hypolimanas misippus Linnaeus Danaid egg fly 9/3 Mycalesis perseus Fabricius Common bush brown

3.12.7.4.3 HERPETOFAUNA No amphibians sighted in the study area during the survey period. Reptiles document in the region is given in the table-3.25. TABLE-3.25 REPTILES IN THE STUDY AREA

S. NO. SCIENTIFIC NAME COMMON NAME 1 Calotes versicolor (Daudin) Common garden lizard 2 Ptyas mucosus (Linn.) Common rat snake 3 Hemidactylus flaviviridis (Ruppell) House Gecko 4 Sitana ponticeriana ( Cuvier) Fan-Throated Lizard 5 Naja naja (Linn.) Indian Cobra 6 Daboia russelii ( Shaw and Nodder) Russell’s Viper 7 Bungarus caeruleus ( Schneider Common Indian Krait

= Not sighted but included as per the information provided by villagers, during the interaction with them with pictorial presentation. 3.12.7.4.4 MAMMALS The wild mammals observed other than domesticated ones from study area is documented in the table-3.26. TABLE-3.26 MAMMALS IN THE STUDY AREA

S. NO. SCIENTIFIC NAME COMMON NAME 1 Mus booduga (Gray) Indian field mouse 2 Herpestes edwardsi (Geoffroy) Common Mongoose 3 Lepus sp. Hare 4 Funambulus pennanii ( Wroughton) Five striped Palm squirrel

3.12.8 RARE AND ENDANGERED FAUNA OF THE STUDY AREA: 3.12.8.1 AS PER IUCN RED (2010) LIST The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity. Only sighted bird given in following table-3.27, fall under near threatened category of IUCN. TABLE-3.27 NEAR THREATENED AND BIRD OF THE STUDY AREA

SPECIES HABITAT LOCATION COORDINATES NUMBER THREAT STATUS (IUCN,2012)

Black-headed Ibis (Threskiornis

melanocephalus)

Shallow water bodies, Rice

fields Pandaval 21030’13.3”

72054’24.3” One Near threatened ver.3.1

Source: IUCN Red list of threatened species, 2013 and Bird life international 2012 3.12.8.2 AS PER INDIAN WILD LIFE (PROTECTION) ACT, 1972 Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, as amended on 17th January 2003, is an Act to provide for the protection of wild animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith or ancillary or incidental thereto with a view to ensuring the ecological and environmental security of the country. Some of the sighted fauna were given protection by the Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 by including them in different schedules.

e n - V I S I n


Among the birds in the study area, Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus) is included in schedule I .of Wild life protection Act (1972), while many other birds are included in schedule IV. Among the reptiles, Indian Cobra (Naja naja), and Common Rat Snake (Ptyas mucosus) were provided protection as per Schedule-II of Wild life protection act, (1972). Among mammals; Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi), are a schedule-II mammals. Hares and five stripped squirrels are included in schedule IV of Wild Life Protection act 1972. TABLE-3.28 SPECIES PROVIDED PROTECTION AS PER WILD LIFE PROTECTION ACT

1972

GROUP SPECIES SCHEDULE

Birds Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus), Schedule-I Most of other birds Schedule-IV

Reptiles Indian Cobra (Naja naja), Schedule-II Common rat snake (Ptyas mucosus) Schedule-II

Mammals

Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi), Schedule-II Five striped Palm squirrel (Funambulus pennanii ( Wroughton))

Schedule-IV

Hare (Lepus sp.) Schedule-IV

e n - V I S I n


CHAPTER – 4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES 4.1 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACTS Various sources of pollution with respect to wastewater, the flue gas / process emission, hazardous waste and noise generation along with their qualitative and quantitative analysis as well as measures taken to control them are discussed herein with details. The network method was adopted to identify potential impact, which involves understanding of cause-condition-effect relationship between an activity and environmental parameters. This method involves the "Road Map" type of approach to the identification of second and third order effect. The basic idea is to account for the project activity and identify the type of impact that could initially occur followed by the identification of secondary and tertiary impacts. Identified potential impacts for the various components of the environment, i.e. air, noise, water, land and socio-economic, are presented in figure-4.1 to figure-4.6. It should be noted that in these illustrations the lines are to be read as "might have an effect on". FIGURE-4.1 IMPACT NETWORK ON AIR ENVIRONMENT

Project

Construction phase Operation phase

Release of air pollutants Release of heat

Change in air quality

Impact on Visibility

Particulates deposition on water, Land

Climatic change

Aesthetic impact

Impact on Agricultural produce

Impact on flora and fauna

Impact on Human health

Impact on socio-cultural environment

Impact on Economic output

Secondary Impact

Tertiary impact

Primary Impact

Activity

e n - V I S I n


Addition / Removal of Substance of Heat to /

From the Soil

Impact on Economic Output

Impact on Socio-Cultural Environment

Impact on Live Stock

Change in Ground Water Regime: Soil Moisture / Water

Level / Flow Pattern / Salt Water Instruction

Activity

Primary Impact

Secondary Impact

Tertiary Impact

Construction Phase Operational Phase

Project

Change in Structure of Soil: Ground

Level

Disturbance of Soil

Abstraction of Water

Release of Waste Water on Land

Impact on Flora & Fauna

Impact on Soil Data Impact on Landscape

Impact on Agricultural Production

FIGURE-4.2 IMPACT ON SURFACEWATER ENVIRONMENT

FIGURE-4.3 IMPACT ON GROUND WATER ENVIRONMENT

Environmental Health And Aesthetic Risk

Impact on Amenity/

Recreation

Impact on Aquatic Life

Impact on Runoff/Seepage

Change IN Surface Morphology

Impact on Hydraulics of Water Courses


Impact On Water Quality

Cost of Water Treatment

Activity

Primary Impact

Secondary Impact

Tertiary Impact

Impact on hydraulics of water

courses

Project


Releases of Wastewater


Impact on socio-cultural Environment

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-4.4 IMPACT ON NOISE ENVIRONMENT

FIGURE-4.5 IMPACT ON LAND ENVIRONMENT

Project


Noise

Change in Ambient Noise Level

Impact on Work output and Efficiency

Migration of Birds, Reptiles& Population

Health Risks

Impact on Socio-Cultural Environment


Activity

Primary Impact

Secondary Impact

Tertiary Impact

Operational Phase

Disposal of wastewater & Sludge on land

Toxic substance on Land, particulate

Deposition on land

Impact on Economic output

Project

Impact on socio-cultural environment

Impact on Live Stock

Soil Salinity

Change in Soil Texture & Permeability

Disturbance of land

Impact on landscape

Impact on agricultural produce


Construction Phase

Change in ground water region/salt

Water intrusion

Impact on Flora & Fauna

Activity

Primary

Impact

Secondary

Impact

Tertiary

Impact

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-4.6 IMPACT NETWORK ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC AND CULTURAL ENVIRONMENT

Ope

ratio

nal

Phas

e

Dem

and

for

Wor

k Fo

rce

Effe

ct o

n hu

man

, nat

ure

&

recr

eatio

nal f

acili

ties

Bet

ter

Prod

uct

Ava

ilabi

lity

Cha

nge

in

Econ

omic

Bas

e

of th

e R

egio

n

Empl

oym

ent

Opp

ortu

nity

Act

ivity

Prim

ary

Impa

ct

Seco

ndar

y Im

pact

Terti

ary

Impa

ct

Effe

ct o

n ed

ucat

iona

l m

edic

al, t

rans

port

fa

cilit

ies

Effe

ct o

n w

ater

Su

pply

, sew

erag

e &

solid

was

te

man

agem

ent f

acili

ties

Effe

ct o

n

Hum

an h

ealth

Proj

ect

Econ

omic

Inpu

t C

apita

l/C&

M C

ost

Econ

omic

Out

put

Prod

uct C

ost

Net

Inco

me

Out

put

Con

stru

ctio

n Ph

ase

Dev

elop

men

t O

f anc

illar

y in

dust

ries

Savi

ng o

f for

eign

ex

chan

ge

Air,

Wat

er,

Land

, Noi

se

Pollu

tion

Dem

and

For

Com

mun

icat

ion

Faci

litie

s

Dem

and

for

infr

astru

ctur

al

faci

litie

s

Aes

thet

ic

risk

Effe

ct o

n ag

ricul

ture

&

fish

erie

s Im

pact

on

visu

al

envi

ronm

ent

Effe

ct o

n B

uild

ing

Mat

eria

ls M

onum

ents

e n - V I S I n


4.2 PREDICTIONS AND EVALUATION OF IMPACTS Evaluation is an absolute term used for assessment and prediction by means of numerical expression or value. Assessment is the process of identifying and interpreting the environmental consequences of the significant actions. Prediction is a way of mapping the environmental consequences of the significant actions. Significant Action depicts direct adverse changes caused by the action and its effects on health of biota including flora, fauna and man, socio-economic conditions, landforms and resources, physical and cultural heritage properties and quality of bio-physics surrounds. Prediction requires scientific skill drawn from many disciplines. Prediction of ecological components is often uncertain, because their response to environmental stress cannot be predicted in absolute terms. The assessor (one who does the assessment) and decision maker (one who take the decision after adequate analysis of assessment report) is expected to be aware of the degree of uncertainty. The assessor generally uses the following methods and resources for impact assessment.

♦ Field surveys and monitoring ♦ Guideline and modeling ♦ Literature surveys and interviews ♦ Qualification and experience

An impact can be defined as any change in Physical, Chemical and Biological, Cultural and Socioeconomic environment that can be attributed to activities related to alternatives under study for meeting the project needs. Impact methodology provides an organized approach for prediction and assessing these impacts. The categories of environmental effect and associated impacts widely used for impact identification are provided in figure-4.1 to 4.6. Impact assessment is based on conceptual notions on how the universe acts that is intuitive and/or explicit assumption concerning the nature of environmental process. In most of cases the predictions consists of indicating merely whether there will be degradation, no change or enhancement of environment quality. In other cases, quantitative ranking scales are used. The selection of indicator is crucial in assessment because impacts are identifies and interpreted based on impact indicator. An impact indicator is a parameter that provides a measure (in at-least some qualitative or numerical sense) of the significance and magnitude of the impact. In India indicator is developed by the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) in the form of primary water quality criteria, biological water quality criteria, and national ambient quality criteria for air and noise. The impact of the proposed project on the environment has been considered based on the information provided by the proponents and data collected from the study area. The environmental impacts have been categorized as long or short term and reversible or irreversible. Primary impacts are those, which are attributed directly by the project while secondary impacts are those, which are indirectly induced. These typically include the associated investment and changed pattern of social and economical activities by the proposed action. The operational phase of the proposed project comprises several of which have been considered to assess the impact on one or another environmental parameters. Scientific techniques and methodologies based on mathematical modeling are available for studying impacts of various project activities on environmental parameters. The nature of the impacts due to said project activities are discussed here in detail. Each parameter identified in proceeding chapters, is singularly considered for the anticipated impact due to various activities listed. The impact is quantified using numerical scores 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 in increasing order of activity. In order to assess the impact accurately, each parameter is discussed in detail covering the following:

1) Project activities like to generate impact 2) Quantification and prediction of impact

Minor and temporary impacts are expected due to the construction activities. All the impacts of construction phase will be short term only and it is very limited as minor construction work is anticipated for requirement of project.

e n - V I S I n


Operation of the project may potential to affect quality of life, air, noise, water, land, human and flora, fauna by increase in air, noise and water pollution, by increase in hazardous waste generation, by pollution from spillage/surface run-off, by disturbance to flora and fauna, by loss of trees resulting from increased assess, by increase in land values threatening agriculture, etc. During the operation phase, the following activities are considered as significant impact.

Air emission Noise generation Solid/Hazardous waste generation Water use and waste water discharge Employment Generation

The operation of the project will involve discharge of pollutants. There may be wastewater generation, air emissions, hazardous waste generation and mechanical noise. An assessment of the quantitative changes in the various environmental components is therefore essential for predicting the impact. Operational phase activities will have impacts, either short terms or long term and reversible or irreversible on ambient air and noise, surface and ground water, land, socio-economics and cultural environment. 4.3 AIR ENVIRONMENT Air pollution can cause significant effects on the ambient environment, and subsequently on humans, animals, vegetation and materials. It primarily affects the respiratory (e.g. by fine dust), circulatory (e.g. by carbon monoxide) and olfactory (e.g. by odors) systems in humans. In most cases, air pollution aggravates pre-existing diseases or degrades health status, making people more susceptible to other infections or the development of chronic respiratory and cardiovascular diseases. Environmental impacts from air pollution can include acidic deposition and reduction in visibility. Assessment of prevailing ambient air quality status in the vicinity of proposed project site is an important part of environmental impact assessment study. The tropical climatic conditions, especially winds prevailing in India mainly control the dispersion of air pollutants during different seasons. According to the Indian climatology, for all practical purposes in air pollution studies, there are three seasons in a year, viz. winter, pre-monsoon and post-monsoon. For the quantitative assessment of the environmental impact on the ambient air environment during these seasons, atmospheric dispersion modeling is required. Atmospheric dispersion modeling is the mathematical simulation of how air pollutants disperse in the ambient atmosphere. It is performed with computer programs that solve the mathematical equations and algorithms which simulate the pollutant dispersion. The dispersion models are used to estimate or to predict the concentration of air pollutants emitted from sources on the desired area. Such models are important to governmental agencies tasked with protecting and managing the ambient air quality. The models are typically employed to determine whether the ambient air quality level due to proposed project will compliance with the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) or not. Over and above models also serve to assist in the design of effective control strategies to reduce emissions of harmful air pollutants. 4.3.1 ISC SHORT TERM MODEL The dispersion of pollutants in the atmosphere is a function of several meteorological parameters viz. temperature, wind speed and direction, mixing depths, inversion level, etc. A number of models have been developed for the prediction of pollutant concentration at any point from an emitting source. The Industrial Source Complex – Short Term (ISCST3) dispersion model is a steady-state Gaussian plume model. It is most widely accepted for its interpretability. It gives reasonably correct values because this obeys the equation of continuity and it also takes care of diffusion, which is a random process. For the present study, this model is used for the prediction of maximum ground level concentration (GLC). The Industrial Source Complex Short Term (ISCST3) model is the US EPA’s one of the regulatory models for many New Source Review (NSR) and other air permitting applications. The ISCST3 model is based on a steady-state Gaussian plume algorithm, and is applicable for estimating ambient impacts from point, area, and volume sources out to a distance of about 50 kilometers. The ISC Short Term model accepts hourly meteorological data records to define the conditions for plume rise, transport, diffusion, and deposition. The model estimates the concentration value for source and receptor combination for each hour of input meteorology, and calculates user-selected short-term averages.

e n - V I S I n


4.3.2 METHODOLOGY Meteorology is the fluid mechanics applied to the atmosphere. Meteorological conditions play an important role in determining existing air quality and environmental conditions. The essential relationship between meteorology and atmospheric dispersion involves the wind in the broadest sense of the term. Wind fluctuations over a very wide range of time and space scales accomplish dispersion and strongly influence other processes associated with them. The characterization of the existing meteorological conditions near a source of pollutants is, therefore, a critical aspect for assessing air quality in the ambient environment. For the rapid air quality impact assessment meteorological data for the desired season/period over the project region are used for air quality modelling. The following subsections describe the prime meteorological parameters during the observation period which govern the dispersion of pollutants. 4.3.3 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES Generally Construction phase involves Site cleaning, Excavation, Construction, Erection or Installation of equipment & machinery, Transportation, Material Handling. Dust will be the main pollutant affecting the ambient air quality of the surrounding area during the construction phase. Only resin manufacturing unit will construct in existing premises. So, installation of new machinery will be only for resin unit. No major construction activities will be carried out. Moreover, fume generation will be there due to welding and allied activities; this impact will be negligible and restricted to project site. The workers would be trained to use welding shields and use safer practice. Motor vehicle transportation (to, from and around the site) particularly the traffic of tracks at the site, material movement into the site will introduce particulates and other exhaust gases into the local ambient air and there is some likelihood that during the construction period local air quality may be temporarily affected by these emissions. However, these activities will be intermittent and hence, significant adverse impact is low. Providing suitable surface treatment to ease the traffic, flow and regular sprinkling of water will reduce the fugitive dust generation significantly. 4.3.4 OPERATION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES During production phase of MUF Resin, emission from the stack attached to thermopack will be expected as the main air pollution sources. SO2, NOx and PM will be expected as prime criteria air pollutants during the operation phase of plant. Emission Source characteristic used for atmospheric dispersion modelling is provided in the following table-4.1. In absence of PM10 and PM2.5 emission limits, emission rate of PM10 is estimated assuming 50% of the SPM emission limit and PM2.5 as 60% of PM10. The air pollution caused by the gaseous emissions from a single or small group of stacks is a local phenomenon. Its impact will occur at a distance ranging from within the immediate vicinity of the stack to several kilometers away from the stack. Maximum ground level concentration will occur within this range. All plumes at more downwind distances from the source by stack emission become diluted by diffusion in the ambient atmosphere, that concentrations of pollutants become negligible. 4.3.4.1 MIXING HEIGHT Mixing Height (MH) is the vertical extent through which the contaminant plume can be mixed. Forecasting of mixing height is done with the aid of the vertical temperature profile. The MH is a function of stability. In unstable air the MH is higher and in stable air the MH is lower. With a lower MH, there is a smaller volume of air in which the pollutant can be dispersed, resulting in higher concentrations in the ambient environment. There is a seasonal variation of MH. During summer daylight hours, MH can be few thousand feet whereas for winter it can be a few hundred feet. It varies also in the course of a day. It is lowest at night and increases during the day. Secondary information has been used to determine the mixing height over the study region for the study period and it varies from 50-1700 meters (IMD). 4.3.4.2 MODEL INPUT EMISSION DATA For the modeling purpose air emission can be considered to be mainly for suspended particulate matter. Proposed Stack emission details are given in following table-4.1.

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-4.1 DETAILS OF EMISSION FROM EXISTING & PROPOSED STACK

SR. NO. OPERATING PARAMETER UNIT

SOURCE OF EMISSION (STACK)

THERMOPACK

1. Stack height meter 36

2. Stack diameter at top meter 1.5

3. Flue gas exit velocity m/s 4.5

4. Emission rate: PM2.5 PM10 SO2 NOx

g/s g/s g/s g/s

0.23 0.39 1.32 0.49

5. Flue gas temp. 0K 473

4.3.4.3 MODEL OPTIONS USED FOR COMPUTATIONS

The plume rise is estimated by Briggs formulae, but the final rise is always limited to that of the mixing layer;

Simple terrain

Stack tip down-wash is not considered;

Buoyancy Induced Dispersion is used to describe the increase in plume dispersion during the ascension phase;

Calms processing routine is used by default;

It is assumed that the pollutants do not undergo any physico-chemical transformation and that there is no pollutant removal by dry deposition;

Washout by rain is not considered;

Cartesian co-ordinate system has been used for computations 4.3.4.4 MODEL OUTPUT AND MAXIMUM GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATION Based on the modelling result under observed meteorological condition, 24 hours average maximum GLC of PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and NOx average over 24 hours are estimated to be 0.42, 0.72, 2.42 and 0.90 μg/m3 respectively and occurred at a distance about 640 m from the project site towards southwest sector. The spatial distribution of ground level incremental concentrations of PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and NOx due to proposed plant operation on the impact zone area of 5 km x 5 km on modelling grid size of 100 m x 100 m around the proposed site are shown in figure-4.7 to figure-4.10 respectively. The predicted PM2.5, PM10, SO2, and NOx ground level concentration is given in the table-4.2 along with resultant concentration at the monitoring location around the project site. Maximum ground level concentration is given in table-4.3. Modelling result envisages that incremental ground level concentrations of modeled pollutants due to operation of proposed plant during the operation phase are negligible. The resultant concentration level of PM2.5, PM10, SO2, and NOx pollutants are well within the NAAQS.

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-4.7 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE PM2.5 CONC. (μg/m3)

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-4.8 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE PM10 CONC. (μg/m3)

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-4.9 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE SO2 CONC. (μg/m3)

-5000 -4000 -3000 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000Distance (m)

-5000

-4000

-3000

-2000

-1000

0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

Dis

tanc

e (m

)

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE-4.10 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE NOX CONC. (μg/m3)

-5000 -4000 -3000 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000Distance (m)

-5000

-4000

-3000

-2000

-1000

0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-4.2 SUMMARY OF ISCST3 MODEL OUTPUT FOR PM10, PM2.5, SO2 AND NOX

SR.NO. LOCATIONS

CO-ORDINATES INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATION

X Y PM10 (μg/m3)

PM2.5 (μg/m3)

SO2 (μg/m3)

NOx

(μg/m3)

1. Project Site (A1) - 47 - 18 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2. Malanpor (A2) - 2828 - 2828 0.12 0.07 0.41 0.15 3. Sayan (A3) - 20000 0.0 0.20 0.12 0.68 0.25 4. Alva (A4) 0.0 1200 0.21 0.12 0.70 0.26 5. Kalam (A5) 4065 - 1684 0.02 0.01 0.05 0.02 6. Rohid (A6) 4100 0.0 0.04 0.02 0.12 0.04

TABLE-4.3 MAXIMUM GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATIONOF PM10, SO2 AND NOX

DISTANCE & DIRECTION

MAXIMUM GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATION (AVG. 24 HOURLY) PM10

(μg/m3) PM2.5

(μg/m3) SO2

(μg/m3) NOx

(μg/m3) 640 m from the project site

towards South-west direction 0.72 0.42 2.42 0.90

Mitigation measures:

- Effective stack height with proper air pollution control equipment shall be provided to all stacks. - Regular maintenance of APCE shall be done and recorded. - Green belt shall be developed on 34% area of the total plant area to arrest the pollutants.

4.4 FUGITIVE EMISSION AND CONTROL MEASURES Looking to nature of the proposed project it may generate fugitive emissions. Sources of fugitive emissions include storage and processing vessels, loading and unloading section. Fugitive emissions will be in a small quantity but it gives continuous exposure to the workers. Therefore, fugitive emission control measures are necessary. Probable sources of fugitive emission, its impacts and mitigation measures are given as follows: Probable Sources of fugitive emission:

1. Vehicle Movement 2. Loading and Unloading Section 3. Storage section 4. Vessels etc.

Control measures: • Mechanical seals in pumps, compressors, treatment vessels, distillation vessels shall be use. • Closed unloading, conveying and packing system shall be provided. • More weightage on selection of MOC of piping shall be given to avoid leakage/spillage. • De-dusting system shall be provided. • All the reactors shall be closed. • Safety devices shall be provided to workers working near the reactors. • Spillages shall be avoided during transfer of materials. • All the pipelines, fittings, instruments and control devices will be maintained periodically.

4.5 WATER ENVIRONMENT With respect to water environment three aspects are generally considered in EIA, the raw water availability, consumption and wastewater generation. The first priority in water quality assessment is to maintain and restore the desirable level of water quality in general.

e n - V I S I n


4.5.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. is a project which requires minor construction activities as discussed earlier. During Construction, drainage pattern and water supply system of overland water flow will be somewhat changed due to the site preparation activities. The local labour force will be deployed during construction phase and no colony is proposed as the workers will be employed from the nearby local villages. During the construction phase of the project, water requirement will be mainly for construction activities, growing plants and developing lawns as well as for domestic water requirement for the construction work force. The daily water requirement will vary based on the project activities. All the domestic wastewater generated from the construction site will be sent to septic tank followed by soak pit, so that it shall not contaminate the ground water or surface water in the nearby areas. Thus, there would not be any significant effect on surface water quality and quantity during construction phase. 4.5.2 OPERATION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES During operation daily water requirement for the project of M/s. Krifor industries Pvt. Ltd. will be 38.5 KLD. Only 2.5 KLD water will be required for the MUF resin unit (for Domestic and Cooling Tower) and 3.0 KLD water will be required for the particle board unit (Only for Domestic), and rest water 33 KLD water will be used only for greenbelt development. 8.5 KLD water will be sourced from ground water through using existing bore well and 30 KLD water will be sourced from irrigation department. Total waste water from Resin Unit and Particle Board Unit i.e. 3.55 KLD will be generated in the form of domestic wastewater and cooling tower blow down. Domestic waste water will be treated in proposed sewage treatment plant and treated water will be reuse in the greenbelt development.1 Cooling Tower blow down will be collected in separate tank and will be used for the green belt development. Thus, the company will achieve “Zero Discharge Effluent” concept. Moreover company will adopt rain water harvesting, which will reduce impact on ground water table. 4.5.3 WATER ABSTRACTION AND ITS IMPACT ON WATER SOURCE The region has adequate ground water resource and falls under safe category identified by Central Ground Water Board (CGWB). Moreover, the company will adopt ground water recharging through rain water harvesting system that will help to enhance water environment of the study area. The company will also source water from canal only for greenbelt development purpose. So, there will be insignificant impact on surface water. 4.6 SOIL ENVIRONMENT The main source of impact on land and soil environment will be due to solid waste generated during construction and operation activities. In addition to this accidental spillage of chemicals and effluent can also degrade the soil environment. 4.6.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES The proposed project activity will be located on flat terrain no significant topographical change is expected due to construction activities. The construction of building will help in fixation of soil, thereby reducing the soil erosion. Some construction operations shall disturb the soil profile, but the impact will be insignificant. The project did not involve displacement of any population. There will be no change in existing land use pattern, forest cover or vegetation in surrounding area. Construction activities lead to generation of sand, gravel, concrete, stone, bricks, wood, metal, glass, polythene sheets, plastic, paper etc. as waste. Various operations during the construction activities lead to the varied compositions in the total solid waste stream and affect the site. As soon as the construction will be over, all wastes from the site will be cleared with due care, meeting regulatory requirement, if any. Also, hydraulic oil, fuels and lubricating oils will be used. Municipal waste will be minimal as most of construction workforce will belong to local area and no construction camp is proposed. The waste generated will be collected and segregated and will be disposed off suitably. Hence impacts will be insignificant, reversible and for short duration only. These impacts will be confined to the construction site only and no adverse impact on the surroundings is anticipated. 1 Incorporated in accordance with public hearing

e n - V I S I n


4.6.2 OPERATION PHASE IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES All the Solid waste will be stored separately in the isolated storage area within the premises. Hazardous Solid waste like Spent Oil which will be used as lubricant in plant machineries, fly ash generated from the project will be sold to brick manufacturers and other waste like discarded resin which will be sent to the Common Hazardous waste Treatment Storage and Disposal Facility. Proper management of solid/hazardous waste shall be done; hence no adverse impact on soil environment due to the proposed project activities is envisaged. 4.7 NOISE ENVIRONMENT 4.7.1 NOISE IMPACT ASSESSMENT The assessment of the impacts of noise on the surrounding community depends upon:

• Characteristics of noise source (instantaneous, intermittent, or continuous in nature) • Time of day at which noise occurs • Location of noise source with respect to noise receptor

For an approximate estimation of propagation of noise in the ambient air from the area or point source, a standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation used is as follows: Noise (Receptor) = Noise (Source) - 20 Log [distance (Receptor) / distance (Source)] For the modeling purposes, terrain is considered flat and there are no sound absorptive materials are present in the direction of the sound wave propagation so as to formulate the worst-case scenario. For the modeling purposes, terrain is considered flat and there are no sound absorptive materials are present in the direction of the sound wave propagation so as to formulate the worst-case scenario. For predicting noise emissions impacts due to proposed project, the noise emission sources are examined during both construction and operational phases. The noise levels during both distinct phases are predicted using the CPCB approved noise model DHAWANI applicable for stationary point sources. 4.7.2 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES The project is expected to have large scale construction activities. Sources of noise emissions are expected from various construction equipments. The major noise generating sources envisaged during construction phase and their typical noise level value are given in table-4.4. TABLE-4.4 NOISE LEVELS GENERATED FROM CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT

NAME OF SOURCE NOISE LEVEL AT 1 M FROM SOURCE (CALCULATED) IN DB (A)

Air Compressor 111 Back Hoe/Loader 105 Concrete Mixer Truck 109 Concrete Pumper 94 Concrete Vibrators 101 Cranes - mobile 105 Dump Truck 107 Generator 75 Hammering 110 Jackhammer 112 Pile Driver 124 Radial Arm Saw 104

e n - V I S I n


Noise modelling is done assuming that all the above equipments emit noise simultaneously considering as worst-case scenario. The spatial variation of the predicted noise levels at an interval of 5 dB (A) without control around the project site on the area of 1 km x 1 km are shown in figure-4.11. FIGURE-4.11 SPATIAL VARIATION OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT NOISE LEVELS

DB(A): CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Modelling results shows that noise level meets the Ambient Noise Quality Standards (ANQS) 55 dB (A) at a distance of about 900 m. Uncontrolled noise levels generated from construction equipment, in the range of 94-124 dB (A) have been considered for prediction purpose. However, the CPCB standards specified for limited construction equipment reflect that noise emission specifications for such equipment should not exceed 75 dB (A). The noise levels predicted here is without mitigation measures. It is assumed that with the adoption of the mitigation measures noise levels will be further restricted within very short distances from the source. With respect to occupational exposure, the permissible threshold is 90 dB (A). Thus, based on the modelling results it can be concluded that all sensitive receptors (i.e. labour colonies) should be located beyond 125 meters from the noise generating source location during construction activities. 4.7.3 OPERATION PHASE IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES During operation phase of proposed plant prime noise emission will be expected from industrial activities like small capacity diesel generator, mechanical movement and material handling in unit. Noise emission level from these sources will be expected to keep remain below the permissible limit. However, at places where noise levels may exceed the permissible limit, acoustic enclosure will be provided. The adverse impact on occupationally exposed workers will not be envisaged, as noise protection equipment will be provided. Further, in order to mitigate the noise levels on the ambient environment during the operational phase, a green belt will be developed around the periphery of the plant. 4.8 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES FOR

LAND USE 4.8.1 IMPACT ASSESSMENT An effort has been made to identify various environmental, social and ecological impacts due to proposed project during construction and operation phases considering present environmental scenario as baseline. The corresponding mitigation measures to take care of the adverse impacts are also discussed in following sections.

e n - V I S I n


4.8.2 IMPACT OF LAND USE According to project site area 72,400 m. sq. area will change into industrial land.

As per land break up water bodies and crop land are the major land use type covering the study area. Both the land use type is less influencing factors to the environment.

Harmful chimney gasses and may be other huge ting gasses other than CO2 could vegetation cover within the study area.

Surrounding area crop lands could be adversely affected resulting in reduce yields, contaminated produce could spread diseases due to uncontrolled leakages and pollutants.

Water bodies can help to divert and dilute drained waste water by surrounding area and domestic waste water.

Salt pan is also important land use feature of the study area. Due to evaporation and leaching effect this activity can make impact on air and water environment; specially ground water.

Also mud land and mangroves are found on shore which is being influenced by settlements and industries nearby.

As per totally new industry will established, relatively settlements also will increase in surrounding area due to new employment. It may alter the surrounding land use.

4.8.3 MITIGATION MEASURES OF LAND USE

As surrounding area nearby project site is mainly crop land, company should take care of Air & Water environment while construction and operation phase.

Seepages, percolation of project site water / flooding of the site need to be strictly controlled through constructions of peripheral the wall around the site.

All effluents whenever other pollutants must be controlled in such away leakage / seepage within the project premises or within the study area.

As project site is altering crop land and shrub land they should develop proper green belt according to requirement of CPCB norms.

Company can allot quarters to the employees by constructing colony instead of individual bungalows which can control increase in settlement. Local employment can increase for the same.

4.9 ECOLOGY The impact due to construction phase and operation phase of the project and its activities on the ecological parameters like natural vegetation, cropping pattern, fisheries and aquatic life, forests and species diversity. Ecological Impact Assessment considered the following stages: • Identification of the likely zone of influence arising from the whole lifespan of the project; assessment

of the ecological impacts of the project and definition of the significance of these impacts. • Identification and evaluation of ecological resources and features likely to be affected. • Identification of the biophysical changes likely to affect valued ecological resources and features; • Assessment of whether these biophysical changes are likely to give rise to a significant ecological

impact, defined as an impact on the integrity of a defined site or ecosystem. • The conservation status of habitats or species within a given geographical area, including

cumulative impacts. • Refinement of the project to incorporate ecological enhancement measures, mitigation measures to

avoid or reduce negative impacts, and compensation measures for any residual significant negative impacts.

e n - V I S I n


• Provision for monitoring and following up the implementation and success of mitigation measures and ecological outcomes, including feedback in relation to predicted outcomes.

When describing changes/activities and impacts on ecosystem structure and function, reference have been made to the following parameters and presented in following table-4.5,

• Magnitude of Impact

• Extent

• Duration

• Reversibility

• Timing and frequency

A detail of ecological impact assessment is discussed below:

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-4.5 DETAILS OF ECOLOGICAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

Ecological Criteria Identified Impacts Ecological significance of Impact Magnitude

Duration /Timing/

Frequency Reversibility Mitigation Cumulative

Impact

Construction Phase Zone of Influence

Project site habitat Due to Site clearance.

The Project site is located in existing premises of M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. As the proposed MUF resin unit for captive use project will be located within existing premises of particle board industrial area; no additional land area is required. The proposed green belt development as the part of this project will mitigate the ecological impact due to this, restricted vegetation clearing.

No impact - - - No Cumulative impact

Zone of Influence

Ecological Impact Surrounding habitat due to fugitive emission.

Not much impact on the surrounding habitat is envisaged due to the construction activity except some fugitive emission

Temporary Impact

Only during the construction activity

Reversible As given in EMP chapter The existing green belt surrounding the industrial area will restrict the fugitive emission

No cumulative impact

Accessibility Ecological Impact due to road construction

No Road construction is required to assess the project site. The unit adjacent to the existing NH-228 road.

No impact No Impact

Operation Phase Zone of Influence

Ecological Impact on Surrounding Eco sensitive habitat due to emission sources due to expansion The incremental increase with respect to PM due to the burning of bagasse dust in the boiler, Emissions of sulfur dioxide (SO2) and nitrogen oxides (NOx) are

The Project site is located in already developed industrial area for particle board surrounded by many Sugar cane fields. The particulate matter emission from the stacks attached to D.G sets and Boiler using Bagasse dust as fuel can be settled down on the lamina blades of Sugar cane and can restrict its photosynthetic activities.

Moderate Impact

During operation Phase

No Green belt development in the premises considering the predominant wind direction will further reduce the impact

No significant Impact

e n - V I S I n


Ecological Criteria Identified Impacts Ecological significance of Impact Magnitude

Duration /Timing/

Frequency Reversibility Mitigation Cumulative

Impact

lower than conventional fossil fuels due to the characteristically low levels of sulfur and nitrogen associated with bagasse. Auxiliary fuels (typically fuel oil or natural gas) may be used during startup of the boiler or when the moisture content of the bagasse is too high to support combustion; if fuel oil is used during these periods, SO2 and NOx emissions will increase

emission with respect to the magnitude and distance

Zone of Influence

Ecological Impact on Surrounding Eco sensitive habitat due to waste water generated from the project activity.

During operation phase Waste water will be treated and used in on land irrigation within premises thereby reducing load on fresh water demand. No adverse impact of proposed project activities is envisaged

Negative impact due to the Withdrawal of Ground water.


No Proper treatment of waste water to meet GPCB and CPCB permissible disposal limit

No impact

Zone of Influence

Ecological Impact on Surrounding Eco sensitive habitat due to Noise generated from the project activity.

The Noise level during the operation phase is around 75 dB. The impact on ambient noise level will be restricted only on the factory premises The ambient air quality of the surrounding villages may not have any significance increase due to the project activity

No impact on Flora and fauna


No As given in The EMP section

No impact

e n - V I S I n


4.9.1 NATURAL VEGETATION The proposed project activities shall be within industrial premises. Industry will develop a green belt on the surrounding periphery. Since the effluents and emissions generated from the project activities shall be treated and disposed as per the EMP provisions, adverse impact over any of the ecological components of the environment is reduced to minimum. 4.9.2 CROPS The proposed project shall not alter the crop production of the area. Further, the necessary environmental protection measures have been planned under EMP e.g. air pollution control systems shall be designed to take care of even emergency releases of the gaseous pollutants like Particulate Matter, SO2, and NOx. Regular environmental surveillance shall be done for the proposed unit, so as not to have any short-term or cumulative effect on the crops and the natural vegetation of the area. 4.9.3 FOREST, NATIONAL PARKS / SANCTUARIES There is no reserved forest, national park or sanctuary within 10 km radius of the plant. There shall be no impact on the same. 4.10 IMPACT ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASPECTS Every development brings destruction with it, anticipated impacts and mitigations are presented here: NEGATIVE IMPACT

• The proposed development will bring with increased population, this factor will do impact on culture of the local society through multi-cultural impact but as local employment will involve in the project so there will be no major impact on multiculturalism.

• No other major industry is located in this area, so this project may disturb the existing environment somehow.

• As this project is going to use ground water for the requirement so its impact will be on reflected ground water level but as this area not falling ground water scarcity area.

• Due to this industry, air pollution may increases so its impact will be on health. Migration also brings health related problems to the area.

POSITIVE IMPACT

• As company practicing to give employment to local people, it will increase socio-economic status of the local society through this employment opportunity in local area, the rate of migration to outside will decrease.

• This project will brings social change in the society with improved socio-economic life of the local people, this project will generate direct and indirect employment, like primary grocery requirements of residential, functional shopping, entertainment facilities, transportation facility etc.

• Nearby villages will get developed through CSR activities of the company. • During construction period employment will be generated especially for local people. • Government will get different types of taxes, Excise duty, state sale tax or VAT etc. • Education level will also improve of local area because of this two reasons, one is company will

promote education under its CSR activities and second reason will be requirement of eligible employees for the company so students will get motivated themselves.

• Infrastructures and communication facilities will improve. 4.10.1 PLACES OF ARCHAEOLOGICAL/HISTORICAL/RELIGIOUS/TOURIST INTEREST There is no place of archaeological, historical, religious or tourist interest within the study area i.e. near to the proposed project site. Hence, there shall be no impact on places of interest. 4.11 ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD Raw material and finish product shall be transported by road/rail and shall be stored in the plant premises. On site emergency plan shall be prepared for storage and handling of materials and finished goods. This report shall be prepared with the consideration of hazards associated with the materials and care should be taken for all aspects of environmental hazards. The project proponent shall consider all the safety aspects in planning, designing and operation of the plant as per standard practices. Hence, no adverse impact on this account is anticipated.

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-4.6 POTENTIAL IMPACTS & MITIGATIVE MEASURES

ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS POTENTIAL IMPACTS POTENTIAL SOURCE OF

IMPACT CONTROLS THROUGH EMP &

DESIGN IMPACT EVALUATION REMEDIAL MEASURES

Water Quality Deterioration of water quality Decrease in ground water table

Construction activity: Abstraction of water for construction activity and domestic use for construction workers. Operation Activity: Ground water abstraction for process and domestic use.

Proper management of surface water run off shall be made. Sewage treatment plant (STP) is proposed Rain water harvesting Green belt development

No waste water shall be discharge outside the premises. Insignificant adverse impact

“Zero effluent discharge” concept will be follows.

Air Quality Dust Emissions

Construction Phase: All heavy construction activities

Suitable control measures will be adopted as per a dust control plan.

Not significant because dust generation will be temporary and will settle fast due to dust suppression techniques used

During construction Phase the contractors are advised to use dust masks for the employed labour. Water sprinkling for suppression of dust during construction phase.

Emissions of PM, SO2 and NOx

Construction Phase: Operation of construction equipment and vehicles during site development.

Rapid on site construction and improved maintenance of equipment Use of clean fuel in petrol pumps if available Use of ultra low Sulphur diesel.

Not significant

Regular monitoring of emissions & control measures to reduce the emission levels.

Operation Phase: Emissions from the stack attached to Thermopack unit

Adequate stack height

Green belt to be provided with specific species reducing PM levels.

Not significant

-

Socio-Economic Overall growth & development of area, increased primary & secondary employment, improvement in

Project activities CSR activity is proposed Beneficial change -

e n - V I S I n


ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS POTENTIAL IMPACTS POTENTIAL SOURCE OF

IMPACT CONTROLS THROUGH EMP &

DESIGN IMPACT EVALUATION REMEDIAL MEASURES

infrastructure and growth of other industries

Terrestrial Ecology Minor loss of habitat-flora & fauna

Project activities Green belt, Proper, management of solid waste and liquid effluent

In-significant Impact -

Noise Environment Noise emissions Construction Phase: Operation of construction equipment and vehicles during site development.

Use of well-maintained equipment fitted with silencers. Providing noise shields near the heavy construction operations Construction activity will be limited to daytime hours only.

Residential areas are located at least one km away from the site and hence there is no noise increase expected from the project activities. Also, there are no sensitive receptors located within near vicinity of site.

Use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) like earmuffs and earplug during construction activities.

Operation Phase:

Green Belt Development Providing acoustic enclosures

In-significant

Short-term exposure within permissible limit.

-

Infrastructure & Services

Improved communication, transport, housing, educational & medical facilities

Social activities of company

Development has been gradual Beneficial impact -

Environmental Hazards

Risk to environment & neighboring population

Storage of materials On site & off site Disaster management plan & Safe practices

Insignificant adverse impact

Proper storage and handling of materials

e n - V I S I n


4.12 MATRIX REPRESENTATION The parameters discussed are presented in the form of a matrix in table-4.7. The impact matrix relating to the activities during construction and operation phase is presented. Potential impact & mitigation measures are given in table-4.6. The quantification of impact is done using numerical scores 0 to 5 as per the following criteria. Score Severity criteria 0 No impact 1 No damage 2 Slight/ Short-term effect 3 Occasional reversible effect 4 Irreversible/ Long-term effect 5 Permanent damage The scores for various parameters and activities are presented in table-4.7. Score of environmental impact matrix are given in table-4.8. 4.12.1 CUMULATIVE IMPACT CHART The total negative impact of various activities on any one parameter is represented as a cumulative score and the cumulative scores of various parameters are given in the form of a cumulative impact chart presented in table-4.9. Any particular parameter having an individual score greater than 4 or cumulative score of 20 implies serious effects due to the project and calls for suitable mitigation measures. It is evident from the matrices that the resultant impact is beneficial to the local population and due to export (and import substitution) the resultant impact is beneficial to our country. TABLE-4.7 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION MATRIX

ACTIVITIES DURING

OPERATION PHASE

Air Quality Noise Water

Quality

Land Requi-

rement & Land use

Infrast-ructure

Env. Hazards

Terres-trial & Aquatic Ecology

Socio- Economic

Status

Re-source Deple-

tion

Odor

Resource Consumption - - -

Material & goods Storage/handling - - -

Utilities - -

Gaseous Emissions - - - -

Fugitive Emissions - - - - -

Solid & Hazardous Waste Disposal - - - - - -

Spills & Leaks - - - - - - -

Shutdown/ Startup - - - - -

Equipment Failures - - - -

Plant Operations - -

Transportation - - - - - -

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-4.8 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT MATRIX ACTIVITIES

DURING OPERATION

PHASE

Air Quality Noise Water

Quality

Land Requi-

rement & Land use

Infrast-ructure

Env. Hazards

Terres-trial & Aquatic Ecology

Socio- Economic

Status

Re-source Deple-

tion

Odor

Resource Consumption 1 0 1 1 0 2 1 1 3 0

Material & goods Storage/handling 1 1 0 2 2 1 0 1 0 1

Utilities 2 2 2 1 0 2 1 1 2 0

Gaseous Emissions 2 1 0 0 0 2 2 1 0 1

Fugitive Emissions 1 2 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

Solid & Hazardous Waste Disposal 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

Spills & Leaks 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

Shutdown/ Startup 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

Equipment Failures 1 1 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

Plant Operations 2 2 3 0 2 1 1 0 3 1

Transportation 2 2 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 TABLE-4.9 CUMULATIVE IMPACT CHART

ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETER TOTAL CUMULATIVE SCORE

Air Quality 14

Noise 12

Water Quality 09

Land Requirement and Landuse 05

Infrastructure 08

Environmental Hazards 13

Terrestrial Aquatic Ecology 07

Socio Economic Status 04

Resource Depletion 09

Odour 08

e n - V I S I n


CHAPTER – 5 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM 5.1 INTRODUCTION Environmental monitoring provides feedback about the actual environmental impacts of a project. Monitoring results help judge the success of mitigation measures in protecting the environment. They are also used to ensure compliance with environmental standards, and to facilitate any needed project design or operational changes. An environmental monitoring program is important as it provides useful information and helps to:

Assist in detecting the development of any unwanted environmental situation, and thus, provides opportunities for adopting appropriate control measures, and

Define the responsibilities of the project proponents, contractors and environmental monitors and provides means of effectively communicating environmental issues among them.

Define monitoring mechanism and identify monitoring parameters. Evaluate the performance and effectiveness of mitigation measures proposed in the Environmental

Management Plan (EMP) and suggest improvements in management plan, if required. Find out pollution level inside the plant and in nearby area. Compile pollution related data for remedial measures. Find out efficiency level of pollution control measures adopted.

5.2 MONITORING SCHEDULE Environmental monitoring programme is a vital process of any management plan of the development project. This helps in assessing the potential problems that result from the proposed project, changes in environmental conditions and effectiveness of implemented mitigation measures. Regular monitoring in a systematic and standardized manner helps in assessment of current environment and provides information on operational performance of installed pollution control facilities. Proposed schedule of environmental monitoring for the proposed project is given in following table-5.1. TABLE-5.1 PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

SR. NO.

AREA OF MONITORING SAMPLING LOCATIONS PARAMETERS TO BE

ANALYSED FREQUENCY OF

SAMPLING

Air Pollution Monitoring

1. Stack Emission Each utility stack PM, SO2, NOx Once in a month

2. Ambient Air Quality Three samples PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, VOC Once in six month

3. Work Zone Environment Within premises VOC Once in a year

Water Pollution Monitoring

4. Waste water Collection tank As per consent of PCB Once in a six month

5. Ground and surface water Two sampling locations As per IS Standards Once in a year

Soil Pollution Monitoring

6. Soil Two sampling locations of Impact Area As per consent of PCB Once in year

Noise Pollution Monitoring

7. Noise Noise generating units Sound Pressure Levels (Leq) Once in a month

within Plant Sound Pressure Levels (Leq) Once in a month

e n - V I S I n


CHAPTER – 6 ADDITIONAL STUDIES 6.1 PUBLIC HEARING Public hearing is applicable for the proposed resin manufacturing unit as per Para 7(i) III (b) of EIA Notification, 14th September, 2006 as the project is located outside the notified industrial area. Accordingly public hearing was conducted on 04th June, 2014 at11:00 hrs. at Factory Site, Village Alva, Taluka Hansot, District Bharuch, Gujarat. Minutes of public hearing is given in Annexure-XII comprising tabular chart of issues raised and commitments made for complying with the commitments made.1 6.2 RISK ASSESSMENT 6.2.1 INTRODUCTION Industrial activities including production, storage, handling, transportation and operational practices presents levels of hazards to workforce, population and environment at large due to accidents, spills, leaks etc. These accidents results in personal and financial loss. The assessment of the threat posed, its control and prevention through good design, management and operational controls is of primal importance. Events like the Bhopal tragedy have emphasized the need to address both on-site and off-site safety. It is against this background that the various Section and Rules under the Environment Protection Act, 1986, the Factories Act, 1948 and other Acts specify the requirements for a safe and reliable working of an industry. These require carrying out various studies and analysis to assess and mitigate hazards prevalent in the factory in line with the goal of safe and reliable working. These are more commonly known as “Risk Assessment Studies”. Risk assessment refers to the technical, scientific assessment of the nature and magnitude of risk and uses a factual base to define the health effects of exposure of individuals or populations or ecological receptors to hazardous contaminants and situations. The QRA report signifies that trained & skilled employees and supporting services can achieve improved safety & productivity levels. Together they can also achieve low maintenance cost, optimized use of Raw materials and negligible rejections/ wastes. The project is advised to equip with a well planned Disaster Management Plan as an essential Mitigation Control Measure. Substantial information is given in the chapter PREVENTIVE MEASURES of QRA, for choosing Plant and Equipment which will ensure PRODUCT SAFETY. A good Legal & Regulatory Compliance Register shall be planned and be in place. All the Rules and Regulations of the land shall be strictly followed to achieve a hindrance free operation of the plant from the statutory point of view. A good safety Manual shall be planned and be in place. All the requirements of Safety & Health of the operating plant shall be an essential part of the manual. The Safety manual will serve as a good communication medium to the employees of the plant. The systems to be complied by the operating level employees as part of their responsibilities and the operational requirements of the system will be readily available in the manual. Risk Assessment study includes predictions of the WORST CASE SCENARIO (catastrophic failure) and MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO along with damage distances and preparedness plan for effectively combating such situations. The report also discusses and demarcates the vulnerable zones and a detailed fire control plan for flammable substances.


e n - V I S I n


No plan is complete or total of its requirements and its scope of improvement is a continuous process. Hence, the RISK ASSESSMENT REPORT is to be reviewed and updated as and when:

• any expansion, alteration, or extension of the plant is planned / implemented

• an incident has occurred and been dealt with, based on feedback gathered on any shortcomings in the handling of the situation

• any feedback is received from the users of the report Risk Assessment is therefore defined as a continuous and integrated process of identification, evaluation, and measurement of risks, along with their potential impact on the organization. The benefits of risk assessment include the following:

• Mitigation or reduction of the risk of an incident.

• Mitigation of the severity and/or consequences by way of improved process techniques, fire protection systems, arrangements of storage, inventory monitoring to fit production requirements.

• Confidence building in employees by improving competency. Preparedness and prompt response to deal with any accident. 6.2.2 DETAILS OF MANUFACTURING PROCESS Detail of manufacturing operation is given in chapter-2. 6.2.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING The details of storage and handling of raw materials are listed in table-6.1. This list also contains the hazardous characteristics of each Raw material. Major raw material is stored in the designated storage location. Incompatible storage standards are applied for storing chemical. Vertical storage is chosen on suitable racks to take care of the available storage space. Threshold planned quantities (TPQ) of fixed depending on the procurement cycle time and availability of chemicals. TABLE-6.1 HAZARDOUS CHARACTERISTICS & STORAGE OF RAW MATERIALS

S. No Description CAS NO Max. Inven.

MTA Phase/

Sp. gravity Storage Type VD FP °F

BP °C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1. Formaldehyde solution 50-00-0 67-56-1

30MT X 5 nos.

Liquid/ 1.08 Tank Farm 1.03 140°F

98 °C

ERPG 1 ERPG 2 ERPG 3

LEL% UEL%

TLV Mg/m³ ppm

R-H-F-OX NFPA 704

IDLH PPM UN. No

10 11 12 13 14 15

1 14 56

6 73

2.0 2-3-0-X 20 1198

TEEL- Temporary Emergency Exposure Limit. ERPGs – Emergency Response Planning Guidelines. VD- Vapor Density. AEGLs- Acute Exposure Guidelines Level. CAS no- Chemical Abstracts Service Registry no. DOT Label- Flammability, Health, Reactivity DOT table levels R-H-Y-levels . R-O-Y : Scenario Disbursement Predictions RED-ORANGE-YELLOW corresponding to ALOHA

e n - V I S I n


Hazardous scenarios for the purpose of RISK ANALYSIS which are most likely to happen during a. Storage conditions, b. during the manufacturing processes & handling are planned and listed in table-6.2. These hazardous chemicals are assessed with the scenarios, for deriving and identifying the vulnerable zones. TABLE-6.2 RISK ANALYSIS

S. No Source Scenarios Failure

Mechanism RISK

Consequence Probability1 Severity2 Risk Rating3 (max = 25)

1 Transfer Formaldehyde from the tanker to tanks.(MCAS)

Coupling fit not fully established

Leakage from the coupling joint 3 3 9

2 Rupture on tank (WORST CASE SCENARIO)

Leakage from the tank to dykes

Flammability, Toxicity 2 4 8

END LEGEND

1PROBABILITY: 2SEVERITY: 3RISK RATING: 1 – HIGHLY UNLIKELY 1 – EXTREMELY MILD PROBABILITY x SEVERITY 2 – UNLIKELY 2 – MILD 3 – SOMEWHAT LIKELY 3 – MODERATE 4 – LIKELY 4 – SEVERE 5 – VERY LIKELY 5 – MOST SEVERE

• There are few toxic severity scenario risks, on the operational and storage of chemicals. • The worst case scenario is also well within the reach of fire protection/mitigation measures, planned for

installation. • Fire protection/ control / mitigation measures are incorporated (under execution).

Hence, M/s. Kirfor Industries can be categorized as a medium hazard industry who can manage their risks through invoking On site emergency plan and actively participating in Off-site emergency plan. During the navigation of above sequence of activities, it is drawn to the understanding that the storage & handling are to be closely associated with the Threshold Planned quantities (TPQ) of hazardous chemicals. This will ensure, the associated preventive / mitigating facilities planned and installed for managing the projected risk scenarios will be serving the desired objectives. The in-house regulatory measures for implanting safety shall be appropriate to the risks, and to be handled by trained persons for the purpose. SOPs are to be documented and identified people are to be trained. Regular mock drills shall be planned and executed, as a preparation/ precaution for dealing with emergency operations. 6.2.3.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR THE STORAGE OF MATERIALS Precautions for storage in HDPE drums / Carboys or bags;

- Separately stored with proper enclosures and marked, within premises in closed shed - Proper ventilation will be provided - Sufficient fire extinguishers and PPE will be provided - Flame proof fittings will be provided - Smoking will be prohibited 6.2.4 HAZARDS AND THEIR CONTROL MEASURES While hazards of other type along with safety measures, flood control measures and earthquake control measures are given in table-6.3, table-6.4 and table-6.5 respectively.

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-6.3 HAZARDS AND ITS CONTROL MEASURE

Sr. No

Name of the possible hazard & emergency

It’s source & reasons

It's effect on persons property &

Environment

Place of effect

Control measures provided

1. Fire Transformer Transfer oil short circuit etc.

Electrical power failure, Production hindrance, Loss of transformer

Transformer near power control center

‐ Fire Fighting Equipment's ‐ Graved bed for oil

spillage or soaking isolated fenced area

‐ Lightening arrestor nearby

‐ D. G. Set for emergency power supply

2. Fire & Toxic chemical spillage

Natural Disaster, Earthquakes, Lightening, war.

Production hindrance Trapping under debris, death Chemical burn Toxic chemical spillage

Whole factory & population nearby

‐ Hydrant system ‐ First aid available ‐ Smoking prohibited

inside the factory ‐ Security at all the time

guarding important locations

3. Fire & smoke Fire in storage tank

Burns, Chemical storage area catching fire, Production hindrance

Chemical storage area

‐ Adequate earthing. ‐ Unauthorized person not

allowed to enter ‐ Breathing Apparatus for

rescue operations ‐ Alarm system for

indicating unusual incidence

TABLE-6.4 FLOOD CONTROL MEASURES

SR. NO. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS EMERGENCY CONTROL

1. - All electric line cut off / switch off from main supply - Hand siren use to declare emergency - Shock proof hand gloves should be used if needed

Stop electric power inform site main controller for outside help

2. - Clean the working place - Keep away all persons at safe assembly points - Evacuate all persons through emergency exit door immediately

Start the emergency water tapping

TABLE-6.5 EARTHQUAKE CONTROL MEASURES

SR.NO. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS EMERGENCY CONTROL

1. - Minimum stock of Hazardous chemical - Earthquake proof building

- Stop the leakage - Inform site main controller for outside help

2. - Safe distance between chemicals - Dyke wall at storage tank of chemicals

- Stop the leakage - Inform site main controller for outside help

e n - V I S I n


6.2.5 RISK IDENTIFICATION AND ANALYSIS Identification of risks is done qualitatively and quantitatively through the selection of hazardous substances and by studying the manufacturing process, to arrive at possible failures and their inherent causes. Probability of risk occurrence is also ascertained in order to determine the MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO and the WORST CASE SCENARIO. Hazardous substances have been identified as follows considering the applicable criteria laid down under the Chemical Accident (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response) Rules, 1996, as well as other relevant guidelines: The risks are then analyzed quantitatively in terms of probability, and severity. The risks have also been rated according to the matrix R = Probability x Severity. 6.2.5.1 MAXIMUM CREDIBLE LOSS ACCIDENT SCENARIOS A Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) can be characterised as the worst credible accident. In other words: an accident in an activity, resulting in the maximum consequence distance that is still believed to be possible. A MCA-analysis does not include a quantification of the probability of occurrence of the accident. Another aspect, in which the pessimistic approach of MCA studies appears, is the atmospheric condition that is used for dispersion calculations. The Maximum Credible Loss (MCL) scenarios have been developed for the Facility. The MCL cases considered, attempt to include the worst “Credible” incidents- what constitutes a credible incident is always subjective. Nevertheless, guidelines have evolved over the years and based on basic engineering judgement, the cases have been found to be credible and modelling for assessing vulnerability zones is prepared accordingly. Only catastrophic cases have been considered and not partial or small failures (as is the case in Quantitative Risk Assessment where contributions from low frequency - high outcome effect as well as high frequency - low outcome events are distinguished). The objective of the study is emergency planning, hence only holistic & conservative assumptions are used for obvious reasons. Hence though the outcomes may look pessimistic, the planning for emergency concept should be borne in mind whilst interpreting the results. 6.2.5.2 DAMAGE CRITERIA In consequence analysis, use is made of a number of calculation models to estimate the physical effects of an accident (spill of hazardous material) and to predict the damage (lethality, injury, material destruction) of the effects. The calculations can roughly be divided in three major groups: a) Determination of the source strength parameters; b) Determination of the consequential effects; c) Determination of the damage or damage distances. The basic physical effect models consist of the following: Source strength parameters

*0 Calculation of the outflow of liquid, vapour or gas out of a vessel or a pipe, in case of rupture. Also two-phase outflow can be calculated.

*1 Calculation, in case of liquid outflow, of the instantaneous flash evaporation and of the dimensions of the remaining liquid pool.

*2 Calculation of the evaporation rate, as a function of volatility of the material, pool dimensions and wind velocity.

*3 Source strength equals pump capacities, etc. in some cases. Consequential effects

*4 Dispersion of gaseous material in the atmosphere as a function of source strength, relative density of the gas, weather conditions and topographical situation of the surrounding area.

*5 Intensity of heat radiation [in kW/ m2] due to a fire or a BLEVE, as a function of the distance to the source.

*6 Energy of vapour cloud explosions [in N/m2], as a function of the distance to the distance of the exploding cloud.

e n - V I S I n


*7 Concentration of gaseous material in the atmosphere, due to the dispersion of evaporated chemical. The latter can be either explosive or toxic.

It may be obvious, that the types of models that must be used in a specific risk study strongly depend upon the type of material involved:

- Gas, vapour, liquid, solid - Inflammable, explosive, toxic, toxic combustion products - Stored at high/low temperatures or pressure - Controlled outflow (pump capacity) or catastrophic failure

Selection of Damage Criteria

The damage criteria give the relation between extent of the physical effects (exposure) and the percentage of the people that will be killed or injured due to those effects. The knowledge about these relations depends strongly on the nature of the exposure. For instance, much more is known about the damage caused by heat radiation, than about the damage due to toxic exposure, and for these toxic effects, the knowledge differs strongly between different materials. In Consequence Analysis studies, in principle three types of exposure to hazardous effects are distinguished:

1. Heat radiation, from a jet, pool fire, a flash fire or a BLEVE. 2. Explosion 4. Toxic effects, from toxic materials or toxic combustion products.

In the next three paragraphs, the chosen damage criteria are given and explained. Heat Radiation The consequence caused by exposure to heat radiation is a function of: • The radiation energy onto the human body [kW/m2]; • The exposure duration [sec]; • The protection of the skin tissue (clothed or naked body). • The limits for 1% of the exposed people to be killed due to heat radiation, and for second-degree

burns are given in the table-6.6 herein:

TABLE-6.6 DAMAGES TO HUMAN LIFE DUE TO HEAT RADIATION

Exposure Duration

Radiation for 1% lethality (kW/m2)

Radiation for 2nd degree burns(kW/m2)

Radiation for first degree burns, (kW/m2)

10 Sec 21.2 16 12.5 30 Sec 9.3 7.0 4.0

• Since in practical situations, only the employees will be exposed to heat radiation in case of a fire, it is

reasonable to assume the protection by clothing. It can be assumed that people would be able to find a cover or a shield against thermal radiation in 10 sec. time. Furthermore, 100% lethality may be assumed for all people suffering from direct contact with flames, such as the pool fire, a flash fire or a jet flame. The effects due to relatively lesser incident radiation intensity are given below.

TABLE-6.7 EFFECTS DUE TO INCIDENT RADIATION INTENSITY

INCIDENT RADIATION in kw/m2 TYPE OF DAMAGE

0.7 Equivalent to Solar Radiation

1.6 No discomfort for long exposure

e n - V I S I n


INCIDENT RADIATION in kw/m2 TYPE OF DAMAGE

4.0 Sufficient to cause pain within 20 sec. Blistering of skin (first degree burns are likely)

9.5 Pain threshold reached after 8 sec. second degree burns after 20 sec.

12.5 Minimum energy required for piloted ignition of wood, melting plastic tubing etc.

Explosion

In case of vapour cloud explosion, two physical effects may occur: A flash fire over the whole length of the explosive gas cloud;

∗1 A blast wave, with typical peak overpressures circular around ignition source. As explained above, 100% lethality is assumed for all people who are present within the cloud proper. For the blast wave, the lethality criterion is based on:A peak overpressure of 0.1 bar will cause serious damage to 10% of the housing/structures.Falling fragments will kill one of each eight persons in the destroyed buildings. The following damage criteria may be distinguished with respect to the peak overpressures resulting from a blast wave: TABLE-6.8 DAMAGE DUE TO OVERPRESSURES

PEAK OVERPRESSURE DAMAGE TYPE

0.83 bar Total Destruction

0.30 bar Heavy Damage

0.10 bar 0.03 bar

Moderate Damage Significant Damage

0.01 bar Minor Damage From this it may be concluded that p = 0.17 E+5 pa corresponds approximately with 1% lethality. Furthermore it is assumed that everyone inside an area in which the peak overpressure is greater than 0.17 E+5 pa will be wounded by mechanical damage. For the gas cloud explosion this will be inside a circle with the ignition source as its centre. Intoxication

The consequences from inhalation of a toxic vapour/gas are determined by the toxic dose. This dose D is basically determined by:

- Concentration of the vapour in air;

- Exposure duration.

Furthermore, of course, the breathing rates of the victim, as well as the specific toxic mechanism unto the metabolism play an important role. The dose is defined as D = Cn.t, with:

C = concentration of the toxic vapour, in [ppm] or [mg/m3]; t = exposure duration, in [sec] or [min]; n = exponent, mostly > 1.0; this exponent takes into account the fact that a high concentration

over a short period results in more serious injury than a low concentration over a relatively longer period of exposure. The value of n should be greater than zero but less than 5.

e n - V I S I n


The given definition for D only holds if the concentration is more or less constant over the exposure time; this may be the case for a (semi) continuous source. In case of an instantaneous source, the concentration varies with time; the dose D must be calculated with an integral equation:

D = � Cn.dt

For a number of toxic materials, so-called Vulnerability Models (V.M.) have been developed. The general equation for a V.M. (probit function) is:

Pr = a + b.ln (Cn.t), with

Pr = probit number, being a representation of the percentage of people suffering a certain kind of damage, for instance lethality

Pr = 2.67 means 1% of the population; Pr = 5.00 means 50% of the population; a and b material dependent numbers; Cn.t = dose D, as explained above. The values for a and b are mostly derived from experiments with animals; occasionally, however, also human toxicity factors have been derived from accidents in past. In case only animal experiments are available, the inhalation experiments with rats seem to be best applicable for predicting the damage to people from acute intoxication. Although much research in this field have been done over the past decades, only for a limited number of toxic materials consequence models have been developed. Often only quite scarce information is available to predict the damage from an acute toxic exposition. Data transformation from oral intoxication data to inhalation toxicity criteria is sometimes necessary. Generally, in safety evaluations pessimistic assumptions are applied in these transformation calculations. The calculated damage (distance) may be regarded as a maximum. For the purposes of a response to a major incident, the IDLH value level has been chosen for the ‘wounded’ criteria. This type of injury will require medical attention. 6.2.5.2.1 SOFTWARE USED FOR CALCULATIONS ALOHA (Areal Locations of Hazardous Atmospheres): Aloha is a computer program designed especially for use by people responding to chemical accidents, as well as for emergency planning and training. ALOHA can predict the rates at which chemical vapors may escape into the atmosphere from broken gas pipes, leaking tanks, and evaporating puddles. It can then predict how a hazardous gas cloud might disperse in the atmosphere after an accidental chemical release. ALOHA is an air dispersion model, which you can use as a tool for predicting the movement and dispersion of gases. It predicts pollutant concentrations downwind from the source of a spill, taking into consideration the physical characteristics of the spilled material. ALOHA also accounts for some of the physical characteristics of the release site, weather conditions, and the circumstances of the release. Like many computer programs, it can solve problems rapidly and provide results in a graphic, easy-to-use format. This can be helpful during an emergency response or planning for such a response. ALOHA provides output as amount of chemical discharged from the source as well as its concentration in air it takes in to account different levels of concentrations for a specified chemical. Different concentration levels are given below: ERPG 1: is the maximum airborne concentration below which it is believed that nearly all individuals could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing other than mild transient adverse health effects or perceiving a clearly defined, objectionable odor. ERPG 2: is the maximum airborne concentration below which it is believed that nearly all individuals could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing or developing irreversible or other serious health effects or symptoms which could impair an individual's ability to take protective action. ERPG 3: is the maximum airborne concentration below which it is believed that nearly all individuals could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing or developing life-threatening health effects.

e n - V I S I n


IDLH: The Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH) level. A chemical's IDLH is an estimate of the maximum concentration in the air to which a healthy worker could be exposed without suffering permanent or escape-impairing health effects. 6.2.5.3 VULNERABILITY ANALYSIS A vulnerability analysis is carried out on the MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO and the WORST CASE SCENARIO. The analysis is carried out using the help of sophisticated computer software which provides the zone of influence as well as the geographical risk contours. The calculations are complex in nature, and various parameters are defined to assist the software in simulating the risk contours. The parameters include details such as the size of the leakages / holes, quantity of materials released, duration of the release, weather and geographical conditions. The simulations are generated under standard operating conditions. Data given in the reports and manuals are taken as correct information. The weather conditions are taken as per table-6.9 for all simulations. TABLE-6.9 WEATHER CONDITIONS

PARAMETERS CONDITION A CONDITION F

Wind Speed 10.0 m/s 3.0 m/s

Wind Direction 225° true at 3 m 45° true at 3 m

Pasquill Stability D F

Ground Roughness Open country Open country

Air Temperature (°C) 32 20

Surface temperature 32 20

Relative Humidity 75% 50%

Cloud Cover 50% 50% 6.2.5.4 MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO The MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO was analyzed based on flammable vapor and toxic vapor risks. The ALOHA simulation software was used to obtain the risk contours and the zone of influence, as well as levels of risk associated with each zone. The calculations performed are based on Unified Dispersion Modeling and provide the foot prints of hazardous chemical dispersion and the distances of critical concentrations for flammability and toxicity. The model considers a three stage method as given in the following illustration:

POOL SPREADING AND VAPORIZATION The release containing liquid droplets forms a pool. Any evaporation from this pool will

contribute to the dispersing pool.

Evaporation ↓

DISPERSION The vapor cloud disperses in the atmosphere until it has reached harmless concentration.

Calculation of the concentration profile of the cloud ↓

FLAMMABILITY AND TOXICITY

The results of the ALOHA simulation as well as the parameters used for carrying out the simulations is given below in table-6.10. Downwind concentrations of chemicals are shown.

e n - V I S I n


QRA ANALYSIS FOR FORMALDEHYDE 37% SOLUTION Stability factor : Class ‘D WORST CASE SCENARIO SITE DATA: Location: Village Alva, Bharuch, Gujarat, India Building Air Exchanges Per Hour: 12 (user specified) Time: December 20, 2013 2003 hours ST (using computer's clock) CHEMICAL DATA: Chemical Name: FORMALDEHYDE 37% SOLUTION Molecular Weight: 30.03 g/mol AEGL-1 (60 min): 0.9 ppm AEGL-2 (60 min): 14 ppm AEGL-3 (60 min): 56 ppm Normal Boiling Point: 96.1° C Note: Not enough chemical data to use Heavy Gas option ATMOSPHERIC DATA: (MANUAL INPUT OF DATA) Wind: 6 meters/second from NNE at 3 meters Ground Roughness: open country Cloud Cover: 5 tenths Air Temperature: 32° F Stability Class: D No Inversion Height Relative Humidity: 60% SOURCE STRENGTH: Direct Source: 500 kilograms/hr Source Height: 0 Release Duration: 60 minutes Release Rate: 8.33 kilograms/min Total Amount Released: 500 kilograms THREAT AT POINT: Concentration Estimates at the point: Downwind: 25 meters Off Centerline: 10 meters Note: Concentration not drawn because there is no significant concentration at the point selected. THREAT ZONE - STABILITY CLASS ‘D’ WORST CASE SCENARIO. HAZARDOUS CHEMICAL: FORMALDEHYDE 37% SOLUTION.

e n - V I S I n


THREAT ZONE: Model Run: Gaussian Red : 151 meters ---……. (56 ppm = AEGL-3 (60 min)) Orange: 318 meters --- …(14 ppm = AEGL-2 (60 min)) Yellow: 1.6 kilometers --- (0.9 ppm = AEGL-1 (60 min)) THREAT AT A POINT – STABILITY CLASS ‘D’ Note: Concentration not drawn because there is no significant concentration at the point selected.

At Point: Downwind: 25 meters Off Centerline: 10 meters QRA ANALYSIS FOR FORMALDEHYDE 37% SOLUTION. Stability factor : Class ‘F’ WORST CASE SCENARIO SITE DATA: Location: Village Alva, Bharuch, Gujarat, India Building Air Exchanges Per Hour: 12 (user specified) Time: December 21, 2013 0634 hours ST (using computer's clock) CHEMICAL DATA: Chemical Name: FORMALDEHYDE 37% SOLUTION Molecular Weight: 30.03 g/mol AEGL-1 (60 min): 0.9 ppm AEGL-2 (60 min): 14 ppm AEGL-3 (60 min): 56 ppm Normal Boiling Point: 96.1° C Note: Not enough chemical data to use Heavy Gas option ATMOSPHERIC DATA: (MANUAL INPUT OF DATA) Wind: 3 meters/second from SE at 3 meters Ground Roughness: open country Cloud Cover: 5 tenths Air Temperature: 15° C Stability Class: F (user override) No Inversion Height Relative Humidity: 60% SOURCE STRENGTH: Direct Source: 500 kilograms/hr Source Height: 0 Release Duration: 60 minutes Release Rate: 8.33 kilograms/min Total Amount Released: 500 kilograms THREAT ZONE: Model Run: Gaussian Red : 630 meters --- (56 ppm = AEGL-3 (60 min)) Orange: 1.4 kilometers --- (14 ppm = AEGL-2 (60 min)) Yellow: greater than 10 km --- (0.9 ppm = AEGL-1 (60 min)) THREAT AT POINT: Concentration Estimates at the point: Downwind: 25 meters Off Center line: 10 meters Note: Concentration not drawn because there is no significant concentration at the point selected.

e n - V I S I n


THREAT ZONE - HAZ CHEM ‘FORMALDEHYDE STABILITY CLASS ‘F’

THREAT ZONE: Model Run: Gaussian Red : 630 meters --- (56 ppm = AEGL-3 (60 min)) Orange: 1.4 kilometers --- (14 ppm = AEGL-2 (60 min)) Yellow: greater than 10 km --- (0.9 ppm = AEGL-1 (60 min)) THREAT AT A POINT STABILITY CLASS ‘F’ HAZARDPUS CHEMICAL : FORMALDEHYDE 37% SOLUTION. Note: Concentration not drawn because there is no significant concentration at the point selected.

At Point: Downwind: 25 meters Off Centerline: 10 meters QRA ANALYSIS - HAZCHEM – FORMALDEHYDE 37% SOLUTION. MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO. SITE DATA: Location: Village Alva, Bharuch, Gujarat, India Building Air Exchanges Per Hour: 12 (user specified) Time: December 21, 2013 0700 hours ST (using computer's clock) CHEMICAL DATA: Chemical Name: FORMALDEHYDE 37% SOLUTION Molecular Weight: 30.03 g/mol AEGL-1 (60 min): 0.9 ppm AEGL-2 (60 min): 14 ppm AEGL-3 (60 min): 56 ppm Normal Boiling Point: 96.1° C Note: Not enough chemical data to use Heavy Gas option

e n - V I S I n


ATMOSPHERIC DATA: (MANUAL INPUT OF DATA) Wind: 6 meters/second from NNE at 3 meters Ground Roughness: open country Cloud Cover: 5 tenths Air Temperature: 32° C Stability Class: D No Inversion Height Relative Humidity: 60% SOURCE STRENGTH: Direct Source: 200 kilograms/hr Source Height: 0 Release Duration: 60 minutes Release Rate: 3.33 kilograms/min Total Amount Released: 200 kilograms THREAT AT POINT: Concentration Estimates at the point: Downwind: 25 meters Off Centerline: 10 meters Note: Concentration not drawn because there is no significant concentration at the point selected. QRA ANALYSIS - HAZCHEM – FORMALDEHYDE 37% SOLUTION. MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO. THREAT ZONE

THREAT ZONE: Model Run: Gaussian Red : 99 meters --- (56 ppm = AEGL-3 (60 min)) Orange: 205 meters --- (14 ppm = AEGL-2 (60 min)) Yellow: 965 meters --- (0.9 ppm = AEGL-1 (60 min))

e n - V I S I n


THREAT AT POINT: Concentration Estimates at the point: Downwind: 25 meters Off Centerline: 10 meters Note: Concentration not drawn because there is no significant concentration at the point selected. TABLE-6.10 VULNARABLE ZONE - MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO (MCAS)

PARAMETERS RISK THREAT ZONES ‘D’

THREAT ZONES ‘F’

AFFECTED POPULATION

THREAT AT POINT: DW 25M, CW 10 M

Leakage of FORMALDEHYDE

SOLUTION

Flammable Vapor Cloud

99 NA NA No significant concentration.

No risk. 205 NA NA 965 NA NA

Toxic Vapor Cloud

99 NA NA No significant effect. 205 NA 50

965 NA NA TABLE-6.10 VULNARABLE ZONE - WORST CASE SCENARIO (WCS)

PARAMETERS RISK THREAT ZONES ‘D’

THREAT ZONES ‘F’

AFFECTED POPULATION

THREAT AT POINT: DW 10 M, CW 5 M

Generation of Gas

Flammable Vapor Cloud

NA NA NA No significant concentration.

No risk. NA NA NA NA NA NA

Toxic Vapor Cloud

15 1 630 NA No significant effect. 318 1400 50

1600 >10000 NA RISK ASSESSMENT& MANAGEMENT (LOW HAZARD UNIT)

1. FORMALDEHYDE is a hazardous chemical. The storage level is well planned so that the chemical will not get prolonged storage. TPQ level is kept at 150 KL.

2. FORMALDEHYDE is a highly flammable, highly toxic chemical. Hence all operations of handling this chemical shall be designed in a closed system.

3. The small quantities released into atmosphere will get evaporated soon due to low flash point. Hence it does not have significant HEALTH effects.

4. “ THREAT AT A POINT” reveals the gas has a tendency to dilute and rise up in the atmosphere, hence the concentrations at ground level is not significant.

5. The DISPERSION PATTERN and the vulnerability zone is evaluated in a Matrix shows not much of a effect due to operations at the designed level.

6. Hence the installation designed and proposed to be adopted will be SAFE for operations. HEALTH MANAGEMENT (MEDIUM HAZARD UNIT)

1. Personal Hygiene practices shall be strictly implemented to avoid, inhalation and ingestion. 2. Designated PPE s while performing operations shall be worn without fail. 3. Competency of persons working shall be fully established. Work related trainings shall be imparted

periodically. 4. Roles and responsibilities shall be assigned clearly and reviewed periodically. 5. PPEs shall be kept at designated places and indicated on the layout plan. 6. Periodic Drills shall be conducted for emergency escape. 7. Fire fighting using first aid extinguishers and hydrant system shall be practiced at monthly

intervals.

e n - V I S I n


RISK ASSESSMENT& MANAGEMENT

1. Hazardous materials list is prepared for raw materials / intermediate products. Analyzed for possible On-site Emergency and Off site emergency conditions.

2. Threshold Planned quantities (TPQ) are planned for the plant operations. Most of the raw materials are indigenous and locally procured. Hence the storage of materials are planned as per requirement. Makeup quantities shall be planned as an on-line system liking to the quantity of storage.

3. QRA analysis done for the hazardous raw materials. Vulnerability study done to assess the impact on the nearby areas / Working persons inside the plant.

4. Quantum of Raw materials / Finished products are so low that there is practically no vulnerability zone. Persons working in the plant, who are away by 10 m down wind direction and 5 m on cross wind direction, are safe to work with designated PPEs.

5. It is easy to control the manpower due to less number of employees and automated systems of processes.

6. Incompatibility standards of storage of hazardous materials advised, to avoid any escalation of risk. As the storage space is limited, Vertical storage is advised with suitable design of racks.

6.2.6 RISK PREVENTION AND RISK MITIGATION Accident prevention is the primary safety goal of any organization. There are risks that can be eliminated through preventive measures and those which can be reduced through mitigation measures. 6.2.6.1 PREVENTIVE MEASURES The 4 E’s for elimination of hazards and prevent accidents are as follows:

• Engineering and technological innovation to improve reliability • Experience in the study of hazards and operations- Risk analysis • Enforcement of decisions on study results – Preventive mechanisms • Education, awareness, and practice in prevention of accidents (Training & drills)

Various measures will be adopted at each stage of the project for ensuring safety of people, environment, and property. These measures include the following:

• Site selection • Choice of technology • Equipment design incorporating domestic and international safety codes • Plant layout with utmost consideration given to operational safety aspects • Incorporation of interlocks and protection systems in plant design • Safety awareness for key management persons • Safety training of all operational , maintenance staff • Regular safety monitoring - Audits and inspections

A. Site Selection The plant is located near National highway and Ankleshwer city. The site soil conditions are rigid and safe, complying with the requirements of the load bearing capacity of various installations. Bharuch Municipal Corporation will provide adequate support for firefighting, on demand and continuous water and power supply from state electricity department. B. Choice of Technology The process is carefully chosen for reducing wastes, reducing the risk to human beings and the environment. It is the proven one and acknowledged internationally.

e n - V I S I n


C. Equipment Design Mechanical

1. All process equipments operating under pressure are designed as per ASME Section VIII pressure vessel code for un-fired pressure vessels. The material of construction selected is compatible with the chemicals handled to ensure minimum corrosion effects.

2. Heat exchangers are designed as per TEMA Class B and Class C standards as applicable. 3. Process tanks and vessels are sized taking into account minimum storage of intermediates and are

provided with adequate instrumentation to measure temperature, pressure, level etc. 4. All process pumps are either glandless canned or provided with double mechanical seals to ensure

no leakage during operation. Critical process pumps are also provided with bearing temperature monitors which will ensure timely maintenance of rotating parts.

Piping 1. All pipes, fittings, and valves carrying the haz-chem are made of appropriate grade Steel, stainless

steel and with PTFE (Teflon) envelop gaskets. 2. All pipes carrying haz-chem are designed to ensure non-restrictive flow from one equipment to

another with minimum hold up of haz-chem in the lines. 3. All pipelines will be color coded as per the standard for easy identification of materials. 4. Pipeline sizes will be chosen such that pressure drops due to flow will be within permitted limits.

Critical velocity parameters are exceeded to avoid static electricity generation. 5. Wherever required, design incorporates suitable by-pass system to carry out maintenance work

during plant operations and also to enable sectional close-down during machinery break down, etc. 6. Safety valves, relief valves, breather valves and rupture discs are mounted on hook-up piping to all

critical equipment. 7. Moderately warm pipes carrying fluids at > 50-60 °C will be insulated from the point of personnel

protection. 8. All manually operated valves will be located within easy reach of operator and at a operable height.

Wherever necessary approach platforms will be provided. 9. Adequate number of flange joints shall be provided with adequate supports in long lines for easy

dismantling and maintenance. Electrical

1. Plant areas are segregated into zone areas as per the hazards present, with adequate distances to separate the two zones vide Petroleum Rules.

2. Areas designated as Zone -0,1 areas will have all electrical fixtures including lighting fixtures, switches, junction boxes, cable glands, etc. of approved make and flameproof type.

3. For stand by power diesel generator of adequate capacity will be installed with auto-start facility in case of power trip/failure. This DG set will be located far away from the processing area.

4. All tanks, pumps, tankers, and pipelines are properly earthed and bonded for electrical continuity and prevention of static electric charges. Double earthing will be provided to drain electrical charge to two independent earth pits.

5. All incomers to the electrical panels including MCCs and PCC will have air circuit breakers of adequate capacity for electrical protection of equipments connected to the outgoing feeders.

6. All feeders in MCCs and PCC will have user point identification at both termination ends for easy tracking of faults and rectification.

7. Adequate ventilation fans will be provided in electrical panels for effective heat dissipation. 8. Earthing pits locations and requirements with looping grids shall be provided as per the legal and

regulatory requirements. 9. Overhead cable routing will take into account safe distances from buildings and facilities.

Underground cabling shall be marked with metal markers as per the regulatory requirements. 10. All panels will have incomer earth fault relay. 11. Lightning arrestors will be provided on top of all structures. 12. All cables running on trays at elevation shall be properly dressed up and tied with clamps for

rigidity. 13. All areas of plant and machinery and roads including all open operating areas are illuminated

sufficiently to carry out operations round the clock.

e n - V I S I n


D. Plant Layout 1. The plant is laid out in such a way that hazards are either eliminated or isolated so as to manage it

effectively. 2. The location of the disaster prone areas of the plant is such that, they cause less impact to the

nearby factories or inhabitations. 3. Room housing heat generating equipment or containing chemicals are well-ventilated with

adequate air circulation. 4. Process Plants which handles hazchem are designed as an open structure with all sides open for

adequate ventilation 5. Administrative office is located away from process plants and storage tanks. 6. Security office is located close to gate and away from process plants and storage area. 7. Workers’ rest area, shower, and first aid center area located close to administrative office, away

from process plants. 8. Canteen is located close to administrative office and away from process plants. 9. Adequate number of safety showers and eye wash fountains are provided in areas close to storage

facilities and process plants and on each floor wherever necessary 10. A separate area has been provided on site in the upwind direction for emergency evacuation-

Assembly Points. 11. Interconnecting roads within the plot are made circular so that more than one get-away is available

at any point. 12. Proper drainage and enclosures are provided to drain away storm water from unforeseen flooding. 13. Flame proof areas have been isolated from the non-flameproof areas. 14. DG room and electrical transformer located away from administrative office, process plant and

storage area. 15. The storage area of hazchem is located in an isolated area, with adequate facilities for handling

spills and leakages. 16. Fire hydrant system covers the entire operating area of the plant. 17. Warning boards will be put up in areas where entry is restricted 18. No Smoking boards will be put up at the entrance and at other locations throughout the plant 19. Boards showing the numbers and contact details of government / district officials as well as fire

department, police department, district commissioner, etc. will be installed at security gate as well as in the operational area.

20. Battery-cum-electrically operated emergency alarms will be made available. 21. Speed breakers and speed limit signs will be displayed as required 22. Hazardous chemicals shall be stored as per compatibility and based on corrosive and reactive

capabilities as per the guidelines in the MSDS. 23. MSDS of all hazardous chemicals will be kept in the areas where such materials are used and

stored. 24. Waste containers will be located at appropriate locations throughout the plant, and will be coded

according to the type of waste.

F. Safety Awareness for Key Management 1. Key management personnel will be made aware from the beginning of the project of the key issues

regarding the safety in design and operation of the plant. 2. Project management personnel have visited several industrial plants where hazchem is used in bulk

as a raw material for the production of finished products. Discussions with operational staff of the plants during these visits has given them valuable insight into the safety aspects of handling of hazchems.

3. Discussions on safe handling of hazchems have been carried out with various safety experts, technical collaborators, and with overseas suppliers through conference calls.

G. Safety Training for All Operational Staff 1. All operational staff will be given safety training as a compulsory part of their induction program. 2. Safety training will include, among other things, the following important aspects:

a. awareness of hazards of individual chemicals through study of MSDS b. correct usage of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) c. explanation of the hazards and risks present in the premises, as well as their analysis

e n - V I S I n


d. impact on safety, health, and environment due to improper handling of hazardous chemicals

e. guidelines for safety in operations f. Do’s and Don'ts

H. Safety Audits and Inspections

1. Regular safety audit will be conducted to ascertain the safety levels followed in the plant and suggestions for improvement

2. Special safety audits will be conducted whenever there are process-related equipment / operational changes made in the plant

3. Testing and inspection of high pressure equipment with periodical hydrotesting and thickness testing will be carried out during maintenance shutdown

4. Testing of pressure safety valves and setting will be carried out once in a year during maintenance shutdown

5. Calibration of control valves, instruments as and when required, but at least once in a year during maintenance shutdown

6. Testing of electrical measurements, such as earthing resistance, will be carried out every year. 7. Testing of all fire hydrant installations, fire extinguishers, fire pumps, fire water level monitors will

be carried regularly. 6.2.6.2 MITIGATION MEASURES Risk mitigation involves the reduction of the likelihood of a loss occurring due to an accident and the reduction of the severity of such a loss. Several risk mitigation measures have been taken into consideration in the planning of this project:

• Personal Protective Equipment • Medical facilities • Handling of leakages and spills • Firefighting system • Engineering controls • Emergency Control Centre • Disaster Management Plan

A. Personal Protective Equipment Personal protective equipment (PPE) are needed to protect individuals from injury. Several types of PPE are necessary for providing the optimum protection to individuals from the various risks. In addition to the PPE which will be used for regular plant operation, the following PPE has been selected for preservation at the plant’s Emergency Control Centre room for use in case of emergency:

1. Self contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) 1 sets 2. Chemical face masks 20 sets 3. Full body chemical suits with goggles 1 sets 4. Firefighting suits 2 sets 5. Helmets 20 pieces 6. Chemical resistant gloves 10 pairs

Details of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE’s), its Care and Management System proposed by the company are given as follow: Training:

1. Induction Training: All employees including contract workmen given Induction training at the time of Joining for proper use of safety equipment and PPEs with demonstration.

e n - V I S I n


2. Special Training: Company will arrange Special training for types of PPEs and adequate Use of PPEs as per training calendar.

3. On Job training: During On Job training , company will cover the right Use of PPEs as hazard and work

4. Training for Self Contained Breathing Apparatus and Emergency Life Saving Apparatus: Company arranges training for Use of Self Contained Breathing Apparatus and Emergency Life Saving Apparatus for all Employee including contract workmen.

Body Protection (Non Respiratory): 1. Protecting Clothing

1. Chemical Resistant Suit: for protection against chemical other then Acid. 2. PVC Suit: for protection against Acid & Alkali other then Hydrofluoric Acid 3. Apron: for working in Laboratory, Laboratory Apron is compulsory.

2. Head Protection (Safety Helmet): Use of different color helmet for easy identification during the Emergency Situation. • Yellow Color Helmet : for the Employees of the company • Green Color Helmet : for Contract Workmen. • White Color Helmet : for Visitor • Blue Color Helmet : for Incident Controller at time of Emergency Handling.

3. Face & Eye Protection : 1. Face Shield: For working at Hazardous chemical, grinding work etc. 2. Safety Spectacles: for working in anywhere in plant side. 3. Safety Goggle: for covering of Full eye at time of certain defined job.

4. Ear Protection : Ear Muff/Ear Plug: For working in High noise area.

5. Hand Protection: 1. PVC Gloves: For Hazardous chemicals like Acid, alkali, Hydrocarbons etc. 2. Chemical Resistant Gloves (Neoprene): for Chemical where PVC gloves not suitable. 3. Leather Gloves: for protection from cuts, abrasions, flying particles mildly hot materials. 4. Rubber Gloves (Electrical): for electrical work available with different voltage ratings 5. Rubber Gloves: for chemicals, oil greases

6. Foot Protection: 1. Safety Shoes: all employees of the company should wear safety shoes compulsory. 2. Gum Boot: for working in water, deep mud or bottom sediment.

Respiratory Protection: 1. Air Purifying Type:

1. Dust Mask: for protection against dust particle use at dusting atmosphere. 2. Chemical Cartridges Respirators: for toxic gaseous area. It is used for exit from the area if any gas

leakage.

2. Air Supplying Type: 1. Self Contain Breathing Apparatus (SCBA): for emergency Handing. 2. Emergency Life Saving Apparatus (ELSA): as like SCBA but its capacity is low. 3. Air Hood Mask: for working in Confined space or gaseous atmosphere, there will be continue supply

of Fresh air by Blower.

e n - V I S I n


General Protection: 1. Safety Belt: double harness full body safety belt is compulsory for work at height. 2. Safety Net: used for work at height. 3. Safety Shower: for first aid treatment in case of chemical exposure on body 4. Eye Washer Fountains: for first aid treatment in case of eye exposure. Care of PPE’s:

Each and every personal protective equipments should be visual checked by the user for its integrity before its use and, if any defects are observed, the concerned supervisor should be promptly informed and the defects corrected or PPE replaced.

Self contained breathing apparatus must be inspected monthly and details of the inspection and maintenance recorded.

All employees should familiarize themselves with different types of PPEs available in the company. When not in use, PPE should be carefully stored in a designated place. Do not put it in tool box where it

is likely to be damaged or allow it to lie in an open place where it may collect dust. Store PPE in a safe place well covered, away from sunlight and dust.

Do not use the PPE’s other than its purpose or don’t temper with any PPE’s. B. Medical Facilities Medical facilities are needed to provide immediate medical attention to people who may be exposed to certain health risks during an accident.

1. First Aid Centre will be located at the Workers’ Facility near the administrative building and canteen.

2. A doctor will visit the plant periodically. 3. First Aid Centre will be equipped with a safety shower, eye wash centre and oxygen-administering

facility, etc. 4. Medicines and antidotes for relevant hazardous chemicals will be stored for 5 persons. 5. The contact numbers of all nearby hospitals and medical facilities will be kept and put up on a

board in the First Aid Centre. 6. A general agreement for immediate treatment will be made between the nearest hospital and the

plant. C. Handling of Leakages and Spills Quick and safe handling of leakages and spills is the most effective method of risk mitigation in the plant. The company will take the following steps to ensure that leakages and spills can be effectively handled:

1. Ensuring availability and provisioning of suitable PPE for handling spills and leakages. 2. Preparation of handling manuals and placement of the same at important locations. 3. Placement of sand buckets, AFFF (aqueous film forming foam) fire extinguishers, and dry chemical

(potassium bicarbonate-based) fire extinguishers at high risk areas. 4. Provisioning of specially marked containers for disposal of spillages. 5. Decontamination area has been earmarked for clothing contaminated by spills. 6. Creation of dykes in the areas where likelihood of spillages and leakage is greatest. 7. Eye-wash stations and showers.

In case the leakage or spill can be handled by on-site trained personnel using proper protective clothing and equipment, the incident is not considered an emergency situation. Such non-emergency situations can include malfunctioning pumps, defective pipelines or leaking valves or seals. Also small spills may occur but can generally be handled without alarm. The MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO can be suitably handled without creating an emergency situation. In the WORST CASE ACCIDENT SCENARIO, the designated incident controller will be alerted and he will ensure that the emergency is properly dealt with and mitigated with all resources available at our disposal, as per the guidelines laid out in the Disaster Management Plan.

e n - V I S I n


D. Firefighting Systems Due to the handling of flammable chemicals in the plant, it is necessary to provide an effective and efficient firefighting system. Some of the salient features of firefighting system of M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. are described as follows:

1. Fire water tank having capacity of 400 KL and pump having capacity of 100 HP will be based on the number of monitors, risers, and outlets provided.

2. All firewater piping is located above ground to prevent hidden corrosion effects.

3. All fire hydrant points will have two independent ring mains for adequate water flow and safety. All fire Nozzles shall be Spray type OR Mist type suitable for surround fighting system.

M/s. Krifore Industries Pvt. Ltd. management shall take into consideration fire prevention measures at the project planning and during plant commissioning stage to avoid any outbreak of fire. But looking to the hazardous nature of manufacturing operation shall be handled and processed, the chances of outbreak of fire is however less but cannot be refuted. Hence to avoid such a scenario, a well laid fire protection system will be provided in the factory. List of proposed fire fighting equipments are given in table-6.11. TABLE-6.11 LIST OF PROPOSED FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENTS

SR. NO. NAME OF EQUIPMENT TYPE NOs

1. DCP type fire extinguishers 5 kg – 5

7 10 kg – 2

2. CO2 type fire extinguishers 6.8 kg – 2 3

10 kg – 1

3. Hydrant Post - 10

4. Fire Sand Bucket Stand of Six bucket 1

E. Emergency Control Centre The Emergency Control Centre is a designated room that shall be occupied by the Incident Controller, the final authority to give directives, coordinate with various teams, communicate with district government agencies, and to deal with an emergency inside the plant. The following documents and equipment shall be kept here for the use of the Incident Controller during an emergency:

• Updated drawings and P&I diagrams of plant

• Site layout plan showing raw materials and finished products storage area, security gates, assembly points, process plants, utility building and other areas of the plant

• Disaster Management Plan

• List of key plant operating personnel

• Telephone numbers and contact details of key plant operating personnel

• Telephone numbers and contact details of district government officials and emergency offices

• Personal Protective Equipment for emergency use

• Fire extinguishers (dry chemical powder filled) 6.2.6.3 DO’S AND DON’TS Suitable notices / boards displayed at several locations indicating appropriate hazards warning as well as DOs and DON’T for ensuring operational and personal Safety for information of workers / staff and visitors.

e n - V I S I n


Do’s: 1) Check the available raw material as per the job on hand required for all stages. 2) For good physical condition, check the vessels expected to be used in the process. 3) Check the availability of utilities required till the end of the batch / job. 4) Check for proper manpower available till the entire operation in over. 5) Each and every equipments including the stand-by should be in operable condition. 6) Verify the test certificates of materials being taken for process. 7) Time schedule should prepare for material flow on basis of the process. 8) Monitor the temperature and pressure if possible during the process. 9) Use pumps for transferring the liquids to the reactor tank. 10) Familiarize the worker about what is the job on hand. 11) The worker or operator should have sufficient knowledge of the materials handling. 12) Visual instructions should properly display for characteristics of the chemicals. 13) Ensure proper training of personnel. 14) Ensure sufficient numbers of safety devices are available. 15) In view of the chemicals handled, whether required or not, please ensure availability of SCBA

apparatus near every use and storage area of chemical. 16) Ensure the workers wear proper PPE of adequate grade. 17) Demarcation of the chemical storage area for chemical in test. 18) Ensure removal of used containers from workspaces. 19) Prepare and follow the safe work instruction. 20) Record every incident that led to an accident irrespective of the seriousness of the accident and

analyze the same to improvise the system continuously. 21) Always check the fire water tank to be filled up to the brim to ensure availability of fire water in

sufficient quantity at all times. The design of other water to be used shall be from the overflow of the fire water tank to ensure this system.

22) Never work bare foot or without safety shoes. 23) Never use mobile phones in work zones. 24) Use only proper grade PPEs and use them properly. 25) Open or use containers only on written instruction. 26) Verify the label with the instruction before use. 27) Participate wholeheartedly in all safety related exercises an keep yourself updated.

Don’ts:

1) Without checking of raw material don’t use it as per the job on hand required for all stages. 2) Don’t use the vessels expected to be used in the process without checking. 3) Don’t fail to check the availability of utilities required till the end of the batch / job 4) Don’t work without enough and proper manpower. 5) Don’t use the equipments which are not in operable condition. 6) Don’t use the materials for process without verify the test certificates. 7) Don’t use the material without Prepare time schedule of material flow on basis of the process. 8) Don’t perform without Monitoring the temperature and pressure during process. 9) Don’t handle chemicals with open hands where manual handling is a must. 10) Don’t keep the workers under wraps about what is the job on hand. 11) Don’t let the worker / operator do the work having lack of sufficient knowledge of the materials

handled. 12) Don’t use the chemical with unknown characteristics or having unreadable label. 13) Don’t let the personnel do the work without giving proper training. 14) Don’t work without sufficient numbers of safety devices. 15) Don’t let the workers do work without wearing proper PPE of adequate grade. 16) Don’t use material that is under testing for production. 17) Don’t store used containers at workspaces. 18) Don’t breach the safe work instruction.

e n - V I S I n


19) Don’t try to conceal information regarding missed accidents or small injuries. Remember every and any mishap can be fatal if not for yourself for others.

20) After any shutdown never start operation without having ensured the fire water tank filled up. 21) Don’t work bare foot or without safety shoes. 22) Don’t use mobile phones in work zones. 23) Do not use PPEs which are not relevant to the operational aspect that has been identified. 24) Don’t open or use containers on which instruction are not written. 25) Don’t work without Verifying the label with the instruction before use. 26) Don’t ever even thinking of evading safety instructions.

6.2.7 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN 6.2.7.1 OBJECTIVES OF EMERGENCY PROCEDURES Measures those are required to be taken during emergency are co-ordination of activities with many departments/ services and outside resources. The objective of the procedure is to define role of key personnel of different services during major emergency to be effectively utilized to:

1) Safeguard lives 2) Contains of incident and bring it under control 3) Minimize damage to property & neighboring environment 4) Rescue & treatment of casualties & evacuation of persons to safe areas 5) Identification of affected persons, information to relatives and extending necessary assistance. 6) Preservation of information, records etc. which will help in investigation 7) Welfare assistance to casualties 8) Providing relevant information to police, district authorities and news media 9) Mobilizing inside resources 10) Initiating and organizing evacuation of affected persons

Collecting latest status, other information and requirement 6.2.7.2 BASIS OF PLAN AND HANDLING OF EMERGENCY

1) It is not possible to envisage and detail every action, which should be taken during an emergency. The basic philosophy is to get key personnel of necessary discipline who have the knowledge and background to assess the situation and give directions as per the objectives as quickly as possible.

2) The plan identifies the services/departments required to combat emergencies and also identifies the key persons to discharge the duties.

3) Key personnel have been identified for emergencies and are responsible for providing necessary assistance.

4) Any outside assistance, which company shall get, shall be co-ordinate by the main site controller on duty.

5) Messages via telephones are restricted to key personnel only. This is required to keep the telephones free for key personnel to contact for necessary feed-back.

6) Senior person who arrives on scene is automatically in charge for the service group. He should not leave the site without entrusting the charge to his deputy. All the key personnel should be available at the main control room. All key personnel of other services will report to main site controller, who will co- ordinate between various departments and outside agencies.

6.2.7.3 INFORMATION ABOUT EMERGENCY AND SUBSEQUENT ACTIONS

1) Any person noticing fire/explosion/re lease of hazardous gases should shout FIRE, FIRE or HELP, HELP and will activate the emergency bell

2) Inform respective control rooms

e n - V I S I n


3) The Executive in-charge along with the concerned Dept. Head will immediately rush to the incidence site to assess and take immediate action required to control the source of incidence. They will also inform Security and Safety personnel to come to the place of disaster/emergency and assist them.

4) If he feels that the situation is likely to escalate and may lead to emergency will communicate following minimum information to all senior persons.

a) Brief description of incident. b) Status & seriousness of the situation c) Actions immediately taken. d) Immediate assistance required. e) All key personnel of respective services, depending on nature of emergency will arrive at site

to take charge of positions. 6.2.7.4 INSTRUCTIONS TO EMPLOYEES The plan assumes certain discipline at site during emergency as given below;

1) Do not get panicky 2) Do not approach the scene of disaster as a spectator 3) Do not engage phones/ P.A. system unnecessarily 4) Non-essential personnel to gather at security gate after receiving instructions 5) Do not move here & there unnecessarily 6) Do not approach unnecessarily to get information or more inquiry 7) Remain at your working place unless called and be attentive to instructions 8) Ensure that all contract laborers working in the premises are immediately sent to main security gate.

They will receive further instructions from main site controller All non - essential staff members should gather at safe assembly point after assessing the wind direction (from the wind sock, stack of boiler chimney) and wait for further instructions which will be communicated through PA system or by other available means. 6.2.7.5 INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTORS The plan assumes certain discipline at site during emergencies as given below;

1) Do not get panicky 2) Do not approach the scene of disaster as a spectator 3) Do not engage phones/ P.A. system unnecessarily 4) Non-essential personnel to gather at security gate after receiving instructions 5) Do not move here & there unnecessarily. 6) Do not approach unnecessarily for information or more inquiry. 7) Remain at your working place unless called and be attentive to instructions 8) Ensure that all contract laborers working in the premises are immediately sent to main security gate.

They will receive further instructions from main controller. All should gather at safe assembly points after assessing the wind direction (from the wind sock, stack of boiler chimney) and wait for further instructions which will be communicated through PA system or by other available means.

9) All fabricator contractors should ensure that all welding machines are switched off and all cylinders are closed before leaving the working area.

10) All civil contractors should be gathered at assembly points after declared emergency. 6.2.7.6 MITIGATION OF CONSEQUENCES DURING MAJOR ACCIDENT No major hazard installation can ever be absolutely safe. Even if a hazard assessment has been carried out, if the hazards have been detected and appropriate measures have been taken, the possibility of an accident cannot be completely ruled out. So safely systems provide measures, which can mitigate the consequences of accident or emergency situation. In order to be able to initiate counter measures in the event of an accident, company shall install various safety systems to mitigate the consequences during Major Accident are as under:

e n - V I S I n


(1) Emergency Control members available round the clock in all plants (2) ECC room with full equipped with Fire Fighting Equipment (3) TAC approved Fire Hydrant system with electric motor and D.G. Set and water reserved for fire

fighting (4) Alarm System and method of reporting / declaring emergency (5) Regular rehearsal of emergency preparedness (6) Training to all employees regarding emergency preparedness (7) MSDS of all hazardous chemicals are available in safety department and in concerned department.

6.2.7.7 EMERGENCY CONTROL CENTRE WITH LIST OF EQUIPMENT AND

ACCESSORIES Safety Office in front of Operation Building will act as Emergency Control Center. It is equipped with all necessary accessories as mentioned below.

(A) DOCUMENTS - Site Plan - Disaster Control Plan copy - List of essential telephone numbers - List firefighting equipment - Shift Schedule of Emergency Control members

(B) PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT - B. A. Sets (Breathing Apparatus) - Face Masks - Hand gloves - Gum boots - Goggles - Helmets - Safety belts - Aprons - Fire proximity suit

(C) EQUIPMENT LIST - Internal / External Telephone - Portable alarm - Torches - Emergency Cupboard with necessary PPE - Artificial Respirator - Racer watches (STOP WATCH) - Gas Detector Tube - Static Charge Meter

6.2.7.8 INFORMATION REGARDING KEY PERSONS AND THEIR RESPONSIBILITIES

DURING EMERGENCY A. SITE MAIN CONTROLLER After getting information of emergency, the site main controller will rushed to the Emergency Control Center immediately.

1) On reaching he will assess the magnitude of the situation in consultation with Incident Controller and decide whether inside or outside help are to be called (i.e. Fire Service, Police, Ambulance etc.)

2) Ensure that key persons are called in. 3) Give guidance and direction in vital and important activities to control the emergency situation.

e n - V I S I n


4) Direct to close down and evacuation of the plants in consultation with Incident controller and key personnel.

5) If necessary arrange for evacuation of neighboring population. 6) Inform the Government authorities such as Collector, MC, Factory Inspector, Health Officer &

medical Officer and request them for their help as situation demands. 7) Give prime importance to human life and guidance in organizing the rescue operations as well as

ensure whether injured people getting proper medical attention in time. 8) Always be in touch with the Incident Controller to get further progress and decide further plan. 9) On completion of emergency situation declare the normalcy through Administrative Officer. 10) Control the re-occupation of the affected areas on discontinuation of emergency. 11) Do not permit to re-start the plant unless it is safe. 12) Give authentic statement of the incident to News Media & Government Authorities.

B. INCIDENT CONTROLLER

1) Take the charge of situation and assess the magnitude of the event 2) Control and guide all the operations with priorities to the Safety of Personnel, minimize pollution,

loss of material and loss to the plant equipment and property. 3) Provide advice and guide to the Fire Fighting and Rescuing squad and Fire Brigade while they

arrive. 4) Establish communication with emergency control center. 5) Report on all significant developments to the emergency control center through phone/Messenger. 6) Ensure that evacuation of the areas in the factory getting affected is complete. 7) After the emergency situation is brought under control, assure that the necessary evidence for

further investigation in the incident is preserved and inform Site Controller regarding control of emergency.

C. TECHNICAL STAFF / DEPARTMENT HEAD 1) As soon as informed, rush to the spot and take charge of the situation till senior group arrives. 2) Ensure that emergency siren is raised which gives information to Security, Safety, Administration

Staff and Technical Staff. 3) On arrival of Incident Controller, inform him about the gravity of the situation and then to work

under his guidance to control the situation. 4) Ensure that only experienced and essential people remains at the location for controlling, while

others to be evacuated from the scene.

D. EMPLOYEES NEAR THE SPOT (INCIDENT AREA) The employees near affected area, under the guidance of the Incident Controller shall

1) Tackle the emergency as per laid down procedures for the area bearing in mind the requirements of the situation called for by the progress of the emergency.

2) Remove all non-essential employees (who are not assigned any emergency duty) shall evacuate the area and gather at the specified assembly points.

3) Stop the operations as per the information of the Incident Controller. E. EMPLOYEES OF OTHER DEPARTMENTS

1) On getting information of incident, take permission of superior and confirm own plant, department, safety and then after trained and skill persons will rush to incident spot with necessary personnel protective equipment.

2) Approach the spot from up wind direction and assemble at safe place near to the spot taking in to consideration the wind direction.

3) Extend help to control the situation as per the instruction and guidance given by the senior persons controlling the operation.

e n - V I S I n


F. PERSONNEL OFFICER 1) When emergency declared immediately rushed to emergency control center. 2) Basically he will work as a Liaison Officer and will stationed at emergency control center during

emergency. He will work under the direction of Site Controller. 3) To ensure that the casualties receives adequate attention at first aid center, also ensure additional

help if require from Government authorities or outside agencies. 4) Arrange transport facility for injured personnel to get timely medical help. 5) He will also arrange for head count at assembly points and will inform Site Controller. 6) Also be in touch with the Security and Other Departments for help. 7) Will check the Roll call from Time Office for availability of trained personnel during emergency

situation at the site. 8) Determine the need to inform statutory authorities of the accident and fill the necessary forms for

submission with consultation of the Site Controller. 9) When emergency is prolonged, arrange for the relief of personnel as well as inform the families of

injured persons and organize refreshments / catering facility. G. ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICER

1) When emergency declared, immediately rushed to the emergency control center and establish contact with Site Main Controller.

2) Ensure the communication between site controller and incident controller. Keep messenger for communication.

3) Make arrangement to send portable megaphone and torches to the Incident Controller if required. 4) On receiving instructions from Site Controller, organize transportation for the evacuation of people

from the assembly points. 5) As per instructions from Site Controller will inform to Head Office, Insurance Surveyor, other

relevant authorities and neighboring areas. 6) On getting instructions from Site Controller / Incident Controller, he will be in touch with other

Industries for help in emergency. 7) Will arrange to announce necessary instructions for all personnel. 8) Ensure that telephone operator keeps the EPABX free to extend possible for incoming calls. 9) Ensure that Press and other Media do not publish unauthentic news.

H. ENGINEERING SERVICES KEY PERSONNEL

1) When emergency declared, immediately proceed to Emergency Control Center. 2) Ensure the availability of electrical wiremen, utility, maintenance employees and drivers. 3) Ensure the water supply & electric power generator in case of power failure. 4) Be in touch with the Site controller / Incident Controller to extend help as and when required. 5) Ensure availability of Light Motor Vehicles as well as Fork Lifts, JCBs etc. 6) Arrange the vehicle as per required by Administrative / Personnel Officer.

I. SECURITY & FIRE IN-CHARGE 1) When emergency declared, ensure that the Fire man in the fire station and Security guards at the main

gate are sufficient. 2) On getting instruction from Site Controller/Incident controller, cordon the affected area to maintain

law and order. 3) As per instruction from Site Controller/ Incident controller, arrange to start the fire hydrant pump. 4) Ensure the following duties by Security Guards;

- Stop all vehicles and visitors entering into the factory, except any Government authorities such as Fire Brigade, Police, Factory Inspector, Medical Staff and inform the Administrative Officer on their arrival.

- If any press reporter and local Leader comes at the main gate, take them to the Administration Office.

- Do not allow any vehicle to park at the main gate or nearby at main road.

e n - V I S I n


- Assure that the entrance of the gate is clear for thorough fare. In Similar way control/ guide internal traffic for smooth operations.

- Act according instructions given by Personnel and Administrative Officer. - Ensure that all essential personnel evacuated and assembled at Assembly points. - Arrange effective security nearby the incident place.

J. FIRST AID ATTENDANTS

1) As per the instructions given by the Incident Controller, arrange the supply of additional emergency related equipment to the incident place. Give necessary First Aid treatment to the affected persons immediately.

2) Inform the Personnel and Administration Officer regarding the severity of injury and advise for further medical help if necessary.

3) Ask for additional trained First-Aider, if required. 4) On arrival of Doctor, assist him to give medical treatment to the affected people.

K. SAFETY OFFICER

1) On hearing emergency siren rush to the spot and assume the position of incident controller and take care of the situation till a senior personnel arrives and on their arrival work with them in team, extending their own expertise.

2) Give instructions and guideline to the people involved in control measures. As well as help in providing required PPE.

3) Give instructions to the safety attendants. 4) Brief the Site Main Controller about the progress of control measures. 5) Advise site controller regarding type of help required from outside. 6) Give instructions to other department through internal phones /Communication Officer. 7) Make arrangement to carry out monitoring whenever necessary and appraise results to the concerned

seniors. L. ESSENTIAL EMPLOYEES AND THEIRS DUTIES

[a] Fireman: 1) On getting information, check the water level in emergency tanks and overhead /underground storage

tanks. Maintain the emergency tank water level to its fullest capacity. 2) Start fire hydrant pump as per the instruction from Security & Fire in-charge. 3) Ensure continuous water supply to the incident place. 4) Do not leave the Fire Hydrant pump house till further instruction

[b] Driver:

1) On getting information from Communication Officer remain alert and wait for further instructions along with Ambulance van to meet with emergency.

2) Extend help to shift the injured people from site of incident to First-Aid and if required to hospital through Ambulance / Other vehicle.

3) For material handling take Fork-lift / JCB to the spot if required.

[c] Electrical/Utility Personnel: 1) After getting the information rush to the spot with necessary personal protective equipment and if

instructed by incident controller cut off the power supply to the affected area. 2) Ensure that the D.G. Set is in running condition. 3) Extend help to the Utility Operator in maintaining adequate supply of water and others under

guidance of Supervisors. 4) Water in water hydrant storage tank is in full capacity or not

e n - V I S I n


6.2.7.9 EMERGENCY ORGANIZATION FOR IDLE HOURS 1. SECURITY i) After getting information through emergency hooter inform at least two senior persons at their

residence by telephone/messenger.

(a) Site controller

(b) Safety Officer

(c) Incident controller.

(d) Technical Staff/Senior Staff

ii) Assure that the front side of the gate is clear for thoroughfare.

iii) Act according to the instructions of Incident Controller/Senior Officers iv) Inform Emergency Control Center for emergency. 2. SAFETY/FIRST AID ATTENDANT One attendant remains present around the clock.

Duties: 1) On hearing emergency hooter does not leave the Occupational Health Center. 2) As per the instructions given by the person In charge of the emergency operation or Incident

Controller arrange the supply of additional emergency safety equipment to incident place. 3) Give necessary first aid to the affected person immediately. Inform the site controller about the

severity of the Injury and advice for further medical help if required. On arrival of doctor, assist him for medical treatment offered to the affected people.

6.2.7.10 LIST OF IMPORTANT AUTHORITIES WITH THEIR ROLE IN EMERGENCY AND

TELEPHONE NUMBERS List of important authorities with their role in emergency and telephone numbers will be prepared and placed wherever required. 6.2.7.11 INFORMATION ABOUT EXTERNAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (1) Communication will be through Emergency Central Alarm System (2) Telephones: An EPABX unit will be installed to connect all departments internally. Company will also provide mobile connections to all important personnel at site. (3) STD PHONE & FAX/TELEX: Will be provided at important places (4) IN THE EVENT OF FAILURE OF TELEPHONE SYSTEM: Communication officer will arrange special messengers for communication Minimum one vehicle with driver/trained security personnel are available in the company premises round the clock. We will communicate through our Administration department by our vehicle to nearby community. 6.2.7.12 ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM DETAILS During emergency it is necessary that the alarm should be heard by all employees wherever they work, for that speakers will be placed at various locations within plant. 6.2.7.13 OUT SIDE IMPORTANT ADDRESSES AND PHONE NUMBERS List of important addresses in the nearby area such as hospitals, ambulance services, fire fighting services, Government personnel Municipal Commissioner, district collector, zilla panchayat, police station and emergency control services and their telephone numbers will be prepared and will be displayed outside emergency control room.

e n - V I S I n


6.2.7.14 REHERSAL AND UPDATION OF PLAN

1) Regular mock drills will be organized. Shortfalls in actions observed during drill will be explained to participants and will be corrected accordingly.

2) Any shortcomings regarding On–Site Emergency Plan observed during such drills will be corrected and incorporated in On-Site Emergency Plan and same will be communicated to all.

3) The On-Site Emergency Plan will be updated after any significant development in factory or change in the law.

6.2.7.15 INFORMATION OF ASSEMBLY POINTS At the time of emergency, non - essential workers, casual workers, visitors and others are to be replaced to Assembly Points and separate in charge are nominated. No of assembly points and location will be decided based on the layout of the plant. In case of an emergency, the visitors, contract persons and factory employees will gather at nearby assembly point. Pre-designated persons will take their roll call. If needed, they can be evacuated easily through any gate in a short period as per instruction of site main controller. 6.2.8 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PROGRAM FOR THE PROJECT Health hazards associated with the occupation are called occupational hazards. In chemical industry due to handling of toxic and hazardous chemicals there are possibilities of developing occupational diseases. Company shall carry out the following checks to curb the problem:

1. Pre - employment medical check up at the time of employment.

2. Annual medical check up shall be done for all employees.

3. First aid training shall be given to the employees.

4. Monitoring of occupational hazards like noise, ventilation, chemical exposure shall be carried out at frequent intervals, the records of which shall be documented.

TABLE-6.12 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH MONITORING

SR. NO. PARTICULAR MEDICAL TEST REMARK

1. Pre employment Check up

Vision, Audiometry, Spirometry, chest Skiagram, Unrin, RBS, etc. <30 yrs. Once in five years

31-40 yrs. Once in four years 41-50 yrs. Once in two years

Above >50 yrs. once every year

2. Periodical Check up Spirometry, Urin, RBS, etc. 3. Post employment

check up Vision, Audiometry, Spirometry, chest Skiagram, Unrin, RBS, ec.

All precautions would be taken to avoid foreseeable accident like spillage, fire and explosion hazards and to minimize the effect of any such accident and to combat the emergency at site level in case of emergency. Some of the preventive safety measures to minimize the risk of accident with respect to Technical Safety, Organizational Safety and Personal Safety are listed below:

- The factory will take all reasonably practicable measures to minimize the risk of such accident in compliance with the legal obligation under the relevant safety.

- All building plans and installations are as per relevant acts and duly approved by competent government authorities.

- Process and Equipment will be designed by qualified and experienced professionals and fabricated to applicable national / international codes with stage wise inspection.

- Safety features such as fire extinguisher and suitable Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) shall be provided. Regular operations and testing of fire extinguishers shall be carried out.

- Periodic inspection and testing of pressure vessels, equipment, machineries and equipment handling substances.

e n - V I S I n


- Training of workers and Staff for fire fighting, work permit system, first aid, safe handling of materials and integrating safety, in all activities.

- Accident / Incident reporting system and information of employees about the same for better awareness.

- Suitable notices / boards displayed at several locations indicating appropriate hazards warning as well as DOs and DON’T for ensuring operational and personal Safety for information of workers / staff and visitors.

For the safety of the workers, personal protective equipments like hand gloves, helmets, safety shoes, goggles, aprons etc. & Ear protecting devices like earplugs/earmuffs will be provided. Nose mask will be provided at places, where there is possibility of dust generation. List of Personnel Protective Equipment

1. Face Masks

2. Ear Plunge 3. Hand Gloves 4. Gum Boots 5. Goggles 6. Helmets

7. Aprons 8. Fire Proximity Suit

Company shall adequately install fire-fighting system in different sections of the plant. Some of the safeties precautionary measures shall be taken for manufacturing process are listed below:

i. Safety Relief Valve, Rupture disk, temperature scanner, pressure indicator, and flow meter will be installed to vessel wherever required.

ii. Cooling / Chilling water circulation arrangement will be provided to avoid abrupt increase of pressure and control heat and high temperature.

iii. Auto control system (ACS) to Monitor & Control. iv. Vent will be connected with scrubber as per the requirement. v. PPE will be provided to workers during charging of various raw materials and exhaust ventilation lines

will be provided as per requirement. vi. Necessary interlocking and alarm system will be installed wherever required.

6.2.8.1 PHYSICAL CONTAMINANT Major sources of the exposure to physical and chemical contaminant are shown in subsequent section. 6.2.8.1.1 NOISE SOURCES Compressors, Fans, Blowers, Material handlers, Material movement and D. G. Sets EFFECTS Hearing impairment, Hypertension, Ischemic heart disease, Annoyance, Sleep disturbance ATTENUATION AND CONSERVATION Tools for assessing noise levels A successful noise control program that focuses on engineering control of noise requires the institution of a hearing conservation plan and the use of proper monitoring equipment, surveys, maps, and modeling.

e n - V I S I n


A thorough hearing conservation plan should be established where noise exposure exceeds a 85-dBA time weighted average for eight hours. A good program consists of the following components:

• Noise measurement and analysis; • Engineering control of noise sources where feasible; • Administrative controls and personal protection where noise control is not feasible; • Audiometric testing; • Employee training and education; • Record keeping; and • Evaluation

CONTROL MEASURES:

• Introducing good acoustic design for the new production line • Adopting proper scheduling of construction activities • Scheduling noisy activities during the daytime periods • Operating well-maintained mechanical equipment on-site • Ensuring that equipment that may be intermittent in use should be shut down between work periods

or should be throttled down to a minimum • Using personnel protection gear such as earplugs, muffs, etc. • Controlling air-flow generated noise by adopting adequate sizing of inlet/outlet ducts • Installing noise barriers around air blowers, pumps, and generators to reduce noise impacts at

nearby receptors • Devising and implementing a rigorous inspection and maintenance program applicable to

equipment on-site 6.2.8.1.2 ERGONOMICS Ergonomics is the term applied to the field that studies and designs the human-machine interface to prevent illness and injury and to improve work performance. It attempts to ensure that jobs and work tasks are designed to be compatible with the capabilities of the workers. SOURCES: Some physical agents play an important role in ergonomics such as Force, Acceleration and Thermal factors. Force is an "important causal agent in injuries from lifting. Other Important ergonomic considerations include work duration, repetition, contact stresses, postures, and psychosocial issues. Work-Related Musculoskeletal Disorders Work-related musculoskeletal disorders (MSDs) are an important occupational health problem that can be managed using an ergonomics health and safety program. The term musculoskeletal disorders refers to chronic muscle, tendon, and nerve disorders caused by repetitive exertions, rapid motions, high forces, contact stresses, extreme postures, vibration, and/or low temperatures. Other commonly used terms for work-related musculoskeletal disorders include cumulative trauma disorders (CTDs), repetitive motion illnesses (RMIs), and repetitive strain injuries (RSIs). Some of these disorders fit established diagnostic criteria such as carpal tunnel syndrome or tendinitis. Other musculoskeletal disorders may be manifested by nonspecific pain. Some transient discomfort is normal consequence of work and is unavoidable, but discomfort that persists from day to day or interferes with activities of work or daily living should not be considered an acceptable outcome of work. Control Strategies The incidence and severity of MSDs are best controlled by an integrated ergonomics program. Major program elements include:

e n - V I S I n


• Recognition of the problem, • Evaluation of suspected jobs for possible risk factors. • Identification and evaluation of causative factors, • Involvement of workers as fully informed active participants, and • Appropriate health care for workers who have developed musculoskeletal disorders.

General programmatic controls should be implemented when risk of MSDs is recognized. These include:

• Education of workers, supervisors, engineers, and managers; • Early reporting of symptoms by workers; and • Ongoing surveillance and evaluation of injury, health and medical data, Job-specific controls are

directed to individual jobs associated with MSDs. These include engineering controls and administrative controls. Personal protection may he appropriate under some limited circumstances.

CONTROL MEASURES: Among engineering controls to eliminate or reduce risk factors from the job, the following may be considered:

• Using work, methods engineering, e.g., time study, motion analysis, to eliminate unnecessary motions and exertions.

• Using mechanical assists to eliminate or reduce exertions required to hold tools and work objects. • Selecting for designing tools that reduce force requirements, reduce holding time, and improve

postures. • Providing user-adjustable workstations that reduce reaching and improve postures. • Implementing quality control and maintenance programs that reduce unnecessary forces and

exertions, especially associated with non value-added work. Administrative controls reduce risk through reduction of exposure time and sharing the exposure among a larger group of workers. Examples include:

• Implementing work standards that permit workers to pause or stretch as necessary but at least once per hour.

• Re-allocating work assignments (e.g., using worker rotation or work enlargement) so that a worker does not spend an entire work shift per forming high-demand tasks.

Due to the complex nature of musculoskeletal disorders, there is no "one size fits all" approach to reducing the incidence and severity of cases. The following principles apply to selecting actions:

• Appropriate engineering and administrative controls will vary from industry to industry and company to company.

• Informed professional judgment is required to select the appropriate control measures. • Work-related MSDs typically require periods of weeks to months for recovery. Control measures

should be evaluated accordingly to determine their effectiveness. 6.2.8.1.3 HEAT STRESS Aim is to maintain body core temperature within +1 °C of normal (37 °C). This core body temperature range can be exceeded under certain circumstances with selected populations, environmental and physiologic monitoring, and other controls. Source: High temperature and humidity; direct sun or heat; limited air movement; physical exertion; poor physical condition; some medicines; inadequate tolerance for hot workplaces; and insufficient water intake can all lead to heat stress; working near furnace area. Different ways of heat disorders, health effects & cure are given below in table-6.13.

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-6.13 DIFFERENT KINDS OF HEAT DISORDERS & HEALTH EFFECTS & CURE

S. NO. DEFINITION PRIMARY SIGNS AND

SYMPTOMS MEDICAL TREATMENT

1. Heat Stroke - Most serious heat related disorder when the body's temperature regulation fails and body temperature rises to critical levels, It’s a medical emergency may result in death

Confusion; irrational behavior; loss of consciousness; convulsions; a lack of sweating (usually); hot, dry skin; and an abnormally high body temperature

Placed worker in a shady, cool area and the remove outer clothing; Provide the worker fluids (preferably water); circulate air to improve evaporative cooling

2. Heat Exhaustion - Partly due to exhaustion; it is a result of the combination of excessive heat and dehydration

headache, nausea, dizziness, weakness, thirst, and giddiness; Fainting or heat collapse

Remove from the hot environment and give fluid replacement. Encourage getting adequate rest, and when possible, ice packs should be applied.

3. Heat Cramps - Caused by performing hard physical labor in a hot environment.

electrolyte imbalance caused by sweating and are normally caused by the lack of water replenishment

Workers in hot environments drink water every 15 to 20 minutes and also drink carbohydrate-electrolyte replacement liquids

4. Heat Rashes - the skin is persistently wetted by unevaporated sweat

a red cluster of pimples or small blisters mainly in neck and upper chest, in the groin, under the breasts, and in elbow creases

provide a cooler, less humid environment, powder may be used to increase comfort, avoid using ointments or creams

Administrative or work practice controls to offset heat effects:

• Provide accurate verbal and written instructions, annual training programs, and other information about heat stress

• Acclimatize workers by exposing them to work in a hot environment for progressively longer periods.

• Replace fluids by providing cool water or any cool liquid (except alcoholic and caffeinated beverages) to workers and encourage them to drink small amounts frequently, e.g., one cup every 20 minutes. Ample supplies of liquids should be placed close to the work area.

• Reduce the physical demands by reducing physical exertion such as excessive lifting, climbing, or digging with heavy objects. Use relief workers or assign extra workers, and minimize overexertion.

• Provide recovery areas such as air-conditioned enclosures and rooms and provide intermittent rest periods with water breaks.

• Reschedule hot jobs for the cooler part of the day, and routine maintenance and repair work in hot areas should be scheduled for the cooler seasons of the year.

• Monitor workers who are at risk of heat stress, such as those wearing semi-permeable or impermeable clothing when the temperature exceeds 70°F, while working at high energy levels. Personal monitoring can be done by checking the heart rate, recovery heart rate, and oral temperature.

Lighting & illuminations are important portions for all industries. Sufficient light should be provided in and around proposed plant areas, Details of recommended illuminations are given below in the following table-6.14.

e n - V I S I n


TABLE-6.14 ILLUMINATIONS

NO. LOCATION ILLUMINATION BY ILLUMINATION IN LUX

1. Low roof buildings Fluorescent tube lights 100-150/300 (control rooms)

2. Shops/ High roof building HPSV lamps 100-150

3. High color rendering required (low color distortion)

Metal halide lamp fittings -

4. Open yard and area illumination HPSV flood light fittings 15-30

The use of energy saving. Power factor lamp fittings shall be preferred. 6.2.8.2 MEDICAL AID SCHEME For outside help, company authority will make a mutual understanding with the following authorities to extend their help whenever an emergency occurs;

(1) Doctors from Civil Hospital (2) Police Station (3) Fire Brigade

Time to time company shall inform/impart training to concerned employees for awareness about chemicals and its hazards and the precautionary measures on their part. An emergency guide will be provided to each employee, which gives guidance to him or her during an emergency.

e n - V I S I n


CHAPTER – 7 PROJECT BENEFITS 7.1 PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE The beneficial impact of proposed project on the civic amenities will be substantial after the commencement of project activities. The basic requirement of the community needs will be strengthened by extending healthcare to the community, building/strengthening of existing roads in the area which will help in uplifting the living standards of local communities. 7.2 EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES The project will create opportunities for direct and indirect employment for which skilled and unskilled manpower will be needed. Secondary jobs are day-to-day needs and services to the work force. This will also temporarily increase the demand for essential daily utilities in the local market. Indirect Employment: Due to the proposed project indirect employments will be generated. Indirect employments like; Primary requirements, Grocery shops, Residential requirements, Garments requirements, Transportation facilities, Health care facilities, etc. These kinds of requirements will increase the prevailing scenario, which will generate the indirect employment. Local villagers of the project will get its benefits more by giving preference to them in relation to direct employment associated with the various project activities. Construction and operation phase of the proposed project will involve a certain number of laborers, contractors and construction workers. There is a possibility that local people will be engaged for this purpose. The operation phase will involve a number of skilled and unskilled workers. Total employment generation for the project shall be unit-wise, 06 personnel for Resin Manufacturing Unit and 204 personnel for Particle Board Unit. Possibility to reduce automation will be explored to increase employment for approximately 10 to 20 personnel.1 There is a possibility that local people will be engaged for this purpose to the extent possible and hence improve the existing employment scenario of the region. 7.3 BENEFITS OF INDUSTRY The required raw materials and skilled and unskilled laborers will be utilized maximum from the local area. The increasing industrial activity will boost the commercial and economical status of the locality, to some extent. In brief it can be concluded that, the proposed activities will not produce adverse impact on sanitation, communication and community health, as sufficient measures have been proposed to be taken under the Environmental Management Plan. Due to proposed project, the surrounding environment will not face any problem related to pollution because all kind of wastes will be handled properly and No alteration in transport routes will be required. 7.4 DIRECT REVENUE EARNING BENEFITS TO THE NATIONAL AND STATE EXCHEQUER Excise duty, State sales tax or VAT, Income by way of registration of trucks, Payment of road tax and payment of tax for interstate movements, Income tax from individual as well as corporate taxes from company and ancillary units. Indirectly, the proposed project will help the Government by paying different taxes (sales tax, excise duty, etc.) from time to time, which is a part of revenue and thus, will help in developing the area. 7.5 SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES An obligation, beyond that required by the law and economics, for a firm to pursue long term goals that are good for society the continuing commitment by business to behave ethically and contribute to economic development while improving the quality of life of the workforce and their families as well as that of the local community and society at large.


e n - V I S I n


The basic amenities viz. roads, transportation, electricity, proper sanitation, medical facilities, etc. will be developed as far as possible; and overall the proposed project will change/improve the socio-economic conditions of the area. 1. Corporate Social Responsibility India has a long history of community and social initiatives being taken up by the corporate. Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) has been in practice by the big Indian corporations for a considerable period. The goal of CSR is to hold the Company responsible for social activities and encourage a positive impact through these activities on the environment, consumers, employees, communities, stakeholders and all other related spheres. Usually CSR is characterized by the following aspects:

• Responsible entrepreneurship

• Voluntary initiatives beyond legislative requirements and contractual obligations

• Activities to benefit the employees, business relevant groups, the society as a whole and the environment around the area

• A positive contribution to the society by minimizing negative effects

• Regular activities rather than one-time-events

Implementation of CSR activities is a very challenging task which M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. is interested to take up with consistency and determination. The Company plans the implementation of chosen initiatives and follows through with commitment across the organization to make this happen and ensures that implementation will be successful, with resources, milestones, measurement, and accountability. The Industry intends to undertake CSR activities in and around their Plant. A total amount of Rs. 280 lacs would be utilized for CSR programme for five years which is 5% of total project cost that is Rs. 5,652 lacs (Particle Board unit Rs. 5,522 lacs and for Resin Manufacturing unit Rs. 130 lacs) and yearly Rs. 56 lacs for which activities with its estimated cost is given in table-7.1 for benefitting the society at large and the local rural community in particular for the period of 5 years after that the company will do as per the regulations. Keeping the local situation in view it has been felt that the Company will be able to take a wide range of initiatives including drinking water, health, education, agriculture and a range of other activities. With time it will progressively be able to find new ways to address social, economic, and environmental effects of their business while balancing conflicting demands. Plan of Actions The Company will carry out the CRS activities and collect information from the employees about their- social background, exposure to development issues, skills and ideas, etc. This will help in involving the interested employees in CSR activities. An initial assessment of current status of all programmes- both for the Company as well as for the Government schemes in the area, a need identification survey also help to plan CSR activities and initiate new activities in the field. It will also collect employees’ background and interest, funding possibilities, information regarding local Governing Bodies (Gram Panchayats), Community Based Organizations (CBOs), None Governmental Organizations (NGOs), local clubs and other partners etc. An annual plan or calendar will be prepared on the basis of initial assessment. Indicators for assessing the progress of initiatives and a systemic database on CSR activities shall be developed with inputs from employees. The Company shall submit a report of its activities on completion of each quarter in a year. A strategic review should follow in order to streamline the CSR programs. Basic work space and facilities will be provided by the Company at its campus. Budget for each activity should be outlined in the annual calendar/plan. The working contract shall be governed by a Terms of Reference (ToR) mutually agreed by consultant and the Company. CSR activities will have manifold practical approaches which are as follows:

e n - V I S I n


FIGURE- 7.1 EFFECT OF CSR ACTIVITIES ON VARIOUS AREAS

It is expected that undertaking CSR will influence the Company in the following ways:

• Better customer satisfaction and loyalty due to work/life balance • Higher motivation and loyalty of employees, resulting in a higher creativity and innovativeness • Better publicity for its activities • Better position at the labour market and better networking with business partners and authorities

including better access to public funds due to a better Company image • Cost savings and increased profitability due to a more efficient deployment of human and resources • Increased turnover/sales due to a competitive advantage derived from the above

The approach of this programme will be a preventive one through life cycle approach. The salient feature of activities is as follows: a. Safe Drinking Water Facility

Providing facilities for safe drinking water in villages through installation of water purifier and pipeline water supply.

b. Health Care Facility Organizing first aid trainings twice a year, paying the hospital fees of needy peoples in villages, develop one primary health centre coordinating with local governing bodies, carried out Information Education and Communication (IEC) programme.

c. New techniques in Agriculture Training to local farmers about new techniques for cultivation by experts and/or annual tour for the new techniques about farming to local farmers

d. Awareness Programmes Awareness creation in schools, in villages among youth and among young girls through organizing lectures and programmes of experts on various subjects

e. Construction of Rain Water Harvesting Rainwater harvesting structures in nearby villages as well as in industry camps also.

f. Promoting Education Award (books and sponsorships shall be given to the first three students of the area in nearby schools)

g. Development of village schools Develop schools through donations of various equipments, repairing of infrastructures and establishing Industrial Training Institute (ITI) / vocational centre in villages.

h. Low cost Latrine for tribal Support needy households who want to construct sanitary latrine at their houses

i. Plantation Plantation at roadsides and in villages

j. Park/Playground Development of parks/Playground of village parks

CSR

Market

Environment Society

Employees

Comprehensive approach

e n - V I S I n


k. Sports Support and sponsor to the sports activities in nearby areas

2. Financing Plan The estimated budget for the planned CSR activities is as follows: In future the responsibilities for all these facilities will be handed over to the Government. A yearly CSR cost bifurcation for 5 years is given in below table: TABLE - 7.1 PROPOSED CSR ACTIVITIES

NO. ACTIVITIES DETAIL TOTAL (Rs.)

1. Safe Drinking Water Facility Provide facility of Safe drinking water 15,50,000

2. Health Care Facility Training, payment of bills and development of PHC 10,50,000

3. New techniques in Agriculture Tour and/or Training to Farmers 3,10,000

4. Awareness Programmes Awareness of various subjects 3,50,000

5. Construction of Rain Water Harvesting

Rainwater harvesting structures in nearby villages 10,00,000

6. Promoting Education Award to outstanding students 2,25,000

7. Development of village schools Donation of equipments in schools 2,50,000

8. Construction of Low cost latrines Construction of low cost latrine for Tribal coordinating with Government

2,60,000

9. Plantation Plantation on roadsides and in villages 2,00,000

10. Park/Playground Development of parks/playground 1,55,000

11. Sports Support sports activities 2,50,000

Total 56,00,000

e n - V I S I n


CHAPTER – 8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 8.1 INTRODUCTION Industrial development is associated with a few positive and negative impacts on the environment. The negative impacts should not hinder industrial development but they should be properly mitigated. An Environmental Management Plan (EMP) has been prepared for the proposed MUF Resin Unit of M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. to minimize negative impacts and is formed on the basis of prevailing environmental conditions and likely impacts of this project on various environmental parameters. This plan will also facilitate monitoring of environmental parameters. This EMP includes schemes for proper scientific treatment and disposal mechanism for air, liquid and solid/hazardous pollutants. Apart from this, green belt development, safety aspect of the workers, noise control, fire protection etc. are also included in it. 8.2 PURPOSE OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN Various purposes of the environmental management plan are listed below:

To treat and dispose off all the pollutants viz. liquid, gaseous and solid waste so as to meet statutory requirements (Relevant Pollution Control Acts) with appropriate technology.

To support and implement work to achieve environmental standards and to improve the methods of environmental management.

To promote green-belt development. To encourage good working conditions for employees. To reduce fire and accident hazards. Budgeting and allocation of funds for environment management system. To adopt cleaner production technology and waste minimization program.

8.3 DETAILS OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 8.3.1 DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE 8.3.1.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT Construction phase will be for a short period and hence the impacts will also be for a short and temporary period. During construction activities, mainly emission of dust and gases from movement of vehicles and construction activity is expected. However, following measures will be taken to reduce/contain such emissions:

Preparation of paved internal movement roads will be taken up at the initial stage of civil construction work.

Water will be sprinkled on loose top soil to prevent re-suspension of dust into ambient air due to movement of vehicles etc.

Separate civil construction material storage yard will be created within the site and it shall be enclosed.

Possibility of raising green belt along with construction activity will also be explored. Transport vehicles and construction equipments / machineries will be properly maintained to reduce

air emissions. Vehicles and equipments will be periodically checked for pollutant emissions against stipulated

norms. Idle running of vehicles will be minimized during material loading / unloading operations. Exhaust vent of D.G. set will be kept at proper height to ensure quick dispersal of gaseous emissions. All construction workers will be provided appropriate Personal Protective Equipments (PPEs) like dust

mask, ear plug, helmet, safety belt etc. and made to wear them during working hours.

e n - V I S I n


8.3.1.2 WATER ENVIRONMENT Water required for construction of proposed project will be met from ground water using existing bore well. The quantity of water will be small. Hence, no major impact on existing water resources of the study area is envisaged. Further, there will be no housing facilities at site for construction workers and hence a major source of impact on water environment will be avoided. Proper and sufficient sanitary facilities will be provided to construction workers to maintain all hygienic conditions at site. Storm water drain compatible with the local hydrological pattern of the area, is provided to carry-off, any run-off or storm water from the premises. Care should be taken during construction work & will not create any obstruction/dips in the topography which can lead to accumulation of water within premises leading to undesirable consequences like health and hygiene problems, etc. 8.3.1.3 NOISE ENVIRONMENT Following measures are proposed during construction period to mitigate adverse impacts:

Construction machinery and vehicles will undergo periodic maintenance to keep them in good working condition.

All machineries to be used for construction purpose will be of highest standard of reputed make and compliance of noise pollution control norms by these equipments will be emphasized by the company.

Feasibility of putting up acoustic enclosure / temporary barrier around areas with high noise levels will also be explored.

All construction workers working in high noise areas will be provided appropriate PPEs like ear muffs and made to wear them during working hours.

Possibility of raising green belt along with construction activity will also be explored so as to serve as a noise barrier.

8.3.1.4 LAND ENVIRONMENT Following steps are proposed to take care of impact of construction activity on project land area:

On completion of civil works, all debris etc. will be completely removed from site to avoid any incompatibility with future use.

Other materials like paints; diesel, etc. will be properly stored and handled to prevent any spillage on land.

All the wastes will be stored at a designated site within the premises to prevent scattered discharge on land.

8.3.1.5 SOLID WASTE Main solid waste generation during construction phase will be construction debris like rubble, brick bats, debris, steel scrap, wooden scrap, sand, gravel, etc. However, these materials are inert in nature and will not result into leaching of any substance or constituent. These materials will be properly sorted and will be used within premises for filling of low lying areas. Wooden scrap, steel scrap will be given to scrap dealers. On completion of civil work, all debris etc. will be completely removed from site to avoid any incompatibility with future use. 8.3.1.6 ECOLOGY Project proponent is going to setup MUF Resin unit in the existing premises of particle board. So there will be no major impact on ecology is anticipated. However, possibility of rising greenbelt along with starting of construction activity will help to enhance ecological environment. 8.3.1.7 SOCIO-ECONOMIC As there will be no temporary housing colony for construction workers, neither socio-economic impact due to the same is envisaged. Overall socio-economic effect of construction phase will be positive due to direct and indirect employment opportunity for the local livings. 8.3.2 DURING OPERATION PHASE Operation phase of any industry is being longer in duration and because of its potential to create continuous impacts. It is quite important from the impact point of view, comprehensive and effective EMP has to be prepared and implemented to safe-guard environmental concerns during operation phase of any unit.

e n - V I S I n


8.3.2.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT The air pollutants in the plant may be classified broadly into particulate matter like dust, fumes etc. and gases like SO2, NOx etc. The measure to control the air pollution will ensure the ambient air quality standards as laid down by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) for industrial areas. The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is a site specific plan developed to ensure that the project is implemented in an environmental sustainable manner where all contractors and subcontractors, including consultants, understand the potential environmental risks arising from the proposed project and take appropriate actions to properly manage that risk. EMP also ensures that the project implementation is carried out in accordance to the design by taking appropriate mitigative actions to reduce adverse environmental impacts during its life cycle. The plan outlines existing and potential problems that may adversely impact the environment and recommends corrective measures where required. The plan outlines roles and responsibility of the key personnel and contractors who are charged with the responsibility to manage the project site at Hansot. The system proposed for air pollution control will provide acceptable environment condition in the working areas and abate air pollution in the surrounding area of the plant. The technological equipment and processes have been selected with the above objectives. Depending on quality of emission from different sources, suitable air pollution control system will be provided. The Stack height will be as per CPCB guidelines to ensure ground level concentration of different pollutants within permissible limit. Dust collection equipment such as fabric filter, etc. will be adopted to remove particulate matter from gas streams. The pollutant itself will be collected through suction hoods, ducts, etc. Following measures are proposed to mitigate negative impact of operation phase of the project on the surrounding air environment:

Bag filter and multi cyclone will be installed to the stack attached to boiler. Height of all the stacks will be as per statutory requirement. Adequate spares of critical components of dust collection systems will be kept to ensure trouble-free

operations and continuous compliance to emission norms. Transport vehicles will be properly maintained to reduce air emissions. Vehicles will be periodically checked for pollutant emissions against stipulated norms. Idle running of vehicles will be minimized during material loading / unloading operations.

8.3.2.2 CONTROL OF SECONDARY FUGITIVE EMISSIONS Fugitive emissions from the proposed plant would be significant as there will be air pollution due to activities like material handling and transfer points of materials and movement of vehicles. These operations generate large quantity of dust. Specific instances of fugitive dust generation may include dust blown by wind from the raw-materials stockpile, dust caused by vehicular traffic etc, Good housekeeping, proper maintenance, wetting of dusty areas, use of enclosed storage wherever feasible etc., would considerably reduce fugitive dust. For effective prevention and control of fugitive emissions, Company shall implement follow:

Enclosure shall be provided for all the loading and unloading operations, if possible. All transfer points shall be fully enclosed. Airborne dust shall be control by sprinkling of water. All roads shall be paved on which movement of raw materials or products will take place. Preventive measures shall be employed to minimize dust build up on road. Maintenance of air pollution control equipment shall be done regularly. All the workers shall be provided with disposable dust mask. Green belt will be developed around the plant to arrest the fugitive emissions. Regular training shall be given to the personnel operating and maintaining fugitive emissions control

systems. The fugitive emission will be monitored at following locations within plant area as per CPCB guidelines

e n - V I S I n


8.3.2.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT It will be ensure that, water consumption should not exceed than committed requirement by installing water meter.

Small manmade stream passing through site will be covered without disturbing its flow. It will be ensure that there will be no contamination of stream. Rainwater harvesting will be carried out to recharge ground water and store for future use. CPCB norms will be strictly followed for on-land irrigation. Maximum reuse and recycle of water shall be carried out and zero discharge shall be followed to

reduced fresh water consumption. Possibilities to save 12 to 15% of fresh water uptake during next 3 years shall be explore.1

Details of water consumption, waste water generation and its management is already presented in chapter-2. 8.3.2.3.1 RAIN WATER HARVESTING SCHEME Introduction Geologically, the study area comprises of unconsolidated alluvium. These sediments believed to be fluvio marine origin. The water can be replenished by the rainwater. Hence, the rainwater harvesting is important in view to sustainable development. Water Requirement Water requirement of the project is tabulated for particle board unit and resin manufacturing unit. Only 2.5 KLD water will be required for the MUF resin unit (For Domestic and Cooling Tower) and 3.0 KLD water will be required for the particle board unit (Only for Domestic), and rest water 33 KLD water will be used only for greenbelt development. Details of water requirement is presented in following table-8.1. TABLE-8.1 DETAILS OF WATER REQUIREMENT

SR. NO. SECTION

WATER CONSUMPTION (LITERS/DAY)

LOSSES (LITERS/

DAY)

WASTE WATER GENERATION (LITERS/DAY)

EFFECTIVE WATER

CONSUMPTION (M3/YEAR)

REMARK

A Particle Board Unit

1 Domestic 3000 200 2800 1095 365 working days per year Sub Total, A 3000 200 2800 1095

B Resin Manufacturing Unit

1 Domestic 500 50 450 182.5 365 working days per year

2 Cooling tower

2000 1700 300 720 360 working days per year

Sub Total, B 2500 1750 750 1802.5 -

C For Gardening

1 Plantation 33000 33000 0 9900 300 days per year for watering Sub Total, C 33000 33000 0 9900

Grand Total 38500 34950 3550 12797.5 -

Rainfall

It is apparent that the source of water is only the precipitation. The precipitation is received in the form of rainfall in the study area. The study area receives 780 mm annual average rainfall (average of last 22 years rainfall 1991-2012). Table-8.2 and figure-8.1 show the average annual rainfall. The maximum rainfall received is 1322 mm in 1994 and minimum rainfall received is 402 mm in 2012 in the study area.


e n - V I S I n


TABLE-8.2 AVERAGE ANNUAL RAINFALL

SR. NO. YEAR RAINFALL (MM) SR. NO. YEAR RAINFALL (MM) 1 1991 433 12 2002 1023 2 1992 942 13 2003 872 3 1993 833 14 2004 781 4 1994 1322 15 2005 956 5 1995 669 16 2006 978 6 1996 744 17 2007 926 7 1997 880 18 2008 758 8 1998 1077 19 2009 430 9 1999 523 20 2010 612

10 2000 533 21 2011 610 11 2001 857 22 2012 402

Average 708 FIGURE-8.1 AVERAGE ANNUAL RAINFALL GRAPH

(Source: GWSSB and IMD) Rainwater Available For Harvesting

The rainwater available for harvesting is calculated by multiplying area available in plant premises with average annual rainfall with appropriate run off coefficient. The rainwater available for harvesting is 22, 586.23 m3/year. Rainwater calculation for all plant is given in table-8.3 TABLE-8.3 CALCULATION OF RAINWATER AVAILABLE FOR HARVESTING

SR. NO. LAND USE

APPRO-XIMATE

AREA (M2)

EFFECTIVE CONSIDER FOR

RAINWATER HARVESTING

(M2)

AVERAGE ANNUAL RAINFALL (IN M)

RUN OFF COEFFICIENT

RAINWATER AVAILABLE

FOR HARVESTING

(M3)

EFFECTIVE RAINWATER

AVAILABLE FOR HARVESTING

(M3)

1 Built up Area 18,453.24 18,453.24 0.78 0.80 14393.53 11514.82

2 Greenbelt Area 24,908.96 12,454.48 0.78 0.70 9714.49 6800.15

3 Storage Area 21,701.86 0.00 0.78 0.00 0.00 0.00

4 Road 7,270.99 7,270.99 0.78 0.75 5671.37 4253.53

5 Other Area 64.95 32.475 0.78 0.70 25.33 17.73

Total 72,400.00 38,211.19 29,804.72 22,586.23

e n - V I S I n


Water Balance

The water balance is estimated by comparing total water consumption with respect to rain water available for harvesting. The water consumption is calculated as per table-8.1. The water balance estimation is given in table-8.4. TABLE-8.4 WATER BALANCE

Water Consumption (m3/year)

Rainwater Available for harvesting (m3)

Water Balance (m3/year)

12,797.5 22,586.23 9,788.73 Rainwater Harvesting Plan

The static water level in the study area varies between 0.5 m to 9.38 m, particularly the project site has static water level is 2.81 m from the existing groundwater level. The area is potential to water logging and hence it is not advisable to recharge the groundwater aquifer. Hence, the groundwater recharge structure is not suggested. However, the quality of groundwater is moderate to saline. The rain water can be collected and utilised for domestic, plantation and industrial use as the rain water is having good quality of water. For this, they can construct a tank for collection of rain water at appropriate location. The dimension of the water tank is given in the table-8.5. It is suggested that 15 m length, 15 m wide and 3 m deep and 3 m high tank can be constructed to match the annual requirement of water. TABLE-8.5 WATER TANK DIMENSION

LENGTH (IN M) WIDTH (IN M) HEIGHT (IN M) VOLUME (M3)

16 15 6 1440

16 15 6 1440

Total (in m) 2880 8.3.2.4 NOISE ENVIRONMENT Following precautionary measures will be adopted to control the noise level:

Noise generating sources and their platforms will be maintained properly to minimize noise vibrations generated by them

Personnel working near the noisy machines in different plant locations, will be provided with well designed ear muffs / plugs (effective noise reduction 10-15 dBA)

Green belt will be improved to act as a noise barrier. Noise barriers / shields in the form of walls, beams will be provided around the units wherever found

feasible Training to personnel will be imparted to generate awareness about effects of noise and importance of

using PPEs (Personal Protective Equipments). 8.3.2.5 LAND ENVIRONMENT There will be no major generation of hazardous waste from the project. A small quantity of used/waste oil will be generated which will be properly stored and reused for lubrication purpose. There will be no disposal of effluent on land as there is no industrial effluent will be generated due to proposed project. 8.3.2.6 SOLID WASTE

Hazardous waste i.e. used lubricating oil will be stored in 200 liter HDPE drums (High-Density Poly- Ethylene drums) & will be re-used in plant for lubrication and remaining will be given to CPCB registered recycler / re-processor of oil.

Discarded bags will be stored and returned to raw material suppliers.

e n - V I S I n


Above stated solid wastes will be stored separately in a “Solid Waste Storage Area” within the factory premises. It will have non percolating R.C.C. floor and covered roof. The storage area will have proper illumination and ventilation and equipped with fire extinguisher device wherever required. A sign-board will be put out-side the storage area marked “Solid Waste Storage Area”.

Sewage sludge will be generated from the proposed 5 KLD Sewage Treatment Plant and the same will be used as manure in greenbelt development.2

Non-hazardous dried bio-sludge from septic tank will be rich in nutrients and hence will be used as fertilizer and nutrient within premises for gardening.

8.3.2.7 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT 8.3.2.7.1 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT The plant species identified for greenbelt development can be planted using pitting technique. Width of the green belt in the available land area may prove difficult for many industries to attain for one or more reasons. Hence it can be decided to have green belt in places available around the industry (source oriented plantation) as well as around the nearby habituated area (receptors oriented plantation). The choice of plats for green belt should includes, shrubs and trees. The intermixing of trees and shrubs should be such that the foliage area density in vertical is almost uniform. The pit size has to be either 45 cm x 45 cm x 45 cm or 60 cm x 60 cm x 60 cm. Bigger pit size will be considered at marginal and poor quality soil. Soil used for filling the pit should be mixed with well decomposed farm yard manure or sewage sludge at the rate of 2.5 kg (on dry weight basis) and 3.6 kg (on dry weight basis) for 45cm x 45 cm x 45 cm and 60 cm x 60 cm x 60 cm size pits respectively. The filling of soil has to be completed at least 5-10 days before actual plantation. Healthy sapling of identified species should be planted in each pit with the commencement of monsoon. Provision for regular and liberal watering during the summer period during the commissioning stage of the plant will be arranged from the local available resources. After the proposed plant became operational, the authorities responsible for plantation will also make adequate measures for the protection of the saplings. About total 34% of area (24,904.96 sq.m.) shall be developed as green belt at plant boundary, road side, around offices & buildings. In Green belt area about 1,000 trees per acre of land (as per norms) shall be planted. 8.3.2.7.2 RECOMMENDED PLANTS FOR GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT Greenbelts are an effective mode of control of air pollution, where green plants form a surface capable of absorbing air pollutants and forming a sink of pollutants. Leaves with their vast area in a tree crown, sorbs pollutants on their surface, thus effectively reduce pollutant concentration in the ambient air. Often the adsorbed pollutants are incorporated in the metabolic pathway and the air is purified. Plants grown to function as pollution sink are collectively referred as greenbelts. An important aspect of a greenbelt is that the plants are living organism with their varied tolerance limit towards the air pollutants. A green belt is effective as a pollutant sink only within the tolerance limit of constituent plants. Planting few, known pollutant sensitive species along with the tolerant species within a green belt however, do carry out an important function of indicator species apart from function as pollution sink, greenbelt would provide other benefit like aesthetic improvement of the area and providing suitable habitats for birds and animals. 8.3.2.7.3 SELECTION OF PLANTS FOR GREEN BELTS The main limitation for plants to function as scavenger of pollutants are, plant’s interaction to air pollutants, sensitivity to pollutants, climatic conditions and soil characteristics. While making choice of plants species for cultivation in green belts, due consideration has to be given to the natural factor of bio-climate. Xerophytes plants are not necessarily good for greenbelts; they with their sunken stomata can withstand pollution by avoidance but are poor absorber of pollutants. Character of plants mainly considered for affecting absorption of pollutant gases and removal of dust particle are as follows. FOR ABSORPTION OF GASES:

Tolerance towards pollutants in question, at concentration, that are not too high to be instantaneously lethal

Longer duration of foliage 2 Incorporated in accordance with public hearing

e n - V I S I n


Freely exposed foliage Adequate height of crown Openness of foliage in canopy Big leaves (long and broad laminar surface) Large number of stomatal apertures

FOR REMOVAL OF SUSPENDED PARTICULAR MATTER

Height and spread of crown. Leaves supported on firm petiole Abundance of surface on bark and foliage Roughness of bark Abundance of axillary hairs Hairs or scales on laminar surface Protected Stomata

TABLE-8.6 RECOMMENDED PLANT SPECIES

PLANT SPECIES HABIT TOLERANCE LIMIT

STOMATAL INDEX

MODE OF REGENERATION

Acacia auriculiformis Tree Tolerant 10.9 Seeds Acacia leucophloea Shrub T 12.01 Seeds Ailanthus excelsa Tree T 13.01 Seeds, shoot, root cuttings Alstona scholaris Tree T 15.23 seeds Azadirachta indica Tree T 29.2 Seeds Bauninia recemosa Tree T 25.68 Seeds Bauhinia acuminata Tree T 22.31 Seeds Bauhinia purpurea Tree T 23.58 Seeds Bambusa vulgaris Tree/ Shrub T Cutting Bougainvillea spectabilis Shrub T 32.53 Cutting Caesalpinia pulcherrima Tree T 29.09 Seeds and Cuttings Callistemon citrinus Small tree T 127.49 Seeds Cassia javanica Tree T seeds Cassia siamea Tree T 21.2 Seeds Clerodendrum inerme Shrub T 18.02 Seeds/cuttings Delonix regia (Gulmohur) Tree Sensitive 14.38 Seeds /stem cutting Dendrocalamus strictus Shrub/ tall grass T - Seeds/stem cuttings Hibiscus rosa-sinensis Small tree T 23.32 stem cutting Ixora arborea Small tree T 17.3 stem cutting Ixora rosea Small tree T 20.30 Stem cutting Kegelia Africana Small tree T 12.90 Seeds Lantana camara shrub T 12.13 Seeds/cuttings Lowsonia intermis Shrub T 17.0 Seeds/cuttings Mangifera indica Tree S 30.77 Seeds/ budding/grafting Melia azadirachta Tree T Seeds /stem cutting Nerium indicum Shrub T 15.7 Cutting Peltophorum pterocarpum Tree T 16.78 Seeds Polyathia longifolia Tree Sensitive 22.27 sedds Prosopis cineraria Tree T 18.1 Seeds/root suckers Syzygium cumini tree T 20.60 Seeds Tecoma satans Shrub T 23.08 Seeds/ cuttings Terminalia catapppa Tree T 20.9 seeds Thespesia populneoides Tree T 29.81 Seeds/ cuttings Thevetia peruviana Shrub T 27.8 Seeds

e n - V I S I n


8.3.2.7.4 PLANTATION ALONG ROAD SIDES Automobiles are the source of pollution of gaseous and particulate pollutants. Component of green belt on road side hence should be with both absorbers of gases as well as of dust particles. The choice of plants for road side should include shrubs of height 1 to 1.5 meter and trees of 3-5 meter height. Medium sized trees, alternating with shrubs are ideal for sorption of particulates and gases, as the company is doing the same in existing plant. The budgetary plan is given in the table-8.7. TABLE-8.7 BUDGETARY OUTLETS OF GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT FOR FIVE YEARS

SR. No. YEAR NO. OF PLANTS BUDGET (RS.)

1. 1st Year 2000 100000 2. 2nd Year 1500 75000 3. 3rd Year 1000 50000 4. 4th Year 1000 50000 5. 5th Year 500 25000

TOTAL 6000 3,00,000 8.3.2.8 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASPECTS EMP for the Socio-economic aspects prepare in concern with the sustainable development, management team shall have to develop ideology to give preference local people in recruitment. Management team shall prepare an annual plan of CSR activities. All these positive contribution to the society will minimize negative effects. 8.3.2.9 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY Following measures will be adopted in the plant:

All measures related to safety such as safety appliances, training, safety awards, posters, slogans will be undertaken.

The workers exposed to noisy sources will be provided with ear muffs/plugs.

Adequate facilities safe for drinking water and toilets will be provided to the employees.

The fire and safety equipment will be properly utilized and maintained regularly.

The health of the workers will be regularly checked by a well qualified doctor and proper records will be kept for each worker.

8.3.2.10 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS For good housekeeping of the proposed project, following measures will be planned:

Maintaining cleanliness of roads to prevent accumulation of dust and waste material.

Inculcating positive attitude among employees for good house-keeping.

Maintaining hygienic conditions in canteens, near drinking water source and toilets. 8.3.2.11 CONCEPT OF WASTE-MINIMISATION, RECYCLE/REUSE/RECOVER TECHNIQUES,

ENERGY CONSERVATION, AND NATURAL RESOURCE CONSERVATION Waste-minimisation: Process optimization can be done by using latest technology equipment. Fly ash will be sold to nearby brick manufacturers. Recycle/reuse/recover: Zero discharge concepts will be adopted. Waste water generated from cooling tower will be collected and reuse for gardening purpose. Dust collected from air pollution control equipment and ash will be sold to brick manufacturers for the reuse. Sewage sludge generated from proposed STP will be used as manure in greenbelt development.3 The ancillary source of hazardous waste generation will be used/wasted oil which will be reuse within plan or sell to MoEF approved scrap vendors, 3 Incorporated in accordance with public hearing

e n - V I S I n


discarded barrels/ drums/ bags/ liners /carboys from the raw material handling & storage will be sold to GPCB approved scrap vendors for recycle/reuse. Natural Resource Conservation: To conserve ground water rain water harvesting will be carried out through store rain water for future use. Energy Conservation: To conserve energy, company will use traditional light bulbs with Compact Fluorescent Lamps (CFLs) means reduction in usage of 1/4th of the total energy consumption. 8.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL In addition to preparing an EMP, it is also necessary to have a permanent organizational set up to ensure its effective implementation. Hence, proposed plant will create a team consisting of officers from various departments to co-ordinate the activities concerned with management and implementation of the environmental control measures. This team will undertake the activity of monitoring the stack emissions, ambient air quality, noise level etc. either departmentally or by appointing external agencies wherever necessary. Regular monitoring of environmental parameters will be carried-out to find out any deterioration in environmental quality and also to take corrective steps, if required, through respective internal departments. The Environmental Management Cell will also collect data about health of workers, green belt development etc. An organogram of the Environmental Management Cell is presented in figure-8.2. FIGURE-8.2 AN ORGANOGRAM OF ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL

The cell will also be responsible for monitoring of the plant safety and safety related systems which include:

Checking of safety related operating conditions.

Visual inspection of safety equipments.

Preparation of a maintenance plan and documentation of maintenance work specifying different maintenance intervals and the type of work to be performed.

Other responsibilities of the cell will include:

Conduct and submit annual Environmental Audit. A SPCB registered agency will be retained to generate the data in respect of air, water, noise and soil and prepare the Environmental Audit report. Timely renewal of Consolidated Consents & Authorization (CC & A) will also be taken care of.

Submitting environmental monitoring report to SPCB. Data monitored by the cell will be submitted to the Board regularly and as per the requirement of SPCB. The cell will also take mitigate or corrective measures as required or suggested by the Board.

Keeping the management updated on regular basis about the conclusions / results of monitoring activities and proposes measures to improve environment preservation and protection.

Conducting regular safety drills and training programs to educate employees on safety practices. A qualified and experienced safety officer will be responsible for the identification of the hazardous

Director

Manager

Dy. Manager (Env.) Asst. Manager (Safety)

e n - V I S I n


conditions and unsafe acts of workers and advise on corrective actions, organize training programs and provide professional expert advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health.

Conducting safety and health audits to ensure that recommended safety and health measures are followed.

8.5 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY The Company has an environment policy approved by the Director which is attached as annexure-X. The standard operating procedure will be prepared after implementation of the project. 8.6 REPORTING SYSTEM TO THE DIRECTORS A responsible person or officer collect the Environment and safety compliance data and submit it to their manager & he/she submit a signed Environment and safety compliance report to the Directors. Any Environment related non compliances / violations / notices will be taken as immediate action. 8.7 BUDGETORY PROVISIONS FOR EMP Adequate budgetary provisions have been made by M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. Management for execution of environmental management plans. The details of capital and recurring (per annum) budget earmarked for pollution control / monitoring equipment; operation and maintenance of pollution control facilities, for greenbelt development and maintenance will be as given in table-8.8. TABLE-8.8 COST OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES (RS. IN LAKHS)

SR. NO. ITEM RS. IN LACS

1. CAPITAL EXPENDITURE: Pollution control measures 13.0

2. RECURRING EXPENDITURE PER ANNUM: Recurring expenditure on environmental management cell and on pollution control systems

2.5

e n - V I S I n


CHAPTER – 9 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION 9.1 INTRODUCTION M/s. Krifor Industries Private Limited has proposed Captive Resin Manufacturing Unit (1500 TPM) in existing premises of particle board manufacturing unit located at Survey No.: 35/1, 35/2 & 36, Village Alva, Taluka Hansot, District Bharuch, Gujarat. 9.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 9.2.1 PROJECT DETAILS Category of the project : A S. No. In the schedule : 5(f), Synthetic Organic Chemicals as per EIA Notification dated

14th September, 2006 & its amendment dated 1st December, 2009 Location of the project : Survey No.: 35/1, 35/2 & 36, Village Alva, Taluka Hansot, District

Bharuch, Gujarat. Project cost for Resin Unit : Rs. 130 lacs1 Cost for EPCM (Environmental : Pollution Control Measures)

Capital cost: Rs. 13 lacs & Recurring cost: Rs. 2.5 lacs per annum.2

9.2.2 PROJECT REQUIREMENT

Land requirement: 1,132.2 Sq.m.

Water requirement & its source:

38.5 KLD for mainly cooling, domestic and for gardening purpose. 8.5 KLD will be sources from Ground water and 30.0 KLD from irrigation department

Electricity requirement & its source:

60 KVA from Dakshin Gujarat Vij Company Limited (DGVCL).

Manpower requirements: 06 personnel for resin manufacturing unit

Fuel requirement & its source:

Lignite Coal: 25 MTPD from mines located at Tadkeshwar/Kutch. HSD: 15 LPD from nearest petrol pump for D. G. set.

9.2.3 RAW MATERIALS All the raw materials like urea, melamine, formaldehyde and caustic flack etc. for the production shall be sourced from the local market and near states. Transportation of all the raw materials shall be done primarily by Road only. 9.2.4 WASTE WATER GENERATION AND MANAGEMENT Total waste water i.e. 3.55 KLD from Resin Unit and Particle Board Unit will be generated in the form of domestic wastewater and cooling tower blow down. Domestic waste water will be treated in proposed STP and treated water will be reused in greenbelt development.3 Cooling Tower blow down will be collected in separate tank and will be used for the green belt development. Thus, the company will achieve “Zero Discharge Effluent” concept. 9.2.5 AIR EMISSION AND AIR POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES The air emission from the proposed project will be flue gas emission from thermopack. Cyclone and Bag filter is connected to thermopack stack with Adequate Stack Height.

1 2 3 Incorporated in accordance with public hearing

e n - V I S I n


9.2.6 SOLID WASTE GENERATION & DISPOSAL Solid/hazardous waste i.e. Spent/used oil (10 lit per annum) will be reused as lubricant within plant for lubrication. Discarded resin (15 MT per annum) will be sent for incineration and fly ash (1.38 MT per day) will be sold to brick manufacturer. Sewage sludge (0.5 MT/day) will be generated from proposed STP will be used as manure.1 9.3 BASELINE ENVIRONMENT The baseline environmental quality of Air, water, soil, noise, socioeconomic status, and ecology has been assessed in the post-monsoon season during October to November, 2013 within study area of 10 km radial distance from the project site. 9.3.1 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY The ambient air samples were collected from six locations within 5 km radius from the project site and analyzed for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx and VOC. As per the monitoring in Post-monsoon season, the arithmetic mean values of PM10 varied between 38.4 to 52.4 μg/m3. The arithmetic mean value for PM2.5 was 31.1 to 43.0 μg/m3. The arithmetic mean value for SO2 was 11.0 to 17.3 μg/m3. The arithmetic mean values of NOx varied between 15.6 to 25.3 μg/m3, while VOC was not detected from sampling locations. From the above mentioned results it is observed that PM10, PM2.5, SOx, NOx, and VOC concentrations are well below the stipulated standards of CPCB/GPCB. 9.3.2 GROUND WATER QUALITY MONITORING Six nos. of ground water samples in the study area have been collected from different villages and analyzed. The pH varied in the range of 8.1 to 8.4, turbidity 1.0 to 2.1 NTU, total hardness 390 to 620 mg/l, dissolved solids 780 to 1829 mg/l, Chloride 189 to 556 mg/l, Sulphate 250 to 480 mg/l and Alkalinity 450 to 470 mg/l. 9.3.3 SURFACE WATER QUALITY MONITORING Total two nos. of surface water samples have been collected from the study area. The pH varied is from 7.1 to 7.8, the turbidity varied from 1.0 to 1.6 NTU, the dissolved solids varied from 792 to 803 mg/l, total hardness varied between 464 to 593 mg/l, chloride varied from 272 to 311 mg/l, the Sulphate varied from 178 to 192 mg/l. 9.3.4 BACKGROUND NOISE LEVEL Background noise levels were measured at six locations. The day time noise levels at all the locations ranged between 40.4-56.1 dBA. The night time noise levels at all the locations ranged between 35.9-54.3 dBA. 9.3.5 SOIL QUALITY Total of six nos. of samples have been collected from different location of the study area and analyzed. The porosity and water holding capacity of soils are in the range of 35.62% to 41.10% and 22.31% to 29.91%. TOC present in soil influences its physical and chemical properties. The TOC was present in range between 0.25 to 0.51%. 9.3.6 LAND USE PATTERN Land use within 10 km radius of the study area has been determined with the help of satellite imagery, and broadly consists of settlements, Industrial, Tank/River/reservoir, Single crop, land with scrub, land without scrub, and predominant land use is single crop. 9.3.7 SOCIO-ECONOMIC STUDY The study area consist total 43 villages of two talukas viz. Hansot and Ankleshwar. Total population of the study area as per 2001 census was 60,069 out of which 31,155 were male and 28,914 were female and as per 2011 census, total population of Bharuch district was 15,51,019 out of that 8,05,945 were male and 7,44,877 were female. As per 2001 census, there were 12,633 households in the study area, the total literates of the study area were 24,382 as the literacy rate of the study area was 40.59% and in 2011 census,


e n - V I S I n


literacy rate was 81.51% of the Bharuch district. All villages are having primary infrastructural facilities. 9.3.8 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT In the project study area, the wild animals as well as other fauna are not seen excepting domestic animals. There is no National park, wild life sanctuary present within the study area of 10 km radius. 9.4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES 9.4.1 IMPACT ASSESSMENT An effort has been made to identify various environmental, social and ecological impacts due to proposed project during construction and operation phases considering present environmental scenario as baseline. The corresponding mitigation measures to take care of the adverse impacts are also discussed in following sections. 9.4.2 IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE & ITS MITIGATION MEASURES During construction phase, the fugitive dust emission due to civil work and vehicular movement. Water spraying will be carried out to suppress the dust emission at the site and as well as on road. The increase in noise levels due to the movement of vehicles will be taken care of by regulating the movement of vehicles and the impact on the human beings will be taken care of by providing ear plugs / ear muffs. Drainage pattern and water supply system of overland water flow will not be changed during the site preparation activities. Suspended solids can be controlled by sprinkling water and by employing enclosures to construction area to allow the particles to settle down, prior to discharge. As the proposed project site is mostly barren land having shrubs & Herbs, there will not be any significant impact on the ecology of the study area. 9.4.3 IMPACT DURING OPERATION PHASE & MITIGATION MEASURES 9.4.3.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT Major air emissions are anticipated by the gaseous emissions from a single stack is a local phenomenon. Fugitive dust emission will be due to raw materials handling, loading and unloading of raw materials and finished goods, conveying and feeding point, vehicular movements etc. The ISCST3 scientific model has been used to predict the proposed air quality on the environment. The results of the air modelling study indicates that the maximum Ground Level Concentration (GLC) for the parameter PM10 is 0.72 μg/m3, PM2.5 is 0.42 μg/m3, SO2 is 2.42 μg/m3, and NOx is 0.90 μg/m3. 9.4.3.2 NOISE ENVIRONMENT The noise pollution management will be taken up in the following manner; - By providing noise barrier to the noise generating equipment, noise level will reduce below 75 dBA

noise level at 1 m distance. - Acoustic enclosures will be provided to D. G. Set to reduce the noise level. - Further, Greenbelt will help to reduce the noise level within the plant.

By these measures, it is anticipated that noise levels in the plant will be maintained below 75 dBA. 9.4.3.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT Entire domestic waste water will be treated in proposed Sewage Treatment Plant and treated water will be reused in greenbelt development.1 Cooling tower blow down will be collected in separate tank and will be used for the green belt development. Thus, the company will achieve “Zero Effluent Discharge” concept. Moreover, company will adopt rain water harvesting, which will reduce impact on ground water table. 9.4.3.4 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT About total 34% of area (24,904.96 sq.m.) shall be developed as green belt at plant boundary, road side, around office buildings. In Green belt area, about 1,000 trees per acre of land (as per norms) shall be planted.


e n - V I S I n


9.4.3.5 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASPECT Impact on Socio-Economic aspect will be mainly of Population, Migration, Culture, Economic status, Health, Education, Drinking water facility, Primary Infrastructure, etc. Due to this project population growth will be increased for direct and indirect employment related to this industry. With the increase of population, migration will also increase which impact will be directly on culture of the area. As in the CSR activity of the project improvement of the health facility, education facility and primary infrastructure facility will be improved which will definitely push up the socio-economic status of the area. 9.5 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME A regular monitoring of environmental parameters like air, water, noise and soil as well as performance of pollution control facilities and safety measures in the plant are important for proper environmental management of any project. Therefore, the environment and safety cell will handle monitoring of air and water pollutants as well as the solid wastes generation as per the requirements of GPCB/CPCB. 9.6 ADDITIONAL STUDIES Public hearing was conducted on 04th June, 2014 at11:00 hrs. at Factory Site, Village Alva, Taluka Hansot, District Bharuch, Gujarat. Major issues were raised during public hearing are employment, pollution and CSR activities.1 The management is very much aware of their obligation to protect all persons at work and others in the neighborhood that may be affected by an unfortunate and unforeseen incidence occurring at the works. Any hazard either to employees or others arising from activities at the plant site shall, as far as possible, be handled by the personnel of the company and prevented from spreading any further. However in the case of eventuality the Disaster Management plan adopted by the proponents is sufficient and may be able to control the situation. 9.7 PROJECT BENEFITS The company shall earnmarks funds of Rs. 280 lacs i.e. 5% of the total project cost which will utilize for the CSR activities for the five years after that the company will utilize the fund as per regulations. Company will carry out the CSR activities in the field of Drinking water facility, Health care, agriculture, awareness programme, Rain water harvesting, Education, Plantation, Sports, etc. 9.8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN EMP on administrative point of view is presented in this section. Environmental monitoring of different parameters will be done regularly and the activity will be coordinated by the Environmental Management Cell (EMC). Mitigation of environmental impacts has to be implemented according to the suggestions and will be monitored regularly to prevent any lapse. The EMC will be under the overall supervision of the Manager (Environment). The cell will report on a regular basis to the Director. The EMC will prepare a formal report on environmental management and mitigation at six month intervals. The company will undertake various training programmes for improving the performance of the working personnel. Special training will be arranged in regular intervals to combat emergency scenarios that may occur during the plant operation. 9 CONCLUSION Company has committed to implement all the pollution control measures to protect the surrounding environment. The project can definitely improve the regional, state and national economy. Industrial growth is an indication of socio economic development. The implementation of this project will definitely improve the physical and social infrastructure of the surrounding area.


e n - V I S I n


CHAPTER – 10 CONSULTANT ENGAGED Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Study for the proposed MUF Resin Manufacturing Unit of M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. conducted by,

Name : M/s. Envision Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd.

Address : 208, G-Tower, Shankheshwar Complex, Above Girish Group of Hospitals, Sagrampura, Surat-395 002, Gujarat.

Phone : (0261) 2470653, 2472374, 2473905

Fax : 91-261-2478518

E-mail : [email protected]

Website : www.en-vision.in

Status of accreditation with QCI/NABET

: Listed on S. No. 59 of List of Accredited EIA Consultant organizations – 168 (as on May 5, 2014)

M/s. En-vision Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd. (ISO 9001:2008 certified company) is a consulting, engineering and equipment supplier firm delivering exceptional service and quality to public and private clients in India. En-vision is working with zeal in the field of environmental engineering for more than 15 years. En-vision has a vision of supporting and being a part of development that is sustainable to our environment.

En-vision is one of the leading companies as Environmental Consultants providing the EIA study

required for Environmental Clearance from MoEF/DoEF and NOC (Consent to establish), CCA (Consent to Operate) from Pollution Control Board. En-vision has a well established laboratory with environmental monitoring and analysis of environmental parameters (Air & Water monitoring, Waste Water analysis, Stack analysis).

En-vision is also working as consultants, turnkey project executors and equipment suppliers in the field of Pollution Control (Environmental) Engineering and deals with turnkey projects in Incineration System for Solid and Hazardous waste. En-vision also does the Design, construction, erection and commission of Water Treatment Facility (Effluent treatment plants, Sewage treatment plants, etc.) and Secured Landfill sites.

En-vision is enlisted contractor with PWD, Goa as Class-I-A (One-A) in the category of Water

Supply & Waste Water Disposal. En-vision is recognized as Environmental Auditors and enlisted as consultants and pollution control equipment suppliers with Gujarat Pollution Control Board. Provide Services in the field of Structural Engineering, Water Supply Engineering and Civil Engineering. It has national cliental from state of Gujarat, Chhattisgarh, Assam, Haryana, Andra Pradesh, Rajesthan, Goa, etc and international cliental from Dubai and Egypt.

EEEPL is Member of Consulting Engineers Association of India, Indo-German Chamber of

Commerce, Society of Environmental Auditors and Consultants, Ahmedabad and Member of CII. EEEPL is operated by Mr. Nihar Doctor and Mr. Kunhal Shah, who are actively involved in achieving their vision to be a significant contributor in the development sustainable by Environment using collective technical acumen to provide services & equipments and be a part of movement of building Modern India with better environment and safety aim.

e n - V I S I n


Mr. Nihar Doctor: He possesses Bachelor’s degree in Civil Engineering and Master’s Degree exclusively in the specialized field of structural Engineering as well as Environmental Engineering. Presently he is holding the position of Director in M/s. Envision Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd. He is having fourteen years experience in Environmental Engineering field. Mr. Kunhal Shah: He possesses Bachelor’s degree in Civil Engineering and Master’s Degree exclusively in the specialized field of Environmental Engineering. Presently he is holding the position of Director in M/s. Envision Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd. He is having fourteen years experience in Environmental Engineering field. ACCREDITATION CERTIFICATE ISSUED BY QCI NABET

e n - V I S I n


e n - V I S I n


TEAM MEMBERS INVOLVED IN THE PREPARATION OF REIA/EMP REPORT List of Functional area experts (FAE’s) and associated FAE’s involved in the preparation of EIA/EMP report for M/s. Krifor Industries Pvt. Ltd. are as follows: Name of EIA Coordinator / Assignment Head involved

FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERTS INVOLVED

FUNCTIONAL AREA NAME/S

Mr. Nihar Doctor Associate: Mrs. Smitha Rajesh Mr. Jignesh Patel

LU (Land Use) Dr. Y. Rama Mohan Associate: Apoorva Ghantiwala

AQM (Meteorology, Air Quality Modeling & Prediction)

Mr. Nihar Doctor, Dr. Manoj Mishra Associate: Ms. Smitha Rajesh, Team Member: Mr. Krunal Patel, Mr. Rajendra Chokkara

AP (Air Pollution Monitoring, Prevention & Control)

Dr. Manoj Kumar Mishra Associate: Mr. Nihar Doctor, Team Member: Mr. Shwetang Patel, Jayanti Makwana, Mr. Rajendra Chokkara

WP (Water Pollution Monitoring, Prevention, & Control)

Mr. Nihar Doctor Associate: Mr. Mayur Harsora Team Member: Mr. Shwetang Patel, Jayanti Makwana, Mr. Rajendra Chokkara

EB (Ecology & Biodiversity) Dr. Manoj Eledath Associate: Mr. Satyendra Singh

SE (Socio-Economy) Dr. Rumjhum Ray Chaoudhary Associate: Mrs. Rekha Mistry, Mr. Arif Shaikh

NV (Noise & Vibration) Dr. Manoj Kumar Mishra Associate: Mr. Samir Atasbajiwala, Mr. Mayur Harsora

HG (Hydrology, Ground Water & Water Conservation)

Mr. Naresh Gor Associate: Apoorva Ghantiwala

RH (Risk Assessment & Hazard Management)

Mr. D. H. Patel Associate: Mr. Sundar Rajullu, Team Member: Ms. Smitha Rajesh, Mr. Jignesh Patel

SHW (Solid & Hazardous Waste Management)

Mr. Nihar Doctor Associate: Ms. Smitha Rajesh, Team Member: Mr. Shwetang Patel, Jayanti Makwana, Mr. Rajendra Chokkara

SC (Soil Conservation) Associate: Mr. Krunal Patel LABORATORY INVOLVED FOR BASELINE MONITORING & OTHER ANALYSIS

SR. NO. NAME OF LABORATORY NABL REGISTRATION

STATUS ROLE

1. En-vision Enviro Engg. Pvt. Ltd., Surat.

NABL certified laboratory, Certificate No. T-2256 Monitoring and Analysis

ANNEXURES

e n - V I S I n

M/S. KRIFOR INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD., BHARUCH, GUJARAT A - 1

ANNEXURE-I TERMS OF REFERENCE LETTER AWARDED BY EAC (INDUSTRY-I)

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-I (CONT.)

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-II APPLICATION FOR ABSTRACTION OF GROUND WATER FROM CGWA

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-III CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-III (CONT.)

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-IV NATIONAL AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS (NAAQS) (2009)

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-IV (CONT.)

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-V INDIAN STANDARDS/SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRIINKING WATER IS: 10500-1991

SR NO.

SUBSTANCES OR

CHARCTER- ISTICS MAX

REQUIREME- NT

(DESIRABLE LIMIT)

UNDESIRABLE EFFECTS OUT-

SIDE THE DESIRABLE

LIMIT

PERMISSIBLE LIMIT IN

ABSENCE OF ALTERNATE

SOURCE

METHOD OF TEST CI REF

OF IS: 3025

REMARKS

ESSENTIAL CHARACTERISTICS 1 Colour, Hazen

unit 5 Above this,

consumer acceptance decreases

25 4 of 3025, 1983

Extended upto 25 only if toxic

substances are not suspected in

absence of alternate Source.

2 Odour Unobjectionable - 5 of 3025,198

3

a. Test cold and when heated

b. Test at several dilutions

3 Taste Agreeable - - Test to be conducted only after

safety has been established

4 Turbidity, NTU 5 Above this, consumer acceptance decreases

10 8 Test to be conducted only after safety has been

established 5 pH Value 6.5-8.5 Beyond this range

the water will affect the mucous membrane and/or

water supply system

No relaxation 8 -

6 Total Hardness mg/L (as CaCO3)

300 Encrustation on water supply structure and

adverse effects on domestic use

600 - -

7 Iron (as Fe), mg/L

0.3 Beyond this limit,, taste/appearance are affected has

adverse effect on domestic uses and

water supply structures &

promotes iron bacteria

1.0 32 of 3025, 1964

-

8 Chlorides (as Cl-) mg/L

250 Beyond this limit taste, corrosion and palatability

are affected

1000 32 of 3025

-

9 Residual free chlorine, mg/L

0.2 - - 26 of 3025, 1986

To be applicable only when water is chlorinated tested at consumer end, when

protection against viral infection is

required it should be min 0.5 mg/L

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-V (CONT.)

SR NO.

SUBSTANCES OR


REQUIREME- NT

(DESIRABLE LIMIT)

UNDESIRABLE EFFECTS OUT-

SIDE THE DESIRABLE

LIMIT



SOURCE


OF IS: 3025

REMARKS

DESIRABLE CHARACTERISTICS 10 Dissolved

Solids, mg/L 500 Beyond this

palatability decrease and may cause gastrointestinal

irritation

2000 16 of 3025

11 Calcium (as Ca) mg/L

75 - 200 40 of 3025, 1984

12 Copper (as Cu), mg/L

0.05 Astringent,taste discoloration of

pipes, fittings and utensils will be

caused beyond this

1.5 36 of 3025, 1964

13 Manganese (as Mn), mg/L

0.1 Astringent ,taste discoloration of

pipes, fittings and utensils will be

caused beyond this

0.3 35 of 3025,1964

14 Sulphate (as SO4

-2), mg/L 200 Beyond this causes

gastrointestinal irritation when magnesium or

sodium are present

400 24 of 3025, 1986

May be extended upto 400 provided (as Mg) does not exceed 30 mg/l

15 Nitrate (as NO3-

), mg/L 45 Beyond this

methaemoglo- binemia

100 - -

16 Fluoride (as F-), mg/L

1.0 Fluoride may be kept as low as possible. High

fluoride may cause fluorosis

1. 5 23 of 3025, 1964

-

17 Phenolic substances mg/L (as C6H5OH)

0.001 Beyond this, it may cause objectionable

taste and odour

0.002 54 of 3025

18 Mercury (as Hg), mg/L

0.01 Beyond this, the water becomes toxic

No relaxation See note mercury ion

analyzer

To be tested when pollution is suspected

19 Cadmium (as Cd), mg/L

0.01 Beyond this the water becomes toxic

No relaxation See note mercury ion

analyser


20 Selenium (as Se) mg/L


No relaxation 28 of 3025, 1964


21 Arsenic (As), mg/L




e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-V (CONT.)

SR NO.

SUBSTANCES OR


REQUIREME- NT

(DESIRABLE LIMIT)

UNDESIRABLE EFFECTS OUT-SIDE

THE DESIRABLE LIMIT



SOURCE


OF IS: 3025

REMARKS

22 Cyanide (CN-), mg/L



To be tested when pollution

is suspected

23 Lead (Pb), mg/L


No relaxation See note 86 To be tested when pollution plumbosolvency is suspected

24 Zinc (as Zn), mg/L

5 Beyond this limit it can cause astringent

taste and an opalescence in water

15 39 of 3025,1964


is suspected

25 Anionic detergents mg/L (as MBAS)

0.2 Beyond this limit undesirable taste and

odour after Chlorination takes

place

1.0 Methylene blue

extraction method


is suspected

26 Chromium (as Cr+6), mg/L

0.01 May be carcinogenic above this limit

0.05 28 0f 3025 To be tested when pollution

is suspected

27 Polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons, mg/L

- May be carcinogenic - 28 of 3025,1964


is suspected

28 Mineral Oil, mg/L

0.01 Beyond this limit undesirable taste and

odour after Chlorination takes

place

0.03 Gas chromatographic method


is suspected

29 Pesticides mg/L

Absent Toxic 0.001 58 of 3025, 1964

-

30 Radioactive materials a. Alpha emitters Bq/L b. Beta emitters pci/L

- -

- -

0.1

1.0

- -

- -

31 Alkalinity (as CaCO3), mg/L

200 Beyond this limit taste becomes

unpleasant

600 13 of 3025,1964

-

32 Aluminum (as Al), mg/L

0.03 Cumulative effect is reported to cause

dementia

0.2 31 0f 3025,1964

-

33 Boron (as B), mg/L

1 - 5 29 of 3025,1964

-

Note: Atomic absorption spectrophotometric method may be used.

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-VI CLASSIFICATION OF INLAND SURFACE WATER (CPCB STANDARDS)

SR NO. CHARACTERISTICS A@ B@ C@ D@ E@

1 Dissolved Oxygen (mg/L), Min 6 5 4 4 -

2 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (mg/L), Min

2 3 3 - -

3 Total Coliform Organisms, MPN/100 ml, Max.

50 500 5000 - -

4 Total Dissolved Solids (mg/L), Max 500 - 1500 - 2100

5 Chlorides (as Cl-), mg/L, Max. 250 - 600 - 600

6 Colour, Hazen units, Max 10 300 300 - -

7 Sodium absorption ratio, Max - - - - 26

8 Boron (as B), mg/L, Max - - - - 2

9 Sulphates (as SO4-2), mg/L, Max. 400 - 400 - 1000

10 Nitrates (as NO3-), mg/L, Max 20 - 50 - -

11 Free Ammonia (as N), mg/L, Max - - - 1.2 -

12 Conductivity at 25°C, micromhos/cm, Max

- - - 1.0 2.25

13 pH value 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.0-8.0

14. Arsenic (as As), mg/L, Max 0.05 0.2 0.2 - -

15 Iron (as Fe), mg/L, Max 0.3 - 50 - -

16 Fluorides (as F), mg/L, Max 1.5 1.5 1.5 - -

17 Lead (as Pb), mg/L, Max 0.1 - 0.1 - -

18 Copper (as Cu), mg/L, Max 1.5 - 1.5 - -

19 Zinc (as Zn), mg/L, Max 15 - 15 - -

*: If the Coliform count is found to be more than the prescribed tolerance limits, the criteria for coliforms shall be satisfied if not more than 20 percent of samples show more than the tolerance limits specified, and not more than 5 percent of samples show values more than 4 times the tolerance limit. Further, the feacal coliform should not be more than 20 percent of the coliform.

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-VII CPCB RECOMMENDATIONS FOR COMMUNITY NOISE EXPOSURE (1989)

CATEGORY OF AREA

Leq (dBA) (DAYTIME)

(0600 TO 2100 HRS)

Ldn (dBA) (NIGHT TIME)

(2100 TO 0600 HRS)

Industrial Area 75 70

Commercial Area 65 55

Residential Area 55 45

Silence Zone 50 40

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-VIII DAMAGE RISK CRITERIA FOR HEARING LOSS OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY& HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA)

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DURATION PER DAY

(HOURS)

NOISE LEVEL (SLOW RESPONSE)

dBA

8 90

6 92

4 95

3 97

2 100

1.5 102

1 105

0.5 110

0.25 or Less 115

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-IX A. CHECK LIST FOR SOCIOECONOMIC STUDY

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-IX (CONT.)

�

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-IX (CONT.) B. QUESTIONNAIRE FOR SURVEY

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-IX (CONT.)

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-X ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-XI NOC OF EXISTING PARTICLE BOARD

e n - V I S I n


ANNEXURE-XI (CONT…)

m/s. krifor industries pvt. ltd.environmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/eia/10092014...m/s. krifor...

Documents